人教新课标必修4 Unit 4 Body language课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包

Unit 4 Body Language
教材分析和教材重组
教材分析
本单元的中心话题是“身势语”，介绍了“身势语”的意义，“什么是身势语”，“如何理解身势语”以及“身势语的跨文化性”。通过本单元的学习，可以帮助了解学习身势语对语言学习者的重要性。本单元的语言技能训练和语言知识训练都是围绕“身势语”这一中心话题设计的。
Warming Up 让学生通过提示的句子用身势语将其意思表演出来，这部分的设计贴近学生，用表演的方式走进本单元的主题，形式活泼而又容易激发学生的学习兴趣，为本单元Reading部分的精彩故事做好了铺垫。
Pre-reading 通过三个问题使学生明白“身势语”的不可替代性，激发学生的阅读兴趣。
Reading 是一篇介绍性的文章，开头以一个接待员的身份观察来自不同国家的客人刚见面时对身势语的不同反应，从而引出文化不同而体态语不尽相同的中心话题，避免介绍文的枯燥，更益于学生接受。
Comprehending 共有2个练习，这2个练习的设置非常科学。练习1就课文内容提出八个问题，前五个是对文章的理解，后3个是就以上内容提出自己的看法，有利于学生理解能力的提高；练习2是开放性的设计，要求学生表演出针对不同国家的人问候时的身势语，为进一步了解异国文化做准备。
Learning about Language 分为两部分，Discovering useful words and expressions是本单元的词汇练习题; Discovering useful structures是本单元的语法练习题，通过本单元的学习，要求学生熟练掌握-ing形式作定语和状语的语法功能。
Using Language分为三部分，Reading, and writing部分要求学生通过阅读另一篇文章了解更多的身势语文化并就此写一篇作文评价积极的身势语和消极的身势语，从而吸取精华去其糟粕，弘扬积极的文化精神。Listening ，writing and speaking要求通过六幅图和听力内容说出故事中的体态语言，并用相关句型把它写出来，有利于学生写作能力的提高。第三部分speaking and writing 通过观察讨论林珮的体态语言，分析她的心态，并给她提出建议，这是由身势语引出的一个开放性写作。
教材重组
将Warming Up，Pre-reading，Reading与Comprehending整合在一起上一节“阅读课”。
将Learning about Language和Workbook的using words and expressions及using structures整合在一起上一节“语言学习课”。
将Using Language设计为一节包括听说读写在内的“综合技能课（一）”。
将Workbook的READING AND LISTENING和TALKING结合在一起上一节“听说课”。
将Workbook的LISTENING TASK，READING AND WRITING TASK和SPEAKING TASK设计为一节“综合技能课（二）”。
课时分配
1st Period Reading
2nd Period Language study
3rd Period Integrating skills(Ⅰ)
4th Period Listening and Speaking
5th Period Integrating skills(Ⅱ)

Part 1: Teaching Design
(第一部分：教学设计)
Period 1: A sample lesson plan for reading
(COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?)
Aims
To develop reading ability
To learn something about body language
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by acting
Look at the list of interpretation on the right side of the chart. Perform the action or the nonverbal behavior on the left side.
Examples of Body Language
Warming up by defining—What is body language?
The gestures, poses, movements, and expressions that a person uses to communicate. ●The outward signs of a person which indicate their inner thoughts or attitude. For example, a bowed head indicates submission, a hand over the mouth indicates the person doesn’t want to talk or feels their words aren’t worth listening to. Scratching indicates nervousness. A person passing another on the street might bow their head as a subconscious sign of submission.
Conscious or unconscious bodily movements and gestures that communicate to others a person’s attitudes and feelings. This may also include dress, facial features, skin colour or other personal means of communication without words.
communication via the movements or attitudes of the body
Body language is a broad term for several forms of communication using body movements or gestures, instead of, or as a complement to, sounds, verbal language, or other forms of communication. In turn, it is one category of paralanguage, which describes all forms of human communication that are not language.
II. Pre-reading
1. Looking and saying
Look at the man in the picture below. What does he say to you by his body language?
Basically, how the ...... do I know? Or, I don’t know nothing! The shoulders are hunched and the hands are open signifying a big question mark.
2. Talking and sharing
*Body language is the quiet, secret and most powerful language of all!*According to experts, our non-verbal language communicates about 50% of what we really mean (voice tonality contributes 38%) while words themselves contribute a mere 7%.*Our bodies send out messages constantly and often we don’t recognize that we’re communicating a lot more than we realize.
*Our understanding and use of non-verbal cues in facial expression are familiar to us nearly from birth
III. Reading
1. Listening and reading aloud
Now please listen and then read aloud to the recording of the text COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM? Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
send… to do sth.派……做某事, meet … at the airport去机场接……, meet with…偶遇；碰到, at a hotel在旅馆里, represent the Chinese government代表中国政府, look around环顾四周；左顾右盼, in a curious way以奇特的方式, be followed by后面紧跟着, introduce…to…把……介绍给……, kiss… on the cheek吻……的面颊, step back向后退, appear surprised显得很吃惊, take a few steps away from…躲开……几步, at the same time与此同时, reach one’s hand out to …向……伸出手去, touch sb’s hand碰到（接触）某人的手, greet each other彼此问候, communicate with spoken language用口语交流, express one’s feelings表达某人的感情, use unspoken language不用语言, keep physical distance身体保持一定的距离, stand close to…与……站得近, approach… closely向……靠近, shake hands握手, move back a bit向后退, nod at …向……点头, behave the same way表现地一样, avoid difficulty避免困难
3. Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph
Next you are to skim the text to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph.
4. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table. Where is he/ she from? What does he/ she do when he/ she meets someone at the airport for the first time?
Name
Country
Action
Meaning
Mr Garcia
Julia Smith
George Cook
Ahmed Aziz
Madame Coulon
Answers for reference
Name
Country
Action
Meaning
Mr Garcia
Columbia
Touching Julia Smith’s shoulders and kissing her on the cheek
Greeting people
Julia Smith
Britain
Stepping back from men
Appearing surprised
George Cook
Canada
Reaching his hand out to the Japanese
Greeting people
Ahmed Aziz
Jordan
Shaking hands with men, nodding at women
Greeting people
Madame Coulon
France
Shaking hands and kissing each other twice on the cheek
Greeting people
5. Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to the teacher.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises 1 and 2 on page 26 and 27.
Closing down by checking
Check some of the following basic non-verbal cues and you’ll recognize that you already speak and translate much of the language.
“I’m surprised!” “I’m shocked!” “I’m sad!”
Additional Materials
Complete the summary of the story with one word in each blank.
Four visitors from Europe, North America, South America and Asia meet at a 1_______ hotel in Shanghai.
There seems to have been some 2_______ mistakes after introduced to each other. Mr. Garcia from Columbia 3_______ Ms Smith from Britain, touches her shoulder and kisses her on the 4_______, causing her to step away in 5_______. Mr. Cook, from Canada, reaches out his hand to the Japanese who 6_______,
Besides spoken language, people communicate by 7_______ language, that is, learned or cultural “body language”. However, not all cultures greet each other the same way.
English people usually do not stand 8______ to others or touch strangers when they first meet. But people from Spain, Italy, South American countries approach others closely, even touch them. Most world people greet each other by shaking hands while Japanese people do so by 9_______.
People from Jordan moves close to the one they greet. People from France may greet each other by shaking hands and kissing. Men from Middle East or some Muslim countries stand quite close to other men to talk and they will not shake hands with women.
Body language is either good or bad. A good 10_______ of it helps you better communicate with each other.
（Key：1. major 2. greeting 3. approaches 4. cheek 5. surprise 6. bows 7. unspoken 8. close 9. bowing 10. understanding）
Comprehension questions
1. How do people send each other message?
A. Only by words. B. Only by body language.
C. By neither words nor body language. D. By both words and body language.
2. Which of the following is NOT true according to the text?
A. In every country , people shake hands when they meet each other.
B. People from South American countries like standing close when they talk.
C. It’s not a custom for men to greet a British lady by touching her shoulder and kissing her cheek.
D. Studying body language is helpful to avoid misunderstanding in communication.
3. Which of the following can serve as the topic sentence of the passage?
A. Body language differs from culture to culture. B. People send messages not only by words.
C. Body language is necessary in our daily life. D. People don’t greet each other in the same way.
4. From the text we can conclude that _____.
A. Body language is more important than words in communication.
B. We should be careful about body language.
C. We shouldn’t use body language when we meet foreigners.
D. We should use body language as often as possible.
（Key：1. D 2. A 3. A 4. B）
Notes to some difficult sentences
1. Four people enter looking around in a curious way. 四个人进来了, 好奇地左顾右盼。
enter: vt. enter a room enter a school/college vi. enter into
本句中enter用作不及物动词, looking around in a curious way是现在分词短语作主句的伴随状语。Many people come to theme parks, looking for thrills and entertainment.
2. The first person who arrives is Mr. Garcia from Columbia, closely followed by Julia from Britain.
第一个到的是来自哥伦比亚的Garcia先生,紧跟在他后面的是来自英国的Julia.
who arrives是定语从句修饰主语the first person，closely followed by Julia from Britain是过去分词短语作主句的伴随状语。动词follow与Mr. Garcia构成逻辑上的动宾关系，所以用过去分词作状语。
3. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching strangers or being too close or too far away.
各种文化背景下的人相互问候的方式不尽相同，接触陌生人、彼此靠得太近或距离太远，都会使他们感到不舒服。
句中not all cultures greet each other the same way是部分否定句，相当与all cultures don’t greet each other the same way。
nor、neither置于句首，句子用部分倒装，即把助动词或系动词放到主语前面。
—Do you know Jim quarreled with his brother?
—I don’t know, nor do I care.
touching strangers or being too close or too far away是现在分词短语作状语。
4. People from places like Spain, Italy or South American countries approach others closely and are more likely to touch them. 来自诸如西班牙、意大利或南美国家的人们彼此站得很近，更易于触摸对方。
句中closely相当于close，作副词，英语中有许多形容词本身可以作副词，后面加-ly表抽象意义，如：
wide adj. adv.（宽广） widely adv.（广泛地）
deep adj. adv.（深） deeply adv.（深深地）
high adj. adv.（高，位置高） highly adv.（高度地）
low adj. adv.（低） lowly adv.（谦卑地）
close adj. adv.（近） closely adv.（密切地）
短语be likely to do sth. 有可能做某事
【高考链接】
1. Always read the _____ on the bottle carefully and take the right amount of medicine. (2006福建)
A. explanations B. instructions C. descriptions D. introductions
2. At this time tomorrow _____ over the Atlantic. (2003北京)
A. we’re going to fly B. we’ll be flying C. we’ll fly D. we’re to fly
3. After his journey from abroad, Richard Jones returned home, _____. (2004上海春)
A. exhausting B. exhausted C. being exhausted D. having exhausted
4. When first _____ to the market, these products enjoyed great success. (2004吉林)
A. introducing B. introduced C. introduce D. being introduced
5. The manager, _____ it clear to us that he didn’t agree with us, left the meeting room. (2005江西)
A. who has made B. having made C. made D. making
6. We saw several natives advancing towards our party, and one of them came up to us, _____ we gave some bells and glasses. (2006重庆)
A. to which B. to whom C. with whom D. with which
7. Mary never does any reading in the evening, _____. (2005全国)
A. So does John B. john does too C. John doesn’t too D. nor does John
8. — It’s burning hot today, isn’t it?
— Yes. _____? (2006福建)
A. So was it B. So it was C. So it is D. So is it
9. — People should stop using their cars and start using public transport.
— _____. The roads are too crowded as it is. (2005浙江)
A. All right B. Exactly C. Go ahead D. Fine
10. —It’ll take at least two hours to do this!
—Oh, _____! I could do it in 30 minutes. (2005天津)
A. come on B. pardon me C. you are right D. don’t mention it
【巩固练习】
1.— Did you watch the tennis final of Men’s Doubles?
— Yes, it was extremely exciting! It was a _____ fought game.
A. successfully B. bravely C. closely D. friendly
2. You are all new-comers here. Try not to make _____ to strangers.
A. ways B. connection C. means D. approaches
3. He doesn’t have any _____ in his leg.
A. emotion B. feelings C. feeling D. touch
4. There were so many people in the street watching the fire that fire fighters couldn’t get _____ the building.
A. closely B. close C. closely to D. close to
5. Little Franz stood there, _____ lift his head.
A. daring not to B. didn’t dare C. dare not D. without daring to
6. Taking her advice will _____ you a lot of trouble.
A. miss B. avoid C. spare D. save
7. The athletes stood, _____ their national flag _____.
A. seeing; raised B. watching; being raised C. looked at; rising D. noticing; rising
8. A remote-controlled bomb exploded outside a hotel yesterday, _____ at least 12 people.
A. having been injured B. having injured C. injuring D. injured
9. He made up an excuse for his failure in order to avoid _____.
A. to be punished B. being punished C. to punish D. punishing
10. — We’d better hurry, or we’ll be late.
— _____? Do you really want to listen to the boring lecture?
A. For what B. What if C. If what D. So what
【汉译英】
1. 我们一靠近，鸟全都受惊飞走了。(approach)
2. 幼儿常常很难清楚地表达自己。(express oneself)
3．你刚才的话有可能冒犯了她。(be likely to do)
4．这本小册子告诉你这样在旅行期间避免生病。(avoid doing sth.)
5．站在山顶上，你会俯瞰到整座城市的风采。(have a bird’s eye view of)
【答案及解析】
【高考链接】
1.B 句意：认真阅读药瓶上的说明并按剂量要求服用。A项explanation: a statement fact or situation that tells you why sth. happened解释。B项instructions: giving detailed information on how to do or use说明。C项description : writing or speech telling what sth. is like描述。D项introductions: to make one person know another one介绍。故选B。
2.B at this time tomorrow指的是将来的某一具体时间正发生的事情，故用将来进行时。
3.B exhausted 筋疲力尽的，过去分词转化来的形容词作伴随状语。
4.B 过去分词短语作状语。此题先确定主句主语与非谓语动词之间是被动关系，排除A、C；B项相当与状语从句When these products were first introduced to the market, …。D项不符合逻辑。
5.B 现在分词的完成式作时间状语，意为先表明不同意，然后离开会议室。A的时态不当。C中made虽可理解为句中的谓语动词，但与主语之间不能有逗号隔开。D的making则表示与left几乎同时发生，而B用分词的完成式强调动作先于left，故选B。
6. B 本句意为：我们看到几个当地人向我们走来，其中一个来到我们面前，我们给他一些铃铛和眼镜。此题考查的是定语从句，其先行词为one of them，指人且在从句中作宾语，介词前提并指人时应该用whom。故选B。
7. D 本题考查倒装用法。根据前文never的使用，排除A、B项。C项中虽是否定形式，但too使用不当，因此排除C。当表示一种否定形式适合另一种时，通常用以下形式表达：1）neither/nor+助动词/系动词/情态动词+主语；2）It is/was +the same with+主语；3）so it is/was with+主语；4）主+否定句，either.
8. A 根据句意，前后两种情况相同时，应用so引导的部分倒装句，排除B、C。又因为是“昨天”，应用过去式，排除D。故选A。
9. B exactly用于应答“正是，一点不错”。A项“行，好吧”，用于肯定回答。C项用于催促对方，“请，先请”。 D 项用于回答How are you？指身体很好。这三项不合题意。
10. A come on 在这里是“得了吧”的意思。选项B是道歉。选项D是接道歉的话。
【巩固练习】
1. C 一场势均力敌的比赛。此处closely修饰过去分词fought。又如a closely contested election 实力相差无几的竞选。
2. D 你们都是新来的，尽量不要与陌生人接触。Approach可数名词，与to连用时，意为：an act of speaking to someone (about something) for the first time（初次跟人）打交道，接触。又：We make approaches to them with a view to forming a business partnership. connection 名词，连接。
3. C 此处考查emotion和feeling的区别。feeling本题表“感觉”，feelings“感情”。
4. D 系表结构get close to 接近，靠近。
5. D without doing sth. 介词短语作伴随状语，doing在介词without后是动名词，故接不定式。
6. D save sb. sth. 使某人免遭……。avoid sth. avoid doing sth.避免，逃避作某事。
7. B seeing their national flag being raised这是一个现在分词短语在句中作动词stood的伴随状语。“国旗正在被升起”，故national flag 这一宾语的补足语是being raised。
8. C 现在分词短语作结果状语。分词与主句的主语之间为逻辑上的主动关系，排除A、D两项。B在时间顺序上有误。
9. B 句意：为了避免受到惩罚，他为他的失败编了个借口。avoid sth/doing sth. 此处表示被动意义，故用avoid being done的形式。
10. D so what: [口] 那有什么了不起？那又怎样？what if：[口] 1） 如果……怎么样？如：What if we go and see a film tomorrow night？2）如果……将会怎样（用于问将会发生什么，通常是令人不快或惊恐的事），如：What if we get burgled while we’re on holiday？
【汉译英】
1. Our approach frightened the birds away.
2. Young children often have difficulty expressing themselves.
3. Your remarks just now are likely to offend her.
4. This booklet tells you how to avoid getting ill while traveling.
5. Standing on the top of the hill, you can have a wonderful bird’s eye view of the city.

Period 2: A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial)
Aims
To learn about the ~ing form as the attribute & adverbial
To discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions
To discover and learn to use some useful structures
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 27 and do exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about grammar
1. Reading and thinking
Turn to page 25 and read the text of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM? As you read along, pay attention to the uses of the ~ing form as the attribute & adverbial.
(They are visitors coming from several countries (attribute). Four people enter looking around (adverbial) in a curious way. This is an exciting (attribute) experience for you. You stand watching and listening (adverbial).……)
2. Doing exercises
Turn to page 29. Do exercises 1 and 2。
III. Ready used materials for the ~ing form as the adverbial
the –ing form as the adverbial
the -ing form作状语表示主语在进行一动作的同时所进行的另一动作，它对谓语动词起修饰或陪衬的作用。这时要注意the -ing form与其逻辑主语在时态和意义上的统一。
Rushing out of the room, he was knocked down by a car.（adverbial of time）=When he rushed out of the room, he was knocked down by a car.Working harder, you will pass the entrance exam.（adverbial of condition）?=If you work harder, you will pass the entrance exam.She sat at a window, reading a book.（作伴随状语）=She sat at a window and read a book.Having won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars.（adverbial of reason）=Because he had won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars.Even if taking a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting.（作让步状语）=Even if I take a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting.The road is under construction, thus causing the delay.（adverbial of result）=The road is under construction, and thus caused the delay.Note: 当the -ing form作让步状语时，一般放在句首，常常由although, though, even if ,unless等连词引入；作结果状语时，一般放在句末，前面可so, thus, hence。
Exercises for consolidation
1. The secretary worked late into the night, ___ a long speech for the president.(91NMET)
A. to prepare B. preparing C. prepared D. was preparing
2. ______ a reply, he decided to write again. (92NMET)
A. Not receiving B. Receiving C. Not having received D. Having not received
3. “ Can’t you read?” Mary said ___ to the notice. (93NMET)
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily C. angrily pointed D. and angrily pointing
4. The visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with the talks, ____ that he had enjoyed his stay here. (94NMET)
A. having added B. to add C. adding D. added
5. European football is played in 80 countries, ____ it the most popular sport in the world. (98NMET)
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
6. When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door ____”Sorry to miss you; will call later.” (99NMET)
A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading
7. _____ such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river. (2001NMET)
A. Having suffered B. Suffering C. To suffer D. Suffered
8. ____ his telephone number, she had some difficulty getting in touch with Bill. (91上海)
A. Not knowing B. Knowing not C. Not having known D. Having not known
9. She asked me to help her, ____ that she couldn’t move the heavy suitcase alone. (98上海)
A. only to realize B. realizing C. having been realized D. realized
10. He sent me an e-mail, ____ to get further information. (2000上海)
A. hoped B. hoping C. to hope D. hope
11. Though ____ money, his parents managed to send him to university. (2002上海)
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked
12. While building a tunnel through the mountain, _____. (2000上海春)
an underground lake was discovered B. there was an underground lake discovered
a lake was discovered underground D. the workers discovered an underground lake
13. More and more people are signing up for Yoga classes nowadays, ________ advantage of the health and relaxation benefits. (2005上海)
A. taking B. taken C. having taken D. having been taken
14. from other continents for millions of years, Australia has many plants and animals not found in any other country in the world.( 2005湖北)
A．Being separated B．Having separated C．Having been separated D．To be separated
15. “You can’t catch me!” Janet shouted, __________ away. （2005 NMET）
A．run　　 B．running　　 C．to run　　 D．ran
Keys: 1-5 BAACA 6-10 DAABB 11-15 CDACB
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
To end the period you are going to take a quiz on ~ing words.
~ING WORDS Highlight all the words ending in ‘-ing’. Make lists of all the different categories of ‘-ing’ words; that is, their different functions in the sentence. Examples of some of the different categories
He’s swimming.
He’s wearing a swimming suit.
He likes swimming.
Swimming is pleasant.
Rewrite each sentence without using the ‘-ing’ form. Is there a change in meaning? What is it? Find sentences in the text which can be rewritten using an -ing form. Is there any change in meaning? What is it?
Period 3: A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(SHOWING OUR FEELINGS)
Aims
To enjoy reading the passage SHOWING OUR FEELINGS
To learn to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing
Procedures
I. Guided reading
1. Reading and underlining
Read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them into your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from SHOWING OUR FEELINGS
show all kinds of feeling表达各种情感, misunderstand each other误会对方, be similar相似的，类似的, turn one’s back to…避开，不理睬, show anger表达愤怒, close one’s hand握紧拳头, shake… at…冲着……晃动, a universal facial expression通用的面部表情, put…at ease使……舒适（无拘无束）, hide feelings掩饰感情, lose face丢脸, nod the head up and down点头, look away from…避开，不看某人, hold one’s arms across one’s chest抱胸, protect…from …防止……遭受...; 使……免于, 保护……使 不受, turn toward…转向，面向, roll one’s eyes骨碌碌地转动眼睛，翻白眼, show respect for…向…表示尊重, give a hug to sb.拥抱某人, stand close to…离……站得近, look directly at…直盯着看, look sb. in the eye凝视某人的眼睛, tell the truth讲真话, be wrong about…误会，弄错
Doing exercises
Now you are to do exercises 1 and 2 on page 30.
The importance of body languagePeople cannot live without each other, we are social beings. As soon as we are in contact with others we are communicating. For this we can make use of spoken and written language. In these ways we make the content of a message clear to each other. However we can also communicate without words. This kind of communication tells us something about the relationship between people. Often this is more important than getting the content of the message across. The communication about this non spoken communication, which tells us something about the relationship between people, is called Meta-Communication. Communicating about communication!
3. Writing
Turn to page 31. Make a list of three positive body language expressions and three negative body language expressions.
4. Listening, writing
Turn to page 31 and do exercises 1 and 2.
5. Speaking and writing
Discuss Lin Pei’s behavior with your partner. Then write some advice for Lin Pei.
Unit 4 Body Language
Part 2: Teaching Resources
(第二部分：教学资源)
Section 1：A text structure analysis of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
1. Type of writing and summary of the text
COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?
Type of writing
This is a piece of descriptive writing.
Main idea of the passage
By familiarizing ourselves with a few basic nonverbal signals, we can improve our ability to understand what people are really communicating and become aware of what we are broadcasting to the world with our own non-verbal cues.
Main idea of 1st paragraph
You were sent to meet business people from several countries at Pudong Airport.
Main idea of 2nd paragraph
Examples of greeting by people from different countries.
Main idea of 3rd paragraph
People communicate by unspoken language, that is, learned or cultural “body language”.
Main idea of 4th paragraph
Greeting by English people, by people from Spain, Italy, South American and Japan.
Main idea of 5th paragraph
Examples of greeting by Ahmed Aziz from Jordan, by Madame Coulon from France, by people from Middle East or some Muslim countries.
Main idea of 6th paragraph
Body language is either good or bad.
2. A tree diagram of COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?


Section 2：Background information for Unit 4 Body language
1. American Gestures
COMMON GESTURES
Americans are not touch (touch/not touch) oriented.
In normal social situations, Americans generally stand about 30 inches apart from one another, which is also considered their personal “comfort zone.”
At sporting events or the theater, Americans usually slide into a crowded aisle while facing forward (forward/the people).
2. Common Asian Gestures
GREETING GESTURES
Handshaking
Bowing
Avoid direct eye contact
TOUCHING GESTURES
Not touch oriented societies
Avoid public display of affection
Pushing (bumping) in crowds
OTHER NON VERBAL GESTURES
Respect to elderly people
Smiling often can cover a gamut of emotions: happiness, anger, confusion, apologies , or sadness.
Try to maintain a balanced posture, stand or sit erectly or squarely. Don’t slouch or put on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrest. Crossing the legs at the knees or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
Silence (listening) is a sign of politeness and of contemplation. During conversations, be especially careful about interrupting.
Unit 4 Body language
Ｉ．单元教学目标
技能目标 Skill Goals
Talk about body language: cultural differences and intercultural communication
Practise talking about prohibition & warning as well as obligation
Learn to use the -ing form as the Attribute &Adverbial
Learn to write a diary that showing the observation of how body language helps in communication
II． 目标语言
功
能
句
式
Talk about body language
What is the purpose of language?
What do you think “body language” means?
How can you tell if someone is sad or happy even if they do not speak?
How can you communicate a feeling to someone who does not speak your language?
Why do we need to study body language?
Talk about cultural differences & intercultural communication
What do British people often do when they meet strangers?
What do French people often do when they meet people they know?
Why should we be careful about our own body language?
Why is it important to watch others as well as listen to them?
词
汇
1． 四会词汇
Represent, association, canteen, dormitory, flight, curious, approach, major, misunderstand, dash, adult, crossroad
2． 认读词汇
unspoken,, Jordan
3． 词组
be likely to, in general, not all, turn one’s back to, lose face
语
法
4． 重点词汇
represent, introduce, approach, touch, express, nod, avoid, misunderstand, punish, general, curious, similar, expression, agreement, gesture, action
The -ing form as the attribute && adverbial
Finding out in the reading text sentences with present participle(s) used as the attribute or adverbial.
1. The -ing form as the attribute
They are visitors coming from several other countries, ...
His nose touches Mr. Cook’s moving hand, ...
This is an exciting experience for you, ...
2. The -ing form as the adverbial
... so you stand watching and listening.
Four people enter looking around in a curious way.
You see her step back appearing surprised, and take a few steps away from Mr. Garcia.
The visitor from Japan comes in smiling at the same time as George Cook from Canada.
Ⅲ． 教材分析和教材重组
1． 教材分析
本单元以Body Language——“体态语”为中心话题，具体涉及什么是“体态语”，如何理解“体态语”，以及“体态语”的跨文化性等。本单元的语言技能和语言知识也都是围绕“体态语”这一中心话题设计的，旨在通过单元教学，用听、说、读、写、做(表演)等多种形式，让学生正确认识和掌握“体态语”在交际中的作用和意义，使学生明确“体态语”在人类交际中的重要性，了解“体态语”在不同民族、不同文化交际中的多样性；使学生在今后的日常生活、学习、工作和交往中尽量减少或避免运用“体态语”时可能产生的误解，提高他们的“语言交际”能力和“非语言交际”能力。
1.1 WARMING UP 以列表对比（填充及增补）的形式，并通过WARMING UP的活动，让学生了解有声语言与“体态语”的对应关系，了解语言意义与行为意义（“体态语”）在交际中具有同等重要的作用。同时，学生在听、说、做（即表演“体态语”的动作）中能够增进对语言交际的感性认识，为他们在阅读过程中上升到对语言交际的理性认识打下基础。
1.2 PRE-READING 通过提供三个关于不同文化背景下“体态语”的问题，启发学生思考我们所学习的“语言”的目的、形式、功能。通过引导学生联系自己日常生活的实际，提高学生努力学习英语的积极性和自觉性；同时培养学生留心社会、关注生活的洞察力，为引导学生进一步“阅读”作好准备。
1.3 READING 是一篇介绍性（记叙文）体裁的文章，主要介绍了各种文化背景下的“体态语”的异同，为学生提供了来自不同国度、不同语言文化背景的“体态语”及其在交际中的异同和影响的具体例证。学生也可以结合自己在语言交际中所遇到的实际例子来进一步理解“交际，毫无问题可言吗？”这一主题。
1.4 COMPREHENDING 包括八个问题（前5个旨在检查学生对阅读材料细节的理解，6~7旨在引导学生对“体态语”的意义及文化差异的思考，第8个检查学生能否通过细节进行推理判断），通过对来自不同国度、不同语言文化背景的六个角色对待男女不同性别所使用的“体态语”异同的（学生在老师指导下的自我或小组讨论后的）归纳，进一步熟悉和掌握“体态语”在不同语言文化交际中的作用和意义。
1.5 LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE 分词汇和语法两部分。词汇部分由“本单元重点词汇英文释义”，“词语填空”和“词性变换”三项内容构成，语法部分由两大方面组成：一是让学生自己通过在课文中寻找相关语法的句子并按其语法功能分类，二是根据学生的认知规律安排该语法项目的练习让学生进行操练。整个项目通过三个练习和一个游戏，以及语法结构讲练，进一步巩固本单元所学词汇（尤其是课文中的黑体字），学习“现在分词”结构用作定语和状语，并通过操练，以收到“学以致用”、“熟练生巧”的效果。
1.6 USING LANGUAGE 通过增加阅读篇目“Showing Our Feelings”来拓展学生在“体态语”方面的知识视野，并通过“True” or “False”判断练习和问题讨论，使学生进一步明确“体态语”对人们在日常交际中了解对方情感、思想、态度等方面所起的作用。同时要让学生认真对待自己的“体态语”，并在日常交际中“听其言”（Listen to them）、“观其行”（Watch them）。此外，该部分还通过听、说、读、写四个方面来巩固本单元所学内容和语言交际项目。
1.7 SUMMING UP 师生从话题、词汇和结构三个方面来共同总结本单元所学的单词和短语，语言及语法项目，总结本单元所学的主要内容和收获。
1.8 LEARNING TIPS 建议学生关注实用交际技巧，学会“体态语”；建议学生在看英语电影时或与以英语为母语的人士交谈时，观察对方面部表情和体态姿势，观察对方的“言”、“行”，进而形成有效的口笔头语言及“体态语”的交际能力。
2. 教材重组
2.1 听力：Using language中的Listening, Workbook中的Listening和Listening Task这三部分的任务及话题较为接近，将这三个部分整合在一起上一堂听力课。
2.2 口语：Warming up, Using language中的Reading and Talking, Speaking和Workbook中的Talking，Speaking Task以及Learning about language中的Discovering useful words and expressions 4, “Play a game in group of four”均紧扣本单元话题，同时涉及到本单元的功能句，教师可指导学生通过“说”（用英语发出与“体态语”相关的指令）与“做”（用“体态语”表达指令）结合来进行口语训练，这将是一节生动有趣的口语课。
2.3 精读：把Pre-reading，Reading和Comprehending三部分整合为一节阅读课。
2.4 泛读：把Using Language中的Reading和Workbook中的Reading Task整合为一节拓展学生视野的泛读课。
2.5 语言学习：深入处理Learning about language中的Discovering useful words and expressions, Discovering useful structures; Workbook中的Using Words and Expressions和Using Structures。重点学习Discovering useful structures中“-ing (现在分词)”在句中做定语和状语的用法。
2.6 语言运用：处理Using Language中的Reading and Writing和Workbook中的Writing Task。指导学生写一篇有关“The Body Language I Know”短文，反映其在不同文化背景、不同语言环境中的运用情况，及所造成的理解上的困难、障碍甚至误解等。
3． 课型设计与课时分配
1st period Speaking
2nd period Reading (I)
3rd period Reading（II）
4th period Language Study
5th period Listening
6th period Writing
Ⅳ． 分课时教案
The First Period Speaking
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target Language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
misunderstand, similar, facial, expression, agreement, yawn, chest, gesture, adult, punish
b. 重点句型或交际用语
Act out the following meanings, please.
Please guess what I mean.
Please show the actions, using body language.
Now it is your turn to show the action / gesture.
Please use either spoken words or body language to express your ideas.
Please use both spoken words and body language to express your ideas.
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable the students to understand what a certain gesture of the body language means in a given situation.
b. Enable the students to act out some meanings, requirements, requests or situations given in the target language.
c. Enable the students to express with the target language the meanings given in body language.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
a. Help the students learn how to express themselves in body language when needed.
b. Help the students understand others when body language is being used.
Teaching important points教学重点
a. Teach the students how to understand body language used in different countries or cultures as well as in different occasions.
b. Teach the students how to use body language in the most appropriate occasions.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
a. Enable the students to realize the importance of body language in communication so that little or no misunderstanding may occur.
b. Let the students know that there is both positive body language and negative body language.
Teaching methods教学方法
a. Individual work, pair work and group work.
b. Acting out by imitation, mime or with gestures and body movement.
Teaching aids教具准备
A computer, a projector and some pictures.
Teaching procedures & ways教学过程与方式
Step I Lead-in
The teacher shows some pictures on screen. These pictures are from the Evening Party Celebrating the coming Lunar New Year of the Rooster of 2005.

Ss: Yes, Thousands of Hands Kwan-yin.

T: But do you know who she is? Yes, she was the leading dancer of the program. Her name is Tai Lihua（邰丽华）. She is called a Fairy of Peach blossom(桃花仙子) by people. You know she is a deaf girl, but she is a wise, diligent, charming and energetic girl. She studied very hard and got two degrees of bachelors in university. She was famous as an artist for her wonderful performance. She is deaf and dumb. But how did she get that great achievement and became a successful person? She loves life very much. We should learn from her spirit. Besides her hard working, body language plays a very important part in her life. We are all healthy people, sometimes we can use body language to express ourselves. So we should pay more attention to learning body languages.
Step II Introduction
T: Now let’s do some TPR (Total Physical Response) activities together, I hope you will enjoy them and have fun as well.
Touch your head / face / eyes / nose / mouth / ears / cheeks / forehead / shoulders / stomach / legs / feet / toes ...
Shake your head / arm / hand ...
Wave your arm / hand ...
Open your eyes / arms /mouth ...
Close your eyes / mouth ...
Twist your wrist / waist.
Cross your arms / fingers.
Nod your head. Bow your head.
Make a face to each other.
Bend / cry / shout / scream / smile / laugh ...
T: All right. Now let’s do them a little bit difficult. Let’s play a game together. Those who fail to follow the rule of the game will be dropped out. The game is: “Simon says”. For example, if I say “Simon says, touch your head”, then you touch your head. If not, you shouldn’t touch your head but remain still. Clear? Ready? Now let’s start.
3 or 5 minutes for the game.
T: Ok. It’s time to take up the lesson. Please look at the screen. Let’s take a look at the following gestures:
Gesture
Action
Meaning
A handshake
You are welcome.
A clap of hand
Come on; be cheerful.
A V-shape of the fore-finger and middle finger
May you succeed!
Or congratulations on your success!
A half-closed hand with thumb down
I am not in favor of your idea or I’ll have to refuse you.
A wrinkling of the brow in thought or displeasure or a scowl
She is worried.
Tears coming out of his eyes.
He is very sad.
All smiles on her face
She is very happy.
Waving their hands
They are waving goodbye to people around.
A hand stretched out forward with strength
He is stopping a tank.
People jump with their both hands stretched open in the air.
They are cheering for the victory.
T: What are the actions of the above gestures? What do they mean?
S4: The first gesture is a handshake, which means “You’re welcome”.
S5: The second is a handclap, which means “Come on” or “Be cheerful” or something like that.
S6: The third one is a V-shaped posture of the first finger and the middle finger, which suggests a wish for the other or others to succeed.
S7: The fourth is a half-closed hand with the thumb down. It means the one who gives this gesture is against the other’s idea or simply refuses the request.
S8: The fifth is a worried look of a woman. She wrinkles her brows or frowns. It also seems that she scowls. It shows that she is worried or sad. In other words, she is unhappy.
S9: The sixth is a man shedding tears. Tears were running down his cheeks. He is very sad for losing his relatives or sad for his failure.
S10: The seventh is a smiling face. It is easy to see that she is very happy.
S11: The eighth is a gesture of waving hands. They are waving goodbye to people who are around to see them off.
S12: The ninth is a hand stretched out forward with great strength. The boy is trying to stop a tank from entering into his homeland.
S13: The tenth is hands stretched out upward. They are all very cheerful. They are wild with joy; maybe they have just won a game. So we can see that they are cheering for their victory.
T: You have all done a good job. So you see that there are many cases or situations in which body language can convey meanings as well as spoken or written languages. If you want to know more about it, let’s come to Unit 4 Body Language.
Step Ⅲ Practice
T: Look at Page 25.

What are these people communicating?
Step Ⅳ Time for Fun
T: Now let’s play a game in groups of four. One thinks of a situation and asks the others to show some actions using body language. When the one chooses the action that is most likely, it is his or her turn to think of some other situation for the others to show the actions so that the game may go on for a few rounds. Clear?
Ss: Yes. That’s funny!
T: Try to make the situations as interesting and enjoyable as you can. And show the situation as lively as possible. Besides, make sure that everyone has a turn.
Ss: All right.
S1: What are you likely to do if it rains?
(Actions) S2: reads a book;
S3: puts on a raincoat;
S4: cleans the house.
S1: Ok. I think S3 seems the most likely, so it is his turn.
S3: What are you likely to do if the river floods?
(Actions) S1: runs away as fast as he can;
S2: helps the younger or elder to escape as soon as possible;
S4: climbs on to a tree.
S3: Ok. I think S2 seems the most likely, so it is her turn.
S2: What are you likely to do if the house catches fire?
(Actions) S1: fetches some water;
S3: tries to put it out with blooms;
S4: runs away as quickly as he can.
S2: Ok. I think S4 seems the most likely, so it is his turn.
S4: What are you likely to do if you meet with a fierce dog?
(Actions) S1: remains where he is and bends down, looking at the dog;
S3: tries to scare it away with small stones;
S4: runs away as quickly as possible.
S2: Ok. I think S1 seems the most likely, so we all have done a good job.
T: Yes. I couldn’t agree with you. Now, one more group.
Step V Role Play (Speaking task on P67)
T: Now, there’s still a little time left. Let’s come to Speaking Task on Page 67.
Homework
1. Team work: Discuss the importance of body language.
2. Go over the Reading:
1) Communication: No Problem?
2) Showing our feeling.
T: I think you must have known something about these pictures. Yes, they are from a program of CCTV, the Evening Party Celebrating the Spring Festival of 2005, the coming Lunar New Year of the Rooster. I think that was the best program. Do you remember the name of this program?
The second period Reading
The Second Period Reading (I)
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a. 词汇和短语
major, local, represent, curious, Columbia, introduce, approach, touch, cheek, stranger, spoken, express, action, Jordan, nod, general, avoid, comedy
b. 重点句子
Yesterday, another student and I , representing our university’s student association, went to the Capital International Airport to meet this year’ international students.
…I saw several young people enter the waiting area looking around curiously.
She stepped back appearing surprised and put up her hands, as if in defence.
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable the students to realize the importance of body language.
What is the purpose of language?
What is the purpose of body language?
How can you tell if someone is sad even if they do not speak?
How can you communicate a feeling to someone who does not speak your language?
b. Enable the students to understand the text.
Where are the visitors from?
How do Mr. Garcia from Columbia and Julia Smith from Britain response when they are introduced to each other?
What do Mr. Cook and the Japanese visitor do as they are introduced?
How can people express themselves besides their spoken language?
Do all cultures greet each other the same way?
Do English people and other Europeans act the same when they first meet?
Is a handshake very common in Japan?
Is a kiss often used in France when people meet?
Why are there different kinds of body language?
c. Enable the students to retell the text in their own words.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Help the students learn how to explain the common idea—“different cultures, different body languages” with the target language in this unit.
Teaching important points 教学重点
How does body language differ among people from different cultures?
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
The understanding of the poorly-written reading text, especially the relationship awkwardly built up between “you” and the other people in the text, who are met by the awkward arrangement of the compilers of the textbook.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Skimming method, task-based method, role-play method.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A recorder, a projector and a computer.
Teaching procedures & ways教学过程与方式
StepⅠ Revision
Free talk about the topic: the Importance of Body Language. While the student on duty gives the presentation, the teacher can simultaneously approve his or her performance by using the body language learned or familiar to the students such as nodding the head, stretching out the hand with thumb up, shrugging the shoulders, etc.
Step Ⅱ Pre-reading
T: Our text is about a special means of communication—Body Language. Now please look at the screen. And discuss these questions with your partner first. And then some of you will be asked to report your work. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes, sir/madam.
1. What is the purpose of language?
2. How can you tell if someone is sad even if they do not speak?
3. What would you do if you need the other’s help urgently while you two speak different languages?
4. Give an example of how you can communicate a feeling to someone who does not speak your language.
After a few minutes.
T: Now who’d like to answer the first question? Volunteer! S1: Let me try. The purpose of language, of course, is to be used as a tool of communication. That is, to exchange with others ideas, feelings, information, and so on.
T: Perfect! Body language is used anytime and anywhere to convey people’s ideas, feelings, information, and so on and so forth. Next question?
S2: Even if they don’t speak, I can tell if they are sad by
looking at their facial expressions. I’m a good mind-reader. (Smiling)
S3: Yes, that is quite easy. Just by watching their frowned brows, their long faces, we know that they are unhappy.
T: Very good. We have got two “mind readers” in our class; I’m sure there are more than two! Now who’d like to give the answer to the third question?
S4: Let me try, Sir / Madam. I’ll try to use body language to tell the other what I need urgently. I’ll do it by miming, by any proper posture, or gestures, even by drawing pictures.
T: You are smart! Now who’d like to do the last one. It is more challenging, right?
S5: I’d like to have a try, sir. Last summer I went on a study tour in the States. When I was on the way to
Los Angeles on the flight of the United Airlines, we stopped at Tokyo / Narita Airport in Japan for 3 hours. So I went into the shop at the airport, for I wanted to buy a digital camera. Of course I knew no Japanese, so I spoke to her in Chinese first and then in English. It seemed that she was at a loss when I spoke to her. Then I decided to try it in body language. I just pointed to the camera that I like most-Sony Cyber-shot DSC-P100. The salesgirl spoke to me in Japanese this time but I couldn’t understand a word of it. So I shook my head and kept pointing at the camera. Finally I reached her understanding and she took out the camera I wanted to buy. I examined it for a little while and asked her the price of it by drawing a big “?” in the air with my forefinger. She took out her calculator and put in the price. The price was reasonable and I decided to take it. I paid for it and the salesgirl bowed to me again and again.
T: Wonderful! Thank you for telling us so interesting a true story and giving us so good an example of body language.
Step Ⅲ While-reading
1. Scanning
While reading, please try to divide the whole passage into several parts and find out the main idea.
Part 1 Para 1
You are sent to Capital International Airport to meet this year’s international students.
Part 2 (para. 2 and 3 )
Examples of learned or cultural “body language”.
Part 3. (para. 4 )
Different peoples have different body languages.
Part 4. (para. 5)
Summary of body language.
Read the text carefully, then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F).
Englishmen often stand close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
Most people around the world now greet each other by kissing .
Japanese will bow to others as greeting.
People from Jordan will move very close to you as you introduce yourself to them.
Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ body language are bad.
Step IV Post reading
1. Is the author of this passage male or female? How do you know ?
The author is male. Ahmed Aziz will not shake hands with women, but he shakes hands with the author.
2.What were the two mistakes that the author noticed?
He noticed that the Colombian man kissed the British woman, but in her culture, a kiss from a stranger is not acceptable. He also noticed that the Japanese man bowed just as the Canadian man started to shake hands, so one man’s nose touched the other man’s hand.
3. Who seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others? Who seemed to prefer closer physical distance ?
The British woman, Julia, and probably the Canadian man, George, seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others. The Colombian man, Tony, and the Jordanian man, Ahmed, seemed to prefer closer physical distance .
4. Did any students have similar greeting customs? If so, which ones?
Yes. Tony from Colombia and Darlene from France had a similar greeting custom-a kiss. George from Canada and Ahmed from Jordan also had a similar greeting custom-a handshake, but Ahmed shakes hands only with men.
5. “ When in Rome, do as the Romans do.” What do you think this famous saying means?
This saying means that when we are in a certain place, we should follow the customs of the people who live in that place, not our own customs.
6. Do you agree with the author’s statement that body language is not good or bad? Why or why not?
Students will give their own answers.
Step Ⅴ Homework
1. Get ready to retell the text in your own words.
The Third Period Reading (II)
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a. 词汇和短语
unspoken, facial, fun_ction, at ease, lose face, turn one’s back to, fist, subjective
b. 重点句子
Body language is one of the most powerful means of communication, often even more powerful than spoken language.
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable the students to know more about body language.
What is the fun_ction of body language?
What is the similarity of body language?
How can you understand the universal facial expression “smile”? Does “a smile” always mean the same thing?
What is the difference of body language between various cultures?
b. Enable the students to understand better body language.
What is the proper attitude towards body language?
What would happen if we knew nothing about body language?
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
How we can “show our feelings” with the body language learned in this unit or gained in our social life.
Teaching important points 教学重点
How body language shows the same or different feelings among people from different cultures.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
How to tell that the same body language shows different feelings in different cultures.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Fast reading: dealing with the “true” or “false” questions.
Discussion: the importance of body language.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A recorder, a projector and a computer.
Teaching procedures & ways教学过程与方式
1 Pre-reading
1. What is the fun_ction of body language?
2. How do you find body language in our daily life?
3. How can the same body language express different feelings or ideas in different cultures?
4. How can different body language express the same feeling or idea in different cultures?
2 Fast reading
TURE OF FALSE
1. Body language is never as powerful as spoken language.
2. If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.
3. You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
4. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.
5. Body language is the same all over the world.
6. Most people can understand each other if they try.
Then ask the students to do it one by one and ask them to explain why some of the statements are wrong.
3 Further reading
T: We have just read a passage entitled “Showing Our Feelings”, which tells us more about body language. Now let’s read another passage in the Workbook on P66. The title of the reading text is: The Open Hand - A Universal Sign. You will be given 3 minutes to read through the text as quickly as you can, trying to get as much information from the text as possible.
Ss: Yes, Sir.
T: What information have you got?
S1: More about body language, sir. We have learned how people are communicating or getting along with each other besides using spoken language. We are also asked to think about some new situations in which we will communicate in body language.
S2: And we have to think about the following questions: It is known that a smile is a sign that people feel friendly and happy. But we have to consider: 1. What if we don’t know who the new person is? 2. What if we are not introduced by a friend? 3. What if we are meeting a stranger in an unfamiliar place?
S3: And the most important of all is that we have to make
sure whether we can trust people we do not know, and we have to show that we are not dangerous.
S4: Quite true. We have different ways to show our hands —our open hands, which means that we are not armed and we are friendly.
S5: In many cultures today, the Western custom of the handshake is used. Besides this, traditionally, Chinese greet others by covering the left hand with the right hand and bowing; the Japanese cover on hand with the other and bow slightly or quite low, depending on whom they greeted; Hindu people join their hands in front of their faces and bow their heads; Muslims will touch their heart, mouth and forehead to show respect.
S6: Now young people in the West give each other the “high five” when they clap each other’s hands in the air.
S7: You have taken the words out of my mouth. And I believe that in almost all cultures, to smile and show an open right hand is the most common way to show the goodwill greeting.
T: I am more than happy to hear you can get so much information from the passage when you do the reading! Now let’s act out some of the gestures in the reading material, OK?
Some students are asked to act out the body language which appears in the reading text is: The Open Hand - A Universal Sign, such as a handshake, the traditional greetings in China, the Japanese way to greet people, the ways Hindu people and Muslims use to greet people, and the way young people in the West use now.
Several minutes later.
T: Before we come to the end of this period, let’s take up the last item, doing the arrangement of the information under the passage on Page 67.
S8: It can be dangerous to meet people you do not know.
S9: Many Asian people do not usually physically touch strangers.
S10: If we show an open hand, it means that we are not holding anything dangerous.
S11: The right hand is usually used because it is almost the stronger.
S12: People shake their hands when meeting to show that they can be trusted.
S13: To show respect, people will touch their heart and mouth when greeting someone.
Homework
1. Read aloud all the reading texts in this unit.
2. Get ready to retell the two reading passages learnt in this period.
The Fourth Period Grammar
Structure Study
一: V-ing 形式由 “do＋ing” 构成, 其否定形式是 “not doing”, V-ing 可以带宾语或状语构成 V-ing 短语, 没有人称和数的变化, 但有时态和语态的变化。
V-ing 形式在句中作定语和状语是本单元的学习重点。
1. 作定语
V-ing 形式可以单独充当名词的前置修饰语, 这时有两种情况。
-ing形式表示 “供作......之用”的意思, 这类作定语的-ing形式过去叫动名词。
A swimming pool
= a pool for swimming
2) -ing形式表示 “......的” 意思, 过去叫现在分词
A sleeping child
working people
the rising sun
-ing形式短语作定语时一般放在它所修饰的名词之后, 相当于一个定语从句。如:
They are visitors coming from several countries.
The boy standing there is a classmate of mine.
2. 作状语
可以表示时间, 原因, 结果,条件, 行为方式或伴随动作等。
Attention Please
-ing形式作状语时, 它的逻辑主语必须与主句的主语是一致的。
Time permitting, I will pay a visit to the whole city.
　(分词的逻辑主语是time , 而句子的主语是I , 两者不构成主谓关系, 所以只能用独立主格结构, 也就是给现在分词补充一个主语。)
Homework
Do “Using Structures” on Page 64.
文化背景知识
1. Some more information about Body Language:
to nod consent 点头表示同意，
to nod one’s farewell 点头表示告别，
to nod as a sign of agreement or as a familiar greeting 点头表示赞同或打招呼，
to hold one’s head high 昂首挺胸(表示趾高气扬)，
to shake one’s fist 挥动拳头(表示威胁)，
to shake one’s head 摇头(表示不知道)，to show a V sign 由食指和中指构成字母“V”，而“V”是victory的第一个字母。因此，这一手势是祝愿胜利或庆祝胜利之意。
to wink at a person 向某人眨眼睛，
to make a face 面部露出厌恶的表情，
to shrug one’s shoulders 耸耸肩膀 (表示冷淡或怀疑)，
to keep (or have) one’s fingers crossed 把中指叠在食指上交叉着，作十字状。这是暗中希望上帝保佑自己正在做的事成功。
to crook a finger 朝某人弯曲食指。是招人过来的意思。
更有趣的是英美人用大拇指 (thumb) 做出许多不同的表示。
to thumb one’s nose 以大拇指按鼻，其余四指张开，表示轻视。在英美等国家，你会看到这种手势经常用在调皮的孩子们中间。他们用大拇指点着自己的鼻子，而其他四指张开不停地摇动，表示轻蔑或嘲弄。也可以说“to cock a snook at somebody”.
to twiddle one’s thumbs 无聊地绕动着两个大拇指，表示无所事事，懒散。
thumbs down 大拇指朝下，表示反对或拒绝。
thumbs up 翘起大拇指，表示赞成或夸奖。
但值得一提的是在英美等西方国家，有时会看到有人站在马路边，朝驶过来的车辆伸出一只翘起大拇指的拳头。这是请求搭便车的意思。所以搭车也可以说“to thumb a lift”。
2. Introduction of a book about body language of horses:
Horses communicate with remarkable accuracy in a language of posture, gesture and sound. They express their needs, wishes and emotions to each other and to the rare human being who understands them. After reading this unprecedented (空前的), exciting and up-lifting book, you will understand the equine (horse’s) language. You therefore will know how to recognize:
A happy horse. A frightened horse. An angry horse. A bored horse. A grieving (令人忧伤的) horse. A frustrated (受挫折的) horse. A horse in pain. A playful horse. A proud horse. An eagerly competitive horse. And many horses more!
Moreover, you will know how to reassure the frightened, calm the angry, comfort the grieving, divert (使解闷)the bored-and deal with most other human-equine difficulties. You will know how to educate a foal (驹) or rehabilitate (挽救) a rogue (无赖). You will know how to look at race horses on their way to the starting gate and tell the likely winners from the losers.
You even will know how to buy a horse.
But best of all, you will finally understand what these grand animals are all about, and you will know better than ever before how they (and we) fit into nature’s scheme (plan)of things.
3. An extra reading passage about Body language:
When we communicate with other people it is not only our words that contain the meaning. An important part of that meaning comes from what is called “non-verbal (非言辞的) communication”. By this we mean facial expression; gestures with hands, arms, legs; the way we sit or stand; the way we touch other people; the distance we keep between ourselves and the people we are talking to; our dress and our appearance. All these say something to other people.
Facial expressions and gestures are used by everyone often spontaneously (自发地), even unconsciously. Smiling, for example, is found in most cultures as a sign of happiness or pleasure. Gestures such as pointing, waving, shaking or nodding the head are also widely used, although the gestures themselves do not always mean the same in every culture. I once asked a Portuguese student why bank officials in Lisbon seemed so dour (gloomy)-sorry Lisbon bank clerks, but it’s true-and he told me that if they smiled too much they would not seem serious about their work.
Because many non-verbal messages are “culture specific (special, distinctive, or unique)”, they can cause a lot of misunderstanding between people from different backgrounds. Northern Europeans and Americans, for example, like to keep a certain “personal space” between themselves and others and feel uncomfortable if people come too close to them. In these same cultures it is considered impolite to stare, but Greeks, it is said, feel ignored if people do not stare at them in public. Europeans usually change their facial expression to show happiness, anger, boredom, and sadness.
4. Some information about the countries maybe less known to students in the Text:
① Columbia:
Colombia is located in the northwest part of South America, and is the only country on South America with coasts on both the Caribbean Sea and the Pacific Ocean. The most distinguishing feature (显著的特点)of the country is the Andes Mountains chain, which is in the central western part of the country and extends almost its entire length, north and south.
In contrast to snow-capped mountains are the rain forests, located in the torrid (热带的) lowlands of Colombia, where the animal life and vegetation make it a unique place in the world. The country is rich in minerals and natural resources, and although known for its splendid coffee, it is also a major source of the world’s emeralds (绿宝石) and flowers. Mahogany (桃花心木), oak, walnut, and pine trees are also plentiful, as are plants such as rubber, vanilla (香草), and ginger. Agriculture is an important part of the Colombian economy.
Colombia has a diverse population, although over half are of Spanish descent (血统). The heritage of the Spanish colonial period is still very well preserved in many areas, where family life and dress still hold to traditional norms. However, cultures vary greatly from region to region, each adding to the country’s variety.
One of the world’s most noted authors, Literature Nobel Prize winner, Gabriel Garcia Marquez, is a native of Colombia.
The largest cities in Colombia are Santafe de Bogota (the capital city), Cali, Medellin, and Barranquilla.
② Jordan:
Jordan, officially Hashemite (哈桑王族) Kingdom of Jordan, with an area of 37,737 sq ms (97,740 sq kms) and a population of 4,101,000 (estimated in 1995), is located in the southwest Asia, bordered by Israel (W), Syria (N), Iraq (NE), and Saudi Arabia (E, S). Amman is the capital and largest city.
Before 1967 Jordan fell into three main geographical regions: East Jordan, which includes about 92% of the country’s land area, the Jordanian Highlands (highest point, 5,755 ft/1,754 m), and West Jordan (the West Bank, part of historic Palestine. In the Arab-Israeli War of 1967, Israel captured and occupied the West Bank, and Jordan has since given up its claim to the area).
Jordan’s economy has traditionally been based on agriculture, although less than 5% of the land is arable (适于耕种的). The principal crops are vegetables, wheat, and citrus (柑橘类) fruits; olives are grown for oil. Manufactures are limited to such items as foodstuffs, clothing, and cement, and there is some oil refining. Phosphate (磷酸盐) rock and potash (碳酸钾) are the only minerals produced in quantity.
The annual cost of Jordan’s imports far exceeds its earnings from exports. Aqaba (亚喀巴), on the Gulf of Aqaba, is the only seaport. The inhabitants of Jordan are mostly of Arab descent (over half are of Palestinian descent), and Arabic is the official language, although English is also spoken among the higher socio-economic groups. About 95% of the people are Sunni (逊尼派) Muslims.
Under the 1952 constitution (宪法), the king is the most powerful figure in the country; he appoints a cabinet (headed by a prime minister). The bicameral (两院制的) parliament has been convened and dissolved by the king several times since 1974; the 1989 elections were the first in 22 years. Political parties were again permitted to field candidates in 1993.
③ Muslim countries:
Most people in the West think of Muslim or Moslem countries, where people believe in Islam, a monotheistic (一神论的) religion characterized by the acceptance of the doctrine of submission to God and Mohammed (穆罕默德) as the chief and last prophet (先知)of God, as a Middle Eastern religion. Nevertheless, Islam is clearly a South Asian, South East Asian, Central Asian, African, and Middle Eastern religion, with a growing presence in Europe and North America.
There are about 40 Muslim countries in the world, such as Afghanistan, Pakistan, Turkey, Kuwait, Egypt, Iran, Iraq, Indonesia, Libya, Malaysia, Morocco, Nigeria, Somalia, Yemen and so on and so forth. People in these countries mostly believe in Islam.
The name for the religion of Islam, as its publicity (宣传) goes, is much more than just a name, because it expresses a deep spiritual meaning as well as an overall outlook on life and concept of worship. The word “Islam” is an Arabic word which means “complete submission(服从) to the will of Almighty God”. Other religions are named after their founders, such as Christianity and Buddhism; after a tribe or ethnic group, such as Judaism (犹太教); or after a specific geographical region, such as Hinduism (印度教). Islam, however, is unique because its name represents its outlook on life and reflects its universal nature. Besides, the name “Islam” was not thought up by its followers or applied by other people, as is the case with the names of other religions, but was revealed (显示) by Almighty God. This name expressed nothing new, because submission to the will of God, i.e. “Islam”, has always been the true religion of God. Due to this fact, and since the teachings of Islam are straightforward, profound and logical, Islam is the “Natural Religion” of all human beings. The name of no other religion carries any significant message, or conveys the true sense of its outlook on life, as does the name “Islam”.
Unit 4 Body Language
　
Part One: Teaching Design
1． A sample lesson plan for reading
(COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about body language.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by acting
Look at the list of interpretation on the right side of the chart. Perform the action or the nonverbal behaviour on the left side.
Examples Of Body Language
NONVERBAL BEHAVIOR
INTERPRETATION
Brisk, erect walk
Confidence
Standing with hands on hips
Readiness, aggression
Sitting with legs crossed, foot kicking slightly
Boredom
Sitting, legs apart
Open, relaxed
Arms crossed on chest
Defensiveness
Walking with hands in pockets, shoulders hunched
Dejection
Hand to cheek
Evaluation, thinking
Touching, slightly rubbing nose
Rejection, doubt, lying
Rubbing the eye
Doubt, disbelief
Hands clasped behind back
Anger, frustration, apprehension
Locked ankles
Apprehension
Head resting in hand, eyes downcast
Boredom
Rubbing hands
Anticipation
Sitting with hands clasped behind head, legs crossed
Confidence, superiority
Open palm
Sincerity, openness, innocence
Pinching bridge of nose, eyes closed
Negative evaluation
Tapping or drumming fingers
Impatience
Steepling fingers
Authoritative
Patting/fondling hair
Lack of self-confidence; insecurity
Tilted head
Interest
Stroking chin
Trying to make a decision
Looking down, face turned away
Disbelief
Biting nails
Insecurity, nervousness
Pulling or tugging at ear
Indecision
Warming up by defining—What is body language?
The gestures, poses, movements, and expressions that a person uses to communicate. ●The outward signs of a person which indicates their inner thoughts or attitude. For example, a bowed head indicates submission, a hand over the mouth indicates the person doesn't want to talk or feels their words aren't worth listening to. Scratching indicates nervousness. A person passing another on the street might bow their head as a subconscious sign of submission.
Conscious or unconscious bodily movements and gestures that communicate to others a person's attitudes and feelings. This may also include dress, facial features, skin colour or other personal means of communication without words.
communication via the movements or attitudes of the body
Body language is a broad term for several forms of communication using body movements or gestures, instead of, or as a complement to, sounds, verbal language, or other forms of communication. In turn, it is one category of paralanguage, which describes all forms of human communication that are not language.
II. Pre-reading
Looking and saying
Look at the man in the picture below. What does he say to you by his body language?
Basically, how the ...... do I know? Or, I don’t know nothin! The shoulders are hunched and the hands are open signifying a big question mark.
Talking and sharing
Body language is the quiet, secret and most powerful language of all!According to experts, our non-verbal language communicates about 50% of what we really mean (voice tonality contributes 38%) while words themselves contribute a mere 7%.Our bodies send out messages constantly and often we don't recognize that we're communicating a lot more than we realize.
Our understanding and use of non-verbal cues in facial expression are familiar to us nearly from birth
III. Reading
Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
Send… to do sth., meet … at the airport, meet with…, at a hotel, represent the Chinese government, look around, in a curious way, be followed by…, introduce…to…, kiss… on the cheek, step back, appear surprised, take a few steps away from…, coming in, at the same time, reach one’s hand out to …, touch sb’s hand, greet each other, communicate with spoken language, express one’s feelings, use unspoken language, keep physical distance, stand close to…, approach… closely, shake hands, move close to…, move back a bit, nod at …, stand close to…, behave the same way, avoid difficulty
Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph
Next you are to skim the text to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph.
Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table. Where is he/ she from? What does he/ she do when he/ she meet someone at the airport for the first time?
Name
Country
Action
Meaning
Mr Garcia
Julia Smith
Ahmed Aziz
Madame Coulon
Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to me the teacher.
Reading and translating
Now it’s time to translate the text into Chinese, sentence by sentence. Who will be the first to do it?
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 26 and 27.
Closing down by checking
Check some of the following basic non-verbal cues and you'll recognize that you already speak and translate much of the language.
“I’m surprised!”
“I’m shocked!”
“I’m sad!”
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial)
Aims
To help students learn about The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 27 and do exercises No. 1, 2 ,3 and 4 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about grammar
Reading and thinking
Turn to page 25 and read with me the text of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM? As you read along, pay attention to the uses of The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial.
(They are visitors coming from several countries. 作定语；Four people enter looking around in a curious way. 作状语； This is an exciting experience for you. 作定语; You stand watching and listening. 作状语；……)
Doing exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 29
Turn to page 29. Do exercises No. 1 and 2。
III. Ready used materials for The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial
... When we use a verb in -ing form more like a verb or an adjective, it is usually a present participle:. Anthony is fishing. I have a boring teacher. In this lesson, we will look at the use of verbs in the ~ing form ...
The ~ing form 作定语
现在分词可以单独作定语，也可以构成合成词作定语，但在更多的情况下是分词短语作定语，包括限定性和非限定性（用逗号与其他部分分开），在意义上相当于一个定语从句。现在分词作定语通常带有主动意义和未完成意义。例如： ????The man following was obviously in a hurry。（现在分词单独作定语） ????They acted just like a conquering army。（现在分词单独作定语） ????Do you know the man standing over there by the motor car?（分词短语作限定性定语。） ????Last night,we caught a thief stealing John's bike.（分词短语作限定性定语） ????The name Nebraske comes from the Oto Indian word “ebrathka”.meaning flat water.（分词短语作非限定性定语）
The ~ing form 作状语
现在分词作状语表示主语在进行一动作的同时所进行的另一动作，它对谓语动词起修饰或陪衬的作用。这时要注意现在分词与其逻辑主语在时态和意义上的统一。例如： ????Rushing out of the room, he has knocked down by a car.（作时间状语） ????=When he rushed out of the room, he was hnocked down by a car. ????Working harder, you will pass the entrance exam.（作条件状语） ????=If you work harder, you will pass the entrance exam. ????She sat at a window and read a book.（作伴随状语） ????=She sat at a window and read a book. ????Having won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars.（作原因状语） ????=Because he had won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars. ????Even if taking a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting.（作让步状语） ????=Even if I take a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting. ????The road is under construction, thus causing the delay.（作结果状语） ????=The road is under construction, and thus caused the delay. ????注意，当现在分词作让步状语时，一般放在句首，常常由although, though, even if ,unless等连词引入；作结果状语时，一般放在句末，前面可so, thus, henc。
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
To end the period you are going to take a quiz on ~ing words.
~ING WORDS Highlight all the words ending in '-ing'. Make lists of all the different categories of '-ing' words; that is, their different functions in the sentence. Examples of some of the different categories
He's swimming.
He's wearing a swimming suit.
He likes swimming.
Swimming is pleasant. Rewrite each sentence without using the '-ing' form. Is there a change in meaning? What is it? Find sentences in the text which can be rewritten using an -ing form. Is there any change in meaning? What is it?
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(SHOWING OUR FEELINGS)
Aims
To help students read the passage SHOWING OUR FEELINGS.
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Read aloud to warm up: Let’s warm up by reading aloud to the recording of the text SHOWING OUR FEELINGS.
II. Guided reading
Reading and translating
Read the text SHOWING OUR FEELINGS and translate it into Chinese paragraph by paragraph. He Jing. You are to do paragraph 1, please. ….
Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from SHOWING OUR FEELINGS
Show all kinds of feeling, turn one’s back to…, show anger, close one’s hand, shake… at…, a universal facial expression, put…at ease, hide feelings, lose face, nod the head up and down, look away from…, hold one’s arms across one’s chest, protest…from …, turn toward…, roll one’s eyes, show respect for…, use gestures, give a hug to sb., stand close to…, with…open, look directly at…, look sb. in the eye, tell the truth, be wrong about…
Doing exercises
Now you are going to do exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 30 following the article.
The importance of body languagePeople can not live without each other, we are social beings. As soon as we are in contact with others we are communicating. For this we can make use of spoken and written language. In these ways we make the content of a message clear to each other. However we can also communicate without words. This kind of communication tells us something about the relationship between people. Often this is more important than getting the content of the message across. The communication about this non spoken communication, which tells us something about the relationship between people, is called Meta-Communication. Communicating about communication!
Writing
Turn to page 31. Make a list of three positive body language expressions and three negative body language expressions.
Non-verbal communication, or body language
Refers to messaging without words
In a personal spoken message
According to Albert Mehrabian, in Psychology Today (1968), of the total message
7% is conveyed by the words
38% by the vocal tones, and
55% by facial and body expression
Reading body language is an important skill
Listening, writing
Turn to page 31 and do the listening and writing exercises No. 1 and 2.
Positive gesture clusters - 1
●Acceptance
Hand to chest
Open arms and hands
Touching gestures
Moving closer, one to another
Preening
Sitting on one leg (for female)
Positive gesture clusters - 2
●Confidence
Steepling (fingers touching like a church steeple)
Hands behind back, authority position
Back stiffened
Hands in coat pockets with thumbs out
Hands on lapels of coat
●Expectancy
Rubbing palms
Jingling money openly
Crossed fingers
Moving closer
Positive gesture clusters - 3
●Cooperation, readiness, openness
Open hands
Hands on hips
Hands on mid-thigh while seated
Sitting on edge of chair
Arms spread, gripping edge of table or desk
Moving closer
Sprinter's position
Hand-to-face gestures
Positive gesture clusters - 4
●Evaluation
Hand-to-face gestures
Head tilted
Stroking chin
Peering over glasses
Taking glasses off, and cleaning
Putting eye glass ear piece in mouth
Pipe smoker gestures
Getting up from table and walking around
Putting hand to bridge of nose
Positive gesture clusters - 5
●Reassurance
Touching
Pinching flesh
Chewing pen or pencil
Rubbing over thumb
Touching back of chair on entering room
Biting finger nails
Hands in pockets
Positive gesture clusters - 6
●Self-control
Holding arm behind back
Gripping wrist
Locked ankles
Clenched hands
Speaking and writing
Discuss Lin Pei’s behaviour with your partner. Then write some advice for Lin Pei.
Part Two: Teaching Resources
1．A text structure analysis of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
Type of writing and summary of the idea
COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?
Type of writing
This is a piece of descriptive writing.
Main idea of the passage
By familiarizing ourselves with a few basic nonverbal signals, we can improve our ability to understand what people are really communicating and become aware of what we are broadcasting to the world with our own non-verbal cues.
Idea of 1st paragraph
You were sent to meet business people from several countries at Pudong Airport.
Idea of 2nd paragraph
Examples of greeting by Mr Garcia from Columbia, by Julia Smith from Britain, by the visitor from Japan, by George Cook from Canada
Idea of 3rd paragraph
People communicate by unspoken language, learned or cultural “body language”.
Idea of 4th paragraph
Greeting by English people, by people from Spain, Italy, South American and Japan.
Idea of 5th paragraph
Examples of greeting by Ahmed Aziz from Jordan, by Madame Coulon from France, by people from Middle East or some Muslim countries.
Idea of 6th paragraph
Body language is either good or bad.
A tree diagram of COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?

III. A retold passage of the text
A possible version:
You were sent to meet business people from several countries at Pudong Airport.
At the airport Mr Garcia from Columbia approaches Julia Smith from Britain, touching her shoulder and kissing her on the cheek, who steps away from him. Mr Cook, from Canada, reaches out his hand to the visitor from Japan who bows.
People communicate differently by unspoken language, their learned or cultural “body language”.
English people usually do not stand close to others or touch strangers when they first meet. But people from Spain, Italy, South American countries approach others closely, even touch them. Most world people greet each other by shaking hands while Japanese people do so by bowing.
People from Jordan moves close to the one they greet. People from France may greet each other by shaking hands and kissing. Men from Middle East or some Muslim countries stand quite close to other men to talk and they will not shake hands with women.
Body language is either good or bad. Its understanding helps you better communicate with each other.
2．Background information on Body language
I. American Gestures
COMMON GESTURES
Americans are a not touch (touch/not touch)oriented.
In normal social situations, Americans generally stand about 30 inches apart from one another, which is also considered their personal "comfort zone."
At sporting events or the theater, Americans usually slide into a crowded aisle while facing forward (forward/the people).
? Gesture
Meaning
Americans shake hands, and from an early age they are taught to do so with a firm., solid grip.
When greeting one another.
American children are taught to look others directly in the eyes.
When greeting and conversing. If not, means shyness or weakness.
Arm raised and the open hand "waggles" back and forth.
Signaling "hello" or "good-bye." Or trying to get someone's attention.
Americans will often wave to another person and then turn to make hand scoop inward; or raise the index finger ) palm toward one's face, and make a "curling " motion with that finger.
To beckon or summon another person.
Palm facing out with the index and middle fingers displayed in the shape of a "V."
"Victory" or "peace."
Thumb and forefinger form a circle with the other three fingers splayed upward; it is used frequently and enthusiastically.
"O.K." meaning "fine" or "yes."
Thumb up with a close fist.
Meaning support or approval, "O.K." or "Good Going!" or "Good job!"
Fist raised with index finger and little finger extended.
Texas rallying call "hook 'em horns." Baseball meaning "two outs."?
Whistling
Pretty woman, cheering at sporting events, applauding performances.
Nodding and shaking the head.
Yes and No
Extend the forefinger and make a circular motion near the temple or ear.
Something or someone is "crazy."
II. Common Asian Gestures
GREETINGS GESTURES
Handshaking
Bowing
Avoid direct eye contact
BEKONING GESTURES
To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion.
Avoid using fingers in pointing to an object.
TOUCHING GESTURES
Not touch oriented societies
Avoid public display of affection
Pushing (bumping) in crowds
OTHER NON VERBAL GESTURES
Respect to elderly people
Smiling often can cover a gamut of emotions: happiness, anger, confusion, apologies , or sadness.
Displaying an open mouth (such as yawning or a wide-open laugh) is considered rude, especially with women who cover their mouths when giggling or laughing.
Try to maintain a balanced posture, stand or sit erectly or squarely. Don't slouch or put on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrest. Crossing the legs at the knees or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
Silience (listening) is a sign of politeness and of contemplation. During conversations, be especially careful about interrupting.
Japan
In summary, for most visitors the Japanese are complex and difficult to understand. Remember two things: (1) style, or the way things are done, is just as important as substance, or what is being done; and (2) watch your Japanese hosts carefully and follow their example.
GREETING GESTURES
The graceful act of bowing is the traditional greeting.
However, they have also adopted the western custom of shaking hands, albeit with a light grip and perhaps with eyes averted. Meanwhile, to show respect for their customs, it would flatter them to offer a slight bow when being introduced.
Avoid hugging and kissing when greeting.
It is considered rude to stare. Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite or even intimidating.
It is considered rude to stand with your hand or hands in your pockets, especially when greeting someone or when addressing a group of people.
The seemingly simple act of exchanging business cards is more complex in japn becuae the business card represents not only one's identity but one's station in life. Yours should be printed in your own language and in Japanese.
TOUCHING GESTURES
The Japanese are not a touch-oriented society, so avoid open displays of affection, touching or any prolonged form of body contact.
Queues are generally respected; it is only in crowded train and subway stations where the huge volume of people causes touching and pushing.
BECKONING GESTURES
It is considered insulting to point to someone fingers extended and the thinb folded into the palm.
To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion.
OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
Because of the high regard for graciousness and restraint, one should not shout, raise the voice in anger, or exhibit any excessively demonstrative behavior.
Among the Japanese, smiling often can cover a gamut of emotions: happiness, anger, confusion, apologies, or sadness.
Displaying an open mouth (such as yawning or a wide open laugh) is considered rude in Japan, especially with women who cover their mouths when giggling or laughing.
Try to maintain a balanced posture stand or sit erectly or squarely. Do not slouch or put your feet on desks or chairs. When seated have both feet squarely on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrests. Crossing the legs at the knee or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
Silence is perfectly acceptable and customary. Silence (listening) is a sign of politeness and of contemplation. During conversations, be especially careful about interrupting.
One way to show concentration and attentiveness is to close the eyes in contemplation and nod the head slight, up and down.
Japanese men like to avoid saying "no", but one gesture that is often used ti signal "no" or that "something is very difficult" is to tip the head backward and audibly suck air in through the teeth.
OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
A gesture saying "I do not know," or "I don't understand" or "No, I am undeserving" is waving the hand back and forth in front of one's own face (palm outward).
The "O.K." gesture in Japan may be interpreted as the signal for "money" or "give me change in coins."
Blowing your nose in public is considered rude. The handkerchief is used primarily for wiping the mouth or drying the hands when leaving the washroom. Paper tissues are used for blowing the nose and then discarded.
When entering a private home or traditional restaurants with tatami (bamboo mats) floors, it is usually customary to remove your shoes and place them with the toes pointing toward the outdoors.
BOWING
Many westerners view the bow as an act of subservience, but in Japan that would completely wrong. For the Japanese a bow signals respect and humility, two qualities coveted throughout Asia.
Although it is not absolutely necessary, but a slight bow demonstrate that you respect their customs. And in Japan, where style and grace and courteousness are revered, that simply act would surely be noted, appreciated, and probably remembered.
WHO BOWS FIRST? AND HOW LOW DOES ONE BOW? In Japanese, it is extremely important to know the rank of people with whom you come in contact.
"The person of lower rank bows first and lowest."
"The higher the rank of the person facing you, the lower you bow."
"The lower the bow and the longer one holds the position, the stronger is the indication of respect, gratitude, sincerity, obeisance, humility, contriteness, etc."
With equals match bows, adding an extra one when you want to show a slight edge of respect.
When unsure of status, the safest move is to bow a shade less low than the other person.
The proper form is to bow (about 15 degrees) with hands sliding down toward the knees or at the sides, back neck stiff, and eyes averted. The formal bow (about 30 degrees) with palms on knees and often bobbing up and down. Never bow with a hand (of both hands) in your pockets.
Korea
GREETING GESTURES
Among themselves, bowing is the traditional form for both greeting and departing.
Western and Korean male friends usually greet with both a slight bow and shaking hands. When shaking hands, both hands are sometimes used. Women usually do not shake hands, especially with men, but usually just nod slightly. The senior person offers to shake hands first, but the junior person bows first. However, shake hands with a light grip and perhaps with eyes averted.
Avoid hugging and kissing when greeting.
Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite and even intimidating.
Business cards are traded respectfully. Keep the card on the table in front of you as just one small gesture of respect.
When saying good-bye, the traditional gesture is the bow, but the younger generation has adopted the western custom of waving good-bye by moving their arm side-to-side.
TOUCHING GESTURES
Generally speaking, the Koreans are not a touch-oriented society (especially true for visitors.) So avoid touching or any prolonged form of body contact.
Public display of affection are very rare. On the other hand, you may note people of the same sex walking hand-in-hand, which is simply a gesture of friendship.
Don't worry about a bit of pushing in stores or when groups board public buses or trains. Apologies are neither offered or expected.
BECKONING GESTURES
The open hand or the middle finger is used for pointing.
To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion. Using the arm and hand up, palm toward the face is used only for calling dogs and children.
OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
Respect is always shown to elderly people, so it is appropriate to rise when a person-- especially an elderly man enters the room or giving up a seat on a subway. However, an elder may not give up a seat for a young boy.
Men generally have priority in Korea: Go through a door first, walk ahead of women, and women may help them on with their coats.
Among the Koreans, laughter is used to disguise many emotions: anger, frustration, and fear.
Loud talking or laughing is usually avoided. Koreans, especially women will cover their mouths laughing, resulting in giggling rather than wide open-mouth laughing.
Periods of silence are common and accepted, even during dinners.
Correct posture is important, especially when seated. Don't slouch or put your feet on desks or chairs. Try to maintain a balanced posture, stand or sit erectly or squarely. When seated have both feet squarely on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrests. Crossing the legs at the knees or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
When walking in public, keep to the left side of the walkway and stairway.
OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
It is considered impolite to enter a room without knocking first. However, Koreans may not wait for you to come to the door and open it. They may knock and then enter.
When walking in public places, direct eye contact is uncommon in the larger cities. However, visitors may be the subject of much curiosity and therefore you may notice some stares.
Blowing you nose in public is considered rude, especially at a meal. Paper tissues are used for blowing the nose and then discarded.
When entering a private home, it is usually customary to remove your shoes.
Spitting (except for young women) and burping in public is acceptable.
Phillipines
GREETING GESTURES
Handshaking is the common custom, with both men and women shaking hands in a friendly and informal fashion.
Filipinos may greet one another with the "eyebrow flash" which is merely a quick lifting of the eyebrows.
TOUCHING GESTURES
Generally speaking, the Filipinos are a touch-oriented society.
People of the same sex may be seen holding hands in public places, which is simply a gesture of friendship.
Don't worry about a bit of pushing and shoving when using public transportation, Filipinos seldom queue or observe orderly lines.
BECKONING GESTURES
Instead of pointing to an object , Filipinos will shift their eyes toward it, or purse the lips and point with the mouth.
To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion. Never curl your index finger back and forth because that is considered insulting.
OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
It is considered rude to stare. Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite and even intimidating.
Respect is always shown to elderly people.
Among the Filipinos, laugher is used to convey both enjoyment and pleasure but also to mask embarrassment over another person's misfortune.
Speaking in aloud voice is considered ill-mannered and rude.
3．Words and expressions from Unit 4 Body language
Major a.
a major earthquake 大地震，
a major problem 重大问题，
a major subject 主修科目
local a
. local customs地方风俗，
a local pain 局部疼痛，
当地时间 local time
represent v.
represent a club as its chief executive以总经理的身份代表俱乐部，
represent by signs 用符号代表
curious a.
be curious about other’s people business 对别人的事情太好奇
Introduce v.
introduce her as his daughter 介绍说她是自己的女儿，
be introduced from… 从…传来的，
introduce…to sb. 向某人介绍……
approach v. & n.
cautiously approached the house 小心地走近那房子,
approach the manager about … 同经理谈……， a
pproach the question as a scientist 从科学家的角度来处理这一问题，
Snow announced the approach of winter. 雪宣告了冬季的来临。
I like her approach to the problem. 我喜欢她解决这个问题的方法。
Touch v. & n.
She lightly touched his forehead. 她轻轻地摸了摸他的前额。
Don't touch the exhibits. Few students in our school can touch him in music. 在音乐方面,我们学校很少有学生能与他相比。
I was touched beyond words. 我感动得无法形容。
They did not touch this topic in their talk. 他们在会谈中没有触及这个问题。
The rain touched the crops. 这场雨使庄稼受害。
They sat so close that their heads nearly touched. 他们坐得那么近,头都差不多碰到一起了。
In his talk he touched on/upon the state of affairs in Latin America. 谈话中他提到了拉丁美洲的局势。
Our ship is to touch at Hongkong tomorrow morning. 我们的船将于明天上午停靠香港。
It will break at a touch. 那东西一碰就破。
Let's stay in touch. 我们保持联络。
He's added a few finishing touches to his novel. 他给小说作了最后润色。
He has a touch with birds. 他擅长养鸟。
The young man recited his poems with a touch of pride. 那个青年带点骄傲地朗诵他的诗作。
Cheek n.
The little girl has rosy cheeks. 那个小女孩脸颊红润。
He had the cheek to ask me for money. 他竟厚着脸皮向我要钱。
How can you cheek your grandparents in that way? 你怎么可以那样无礼地对祖父母讲话?
learned a.
The more learned a man is, the more modest he usually is. 人愈有学问,往往愈是谦虚。learned books 学术性书籍
stranger n.
I feel strange in the presence of strangers. 在陌生人面前,我感到不自在。
Sorry, I don't know. I'm a stranger here myself. 对不起,我不清楚。我对这里也不熟。
He is no stranger to sorrow. 他饱经忧患。
I'm a stranger to statistics. 我对统计学一窍不通。
Spoken a.
They built a robot capable of understanding spoken commands. 他们制造了一个能懂口头指令的机器人。
He is a shy soft-spoken person. 他害羞,说话轻声细语的。
Express v. & n.
Really, I hardly know how to express my gratitude. 我真不知道如何表达我的感激之情。The doctor expressed poison from her wound. 医生把毒液从她的伤口挤了出来。
Please send this parcel by express delivery. 请用快递寄送这个包裹。
The doctor gave express orders that the patient was to have no visitors. 医生明确嘱咐,那个病人不可会客。
We took an express bus home. 我们乘特快公车回家。
They painted the house for the express purpose for selling it. 他们专为卖房而油漆房子。
action n.
The quick action of the firemen saved the building from being burned down. 消防队员行动及时,该建筑物方免遭焚毁。
The action of water on rock should be taken into account. 应考虑到水对岩石的作用。
All the action in the play takes place at one railroad station. 该剧的整个情节均发生在一座火车站里。
Finally she had to file an action for divorce. 最后她只好提出离婚诉讼。posture n.
a sitting posture 坐姿,
They are trying to adopt a more cooperative posture. 他们正试图采取更为合作的态度。
He enjoys posturing in front of an audience. 他喜欢在观众面前装腔作势。
likely a. & a.
John is likely to be in London this autumn. 今年秋天约翰可能在伦敦。
The park is a likely place for the picnic. 这公园倒是个适合野餐的地方。
We will most likely be late. 我们很有可能会迟到。
Muslim n. & a. A Muslim is a believer in or follower of Islam. The word Muslim means one who submits and implies complete submission to the will of God (Allah). Muslims believe that nature is itself Islamic, since it follows natural laws placed by God. Thus, a Muslim strives to surrender to God's commands every step of the way.
The holiest book for Muslims is the Qur'an, or the 'Koran' in English. Muslims consider the Arabic Qur'an as the direct revelation of God; translations do exist to other languages but are not regarded as the literal word of God.
Other canonical texts of the Muslim include the hadith which are recordings of the life of the prophet made by the people who were around him. Many matters not specifically mentioned in the Qur'an are covered in the hadith. The degree to which the hadith are authoritative depends on the sect which a Muslim is from.
The basic beliefs of Muslims are: belief in God, His angels, His revealed Books, His Messengers, the Day of Judgement, and the Al Qadar (which is a form of divine pre-destination). The revealed books of Islam also include the Injil (Christian Gospels), the Torah and the Psalms.
The Five Pillars of Islam on which a Muslim's life is founded are:
The Testimony that there is none worthy of worship except God and that Muhammad is his messenger.
Establishing of the five daily Prayers (Salaah). These prayers are ritualistic in nature and adherence to the ritual practice is required. The location at which one prays is not strictly defined as long as one is able to establish the Qiblat.
The Giving of Zakaah (charity), which is generally 2.5% of the yearly savings for a rich man working in trade or industry, and 10% or 20% of the produce for agriculturists. This money or produce is distributed among the poor.
Refraining from eating, drinking and having sex from dawn to dusk in the month of Ramadhaan (Sawm).
The Pilgrimage (Hajj) to Mecca during the month of Zul Hijjah, which is compulsory once in a lifetime for one who has the ability to do it. This ability includes the financial means and the physical strength since the hajj can be strenuous. Also, one has to obtain a permit from the Saudi government which is granted based on an annual quota based on country.
comedy n. Comedy is the use of humour in the performing arts. It also means a performance that relies heavily on humor. The term originally comes from theater, where it simply referred to a play with a happy ending, in contrast to a tragedy. The humor, once an incidental device used to entertain, is now an essential aspect of a comedy.
A recognised characteristic of comedy is that it is an intensely personal enjoyment. People frequently fail to find the same things amusing, but when they do it can help to create powerful bonds.
Unit 4 Body Language
I 教学内容分析
本单元的中心话题是“身体语言”。身体语言的交流在不同的文化中所蕴涵的意义是不一样的。这样，人们在互相交际时，就会出现这样或那样的问题或障碍。本单元就是从该话题展开，通过一系列的交际误会的场景，形象地表现出话题的中心：身体语言本身没有对错或好坏之分，它们是在特定的文化发展规律过程中形成的。
Warming Up 部分由两部分组成。练习1通过让学生讨论四幅照片交流对日常交际的看法。然后让学生选择课本提供的15个日常交际用语中的一个，用身势语言表演出来，让同伴猜测其意义。
Pre-reading 部分设计了四个问题。这些问题集中引导学生思考“语言的目的”、“离开语言人们如何交流”、“有多少途径可用非语言手段向人问好”、“预测下面阅读课文的内容”等，这些问题既是对“热身”所引出的话题的总结，又承接了下一步的阅读教学。
Reading 部分描写了作者在机场迎接外国客人的场景。这几位来自不同国家的学生初次见面时，都按照自己国家的风俗习惯向对方问候，结果却遭遇了尴尬。这一场景增加了文章的真实性和形象性，使读者仿佛身处其中，能引发读者的好奇心，为下面引出中心做好了铺垫。
Learning about Language 包括词汇和语法两部分。词汇部分含有三个练习：从1至3分别为猜词义、用词填空。语法部分分两步走：练习1要求学生从课文中找出含有v-ing形式的句子；然后在练习2中运用v-ing形式，做到了讲练结合。
Using Language 该部分包括四大块：阅读与交谈、写作、听写说和说写。在这一部分学生的各项知识和技能得到了充分的提高。阅读部分进一步阐述了身体语言的重大作用，并用具体的身体语言举例来告知学生们如何使用它们。写作部分环节合理：先收集句子，然后表演，最后写下自己所观看到的主要内容。第三部分先讲述了一场车祸，接着让学生根据图片来表演相关内容，听练结合，学以致用。最后一部分让学生在生活中应用所学的知识：看到Lin Pei的反常行为后，先向另一个朋友描述其举止（以对话的形式）；然后建议Lin Pei讲出心事（以写信的形式展开）。
Learning Tip 指导学生如何更好地掌握理解身体语言——看英语版的电影或与母语是英语的外国人交谈。
II．教学重点和难点
教学重点
(1) 本单元教学目的和要求中的生词和短语;
(2) 掌握动词的-ing形式的句法功能;
(3) 学会与人或动物进行身体语的交流。
教学难点：
培养学生的跨文化交流的心理素质，成为具有跨文化交流能力的现代人;
动词-ing作为定语和状语的辨别;
重点词汇的运用。
III．教学计划
本单元建议分六课时：
第一课时：Warming-up, Listening (Workbook) & Talking (Workbook)
第二课时：Pre-reading, Reading & Comprehension
第三课时：Learning about Language
第四课时：Using Language
第五课时：Listening task (Workbook) & Speaking task (Workbook)
第六课时：Reading task (Workbook) & Writing task (Workbook)
IV. 教学步骤：
Period 1 Warming Up, Listening（Workbook）& Talking (Workbook)
Teaching Goals:
1.To get Ss to know something about body language.
2.To encourage Ss to learn to express themselves by body language.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Leading-in
Purpose : By showing Ss a few pictures of body language, ask Ss to guess the feeling each picture can convey.
Lead Ss to the topic of this unit. Teacher may say, “All of the pictures show many difference. Can you tell the others what each picture shows? Are these actions kind of language? Can we communicate with a person who can’t speak or a person whose language is different from yours?” Ask Ss to give their explanation for all the above pictures in order to arouse their interest in the topic — body language.
Step 2. Warming Up
Purpose: To introduce the topic of this unit to Ss in the form of discussion.
1. Ask some Ss the following questions.
If you are painful, what expression will you have on your face?
If you are very angry , how will you show the feeling?
If you want to show “Be quiet!”, what will you do without speaking?
…
2. Ask Ss to present the actions to their desk mates. The part can be done like this: Students A can say meanings and Student B acts them out. Then they can do in turn..
Conclusion:
We can communicate with people even if we don’t use words or voice. Body language is part of language which sometimes can convey more emotions than words. But sometimes body language may cause trouble because different cultures have different body language or even if the same body language may mean contrariwise. So it is a necessity for us to know body language to avoid misunderstanding.
Step 3. Pre-listening
Purpose: to help Ss to guess the main idea about the listening text by the given pictures.
1. Divide Ss into groups of six and ask them to discuss the pictures with their partners.
Who is the woman in the picture? (Jane Goodall.)
What is the animal?.(Chimp.)
What are they doing? (Talking with each other/ kissing with each other/greeting each other…)
Are they friendly to each other? (Yes.)
2. Get Ss to look at the pictures on P62 and let their partners state their opinions on the listening material. At the same time remind them of the key words: similar, peaceful, smiling, angry, chimps, humans, angry, safe and protected, affection, like.
Step 4. Listening (Workbook)
Purpose: To get Ss to listen for comparisons
To develop the listening ability of Ss.
To gain some knowledge of body language and find how similar some animal body language is.
Ask Ss to look through the questions of Ex2 on P62 and listen to the tape carefully. Play the tape twice. For the first time, just ask Ss to listen for the gist. For the second time, ask Ss to finish Ex1 on P62.
Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and answer the questions in Ex3 on P62. If Ss have some difficulty in finding out the answers, stop the tape where necessary.
Step 5. Talking (Workbook)
1. Explain for Ss “commands”, “warnings” and “prohibitions”.
command: give orders to
e.g. He commanded silence.他命令大家肃静。
I command you to go.我命令你去。
warning: advice to beware /a cautionary
e.g. Because of her warning, I was careful.由于她的提醒，我很小心。
prohibition: the act of prohibiting or the condition of being prohibited.
e.g. prohibition of corporal punishment in schools 学校的禁止体罚
2. To ask Ss to act them out for the whole class by using the given sentences.
Suggested Answers:
commands
warnings
prohibitions
Go away / Be quiet
Stop!
Don’t sit here.
Come here
Watch out! A car is coming!
Don’t stop here.
Pick up the books
Be careful! Don’t slip.
Don’t enter here.
Step 6. Homework
1. Ask Ss to think of more actions to express themselves instead of by words.
2. Ask Ss to go over all the new words and prepare for the reading text.
Period 2. Pre-reading, Reading & Comprehending
Teaching Goals:
To learn about the importance of body language.
To develop Ss’ reading skills.
To arouse Ss’ interest in body language.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Pre-reading
Purpose: To make Ss realize the importance of body language.
1. Show some pictures and encourage Ss to guess the meanings. Then ask them to answer the following questions.
(1) If you are happy, which picture will show the same meaning?
(2) If you want to show you are very cool, which picture will show the same meaning?
(3) If you are very sad, which picture will show the same meaning?
(4) If you are shy, which picture will show the same meaning?
(5) If you want to show you are friendly, which picture will show the same meaning?
(6) If you want to sing high praise for something or somebody, which picture will show the same meaning?
(7) If you wish somebody good luck, which picture will show the same meaning?
2. Get Ss to talk freely with their desk mates about body language. And ask them to give the answers to the three questions of Pre-reading on P25.
Step 2. Leading-in
Purpose: to stimulate Ss’ interest in reading the text
Ask Ss to answer the following questions.
What would you do when you meet someone for the first time?
When you meet your boss, how do greet him or her?
When you first came to the high school, how do you introduce each other with your new desk mate?
Have you ever paid attention to the distance between people who are greeting each other?
Step 3. Fast reading
Purpose: To get the gist of the passage.
1. Ask Ss to look at the picture on P26 and then read the text quickly and find out the main idea of the passage.
(Tell Ss that most topic sentences may appear at the beginning or the end of the passage or paragraph.)
Suggested Answers:
Body language is very general, but no tall members of all cultures behave the same way.
2. Ask Ss to read the text again and analyze the organization of the passage.
The topic
Surprising scenes
Some examples

Conclusion
Author’s opinion
Suggested Answers:
details → general → details → general.
.
3. Ask Ss to underline all the countries and continents in the passage and try to group them.
Suggested Answers:
Europe ← Britain; North America ← Canada; South America← Columbia; Asia← Japan
Step 4. Intensive reading
Purpose: to get Ss to learn the details of the text.
1. Ask Ss to read the passage carefully and decide which of the following statements is true and which one is false.
Mr. Garcia kissed Miss Julia Smith because they have known each other well. ( )
George Cook reaches his hand out in order to shake hands with the Japanese. ( )
All cultures don’t greet each the same way. ( )
When a Japanese bows to you, he is apologizing to you for what he has done . ( )
French people, like the English, will keep a certain distance from others. ( )
Men from all Muslin countries will not shake hands with women. ( )
From the passage we can see western cultures are better than eastern cultures. ( )
It’s necessary to study body language because it helps us to get better understanding among people from different cultures. ( )
. Suggested Answers:
(1) F (2) T (3) T (4) F (5) F (6) F (7) F (8) T
2 Ask Ss to read the text again and finish the Ex1,2 on P27.
3 Ask Ss to have a small discussion to finish Ex2 on P27.
4 Ask Ss to read the text again and underline important or new phrases.
at a major hotel; in a curious way; introduce …to…; kiss sb. on the cheek; take…away from…; reach one’s hand out ; in the same way; communicate with somebody; spoken language; express one’s feelings; keep physical distance; stand close to; be likely to do…; as well; nod at somebody; shake hands (with); either…or…; avoid difficulty in communication
Step5 Homework
1.Ask Ss to use the new words to make some new sentences.
2. Ask Ss to read the text fluently.
3. Ask Ss to use body language to show their meanings and understand more body language.
Period 3 Learning about Language
Teaching Goals:
1. To get Ss to know how to use new words and phrases.
2. To help Ss to master some new words and expressions.
3. To get Ss to have the knowledge of this grammar point: The v-ing form of the verb can be used as an adverbial describing a verb and as an attribute describing a noun.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Consolidation
Purpose: To consolidate the words and phrases in the text.
Ask Ss to read the reading text again and finish Ex1 on P28
Suggested answers:
Defence, likely, Italy, canteen, represent, dash, approach, association, cheek, flight
Ask Ss to finish Ex2,3 and check the answers in pairs.
Suggested answers:
Ex2: approached, Jordan, cheek, curiously, dashed, misunderstood, contrary
Ex3: crossroads, adult, major, dormitory, greeted, representing, association, spoken, Colombia, curious, flight
Step 2. Grammar
Purpose: To get Ss to know the fun_ction of the v–ing form of the verb.
1. Ask Ss to work in pairs and finish Ex1 on P29. After that, lead them to draw a conclusion.
Conclusion: The rule of the grammar in this unit.
We have learned that the v–ing form of the verb can be used as the subject and the object in Unit 2 and it is can be used as the predicative and the attributive in Unit 3. In this unit, we will go on to learn the v–ing form of the verb used as the attributive and the adverbial.
(1) As the attributive — A single v–ing form should be placed before the noun it serves; if a phrase after the noun it serves.
For example: running water; floating ice block; leaking pipes; dripping taps;
a boy standing there; the man smoking a cigarette; the driver driving a new car
a sleeping bag; a fishing pole; a sewing machine…
(2) As the adverbial —The v–ing form should be used as the adverbial of time, reason, way, result, condition , etc. For example:
Passing the house, he saw a girl playing the piano. (time)
I got to know him while working with him. (time)
Being excited, none of us could fall asleep. (reason)
He came running. (way)
She stood waiting for a bus. (accompany)
They opened the fire, killing one soldier. (result)
(3) The v–ing form can be used in the following structures.
① Present participle phrases such as adding /pointing out/reminding/warning can introduce statements in indirect speech. For example:
He told me to start early, reminding me that the roads would be crowded.
② After the verbs of sensation, such as see, hear, smell, listen (to), notice, and watch, the action can be either complete or incomplete. For example:
I see him passing my house every day.
Didn’t you hear the clock sticking?
I felt the car skidding.
She smelt something burning and saw smoke rising.
I watched them rehearsing the play.
③ catch, find, leave+ object + present participle. For example:
I caught him stealing the apples. (I found him doing this.)
If she catches you reading her diary, she will be furious.
I found him standing at the door.
I left him talking to Bob. = He was talking to Bob when I left.
④ spend/waste + an expression of time /money +v-ing. For example:
He spends two hours a day traveling.
Tom spends much money modernizing his house.
e busy +v.-in. For example:
She is/ was busy packing.
⑥ The v-ing can replace as/since/because +subject +verb. For example:
Knowing that he wouldn’t be able to buy food on his journey he took large supplies with him.
Being a student he was naturally interested in museums.
⑦ When one action is immediately followed by another by the same subject, the first action can be expressed by a present participle. For example:
He rode away. He whistled as he went. = He rode away whistling.
⑧ When the second action forms part of the first, or is the result of it, we can express the second action by a present participle. For example:
She went out, slamming the door.
He fell over, hitting his head against the table.
⑨The negative form of the v-ing form is ‘not v-ing; the present perfect form is “having done”; the passive form is “being done”.
Step 3. Practice
1. Ask Ss to do the following exercises to grasp the grammar well.
He told us a very _______________ (有趣的) story.
The boy ____________(坐在我身边的) is my son.
There is nothing _______ (鼓舞人心的) in his words.
Did you see the boy_____________(正在被那个人审问的)?
The new is ___________ (鼓舞人心的).
He kept me ________________ (等了好长时间).
He can get the machine ______________ (发动).
He was found _____________ (躺在地上).
______________________ (听到这个消息), he burst into laughter.
Be careful when __________________________(过马路时).
___________________ (因为很穷), he couldn’t go to school.
___________________________ (由于不知道他的地址), I can’t get in touch with him.
_____________________ (由于未收到会回音), he decided to write another letter to her.
He sat there ________________(读一本书).
The captain covered the boy with a national flag only ____________________(把脸露在外面).
________________ (从他的口音判断), he must be a southerner.
________________ (总的说来), his answer is right.
________________ (综合考虑), they did a good job.
________________ (每当看到这座山时), he always thinks of his hometown.
_________ (已经用了) for a long time, the watch needs to be mended.
Suggested Answers:
(1) interesting story (2) sitting by me (3) inspiring (4) being questioned by the man (5) encouraging (6) waiting for a ling time (7) starting (8) lying on the ground (9) Hearing the news (10) crossing the street (11) being so poor (12) Not knowing his address (13) Not having received an answer (14) reading a book (15) leaving his face exposed (16) Judging from his accent (17) Generally speaking (18) Considering everything (19) Seeing the mountain (20) Having been used
2. Ask Ss to work in pairs and finish Ex2,3 on P29.
3. Ask Ss to finish the exercises of Using Structures on P64 and check the answers in pairs.
4. Ask Ss to complete the following sentences.
(1) The young man, ______________(坐在隔壁房间里的), is writing a letter to his mother.
(2) The soup _____________(闻起来很香的) on the table is cooked by Mother.
(3) The ________(失踪的) boy was last seen _________(在河边玩).
(4) The school bag _________(挂在墙上的) is Li Ming’s.
(5) Anyone will be criticized by the teacher if he is found _________(在考试中作弊).
(6) The man was caught ___________(偷一辆汽车).
(7) I can’t leave the kitchen with_________(火着着).
(8) You should take him to hospital at once instead of _________________(让他流血).
(9) __________(正吃着饭时), we heard the doorbell ring.
(10) The goat __________(痛苦地叫着的) is badly wounded by a knife.
Suggested Answers:
(1) sitting in the next room (2) smelling delicious (3) missing; playing in the river bank (4) hanging on the wall (5) cheating in the examination (6) stealing a car (7) the fire burning (8) leaving him bleeding (9) While having dinner (10) crying painfully
Step 4. Homework
1. Review the new words and phrases and finish the exercises of Using Words And Expressions on P63.
2. Recite the sentences with the v–ing form in the reading passage.
Period 4 Using Language
Teaching Goals:
1. To improve Ss’ listening ability.
2. To enlarge Ss’ vocabulary.
3. To ensure Ss have really improved the important skills of reading, writing, listening and speaking.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Reading and talking (Using Language)
Purpose: To get Ss to know something about how to show themselves by body language.
To get Ss to learn more words and phrases.
1. Leading-in
Purpose: To know how to show our feelings.
Show some pictures to Ss to arouse their interest in the reading text.
angry put people at ease/hide feelings
agreement disagree or refuse/threaten
not interested interested
 do not believe love /like
show respect
2. Fast reading
Ask Ss to read the passage quickly and summarize the main idea.
Suggested Answers:
We should understand the personal body language of the other people and know how to show our feelings.
3. Intensive reading
(1) Ask Ss to read the passage carefully and finish Ex1 on P30. And then ask Ss to explain the answers.
(2) Ask Ss to read the text again and finish Ex2 on P30. And then ask Ss to discuss how important body language is in the following jobs.
teaching, medical care, news, management
(3) Ask Ss to compare the similarities and differences of some body languages and finish the form of Writing (Using Language) on P32.
Step 2. Listening, writing and speaking (Using Language)
Purpose: To help Ss improve the listening ability.
1. Pre-listening
Ask Ss to look at the pictures on P31 to guess what has happened and let them know the characters in the pictures..
● Lin Pu—the driver
● the man who was knocked down—the cyclist
● a policeman
2. Listening
Ask Ss to look through Ex1 on P31 to make sure that they know what to listen to. Then play the tape once without stopping. (If the students haven’t got the correct order, play the tape once again). Then check the answers.
3. Writing
Ask Ss to retell the story and find out the actions in the listening text.
Suggested Answer:
Lin Pu , who is driving on the road in an old car from his brother in law, has just got his license. Being feeling nervous, he crashed a bicycle and knocked over a basket full of apples. A policeman came over and asked him to pay a fine. But Lin has no more money on him except the car. The policeman told him to pay the fine by the end of the month. The cyclist felt very angry and ordered Lin to pick up his apples and Lin did so.
4. Speaking
Divide Ss into groups of three and then ask them to act out the story. Remind Ss to use body language in their acting.
Step 3. Speaking and writing (Using Language)
Purpose: To help Ss to use spoken language and body language.
1. Speaking.
Ask Ss to imagine that they have a good friend named Lin Pei. In the past she was a good girl and very friendly. But now she is no longer friendly and doesn’t want to talk to anyone. She always looks sad and stays alone. She doesn’t do her homework and looks really bad.
Divide Ss into groups of two and ask Ss to discuss the following questions and then write down their answers.
What problem might Lin Pei have?
What could be her recent “body language” or behavior?
Ask each group to make up their dialogue and prepare to report to the class. Ss can refer to the example given in Ex1 on P31.
2. Writing
Ask Ss to write some advice for Lin Pei, according to the dialogues they have made up. Remind Ss that they should explain in their advice how important body language is in showing feelings and in communication.
Step 3. Homework
1. Ask Ss to read the passage fluently and know the use of the important words and phrases of this part.
2. Ask Ss to practice showing themselves by correct body language.
3. Ask Ss to preview Listening task (Workbook) and Speaking task (Workbook).
Period 5 Listening task (Workbook) & Speaking task (Workbook)
Teaching Goals: To improve Ss’ listening and speaking ability.
To learn how to solve the problem Ss might meet while communicating with the others.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Listening task (Workbook)
1. Pre-listening
Ask Ss to discuss the following questions with their partners according to the pictures on P65.
(1) What is man going to do?
(2) Is the woman his friend? And is the woman a foreigner?
(3) How is the man greeting the woman? But how about the woman?
(4) After greeting each other, where are they going?
Suggested Answers:
(1) He is driving to meet somebody.
(2) Yes. Yes.
(3) He is intending to hug the woman. The woman is very surprised and is moves a little backward.
(4) They are going to the restaurant to have a meal.
2. Listening
(1) After the discussion, ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and finish Ex1 on P65.
(2) Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and pay attention to the differences between Chinese and Western gestures and body languages. And then let them finish Ex2 and Ex3 on P65.
Step 2. Speaking task (Workbook)
1. Pre-speaking
Ask Ss to talk about the following questions.
Have you ever been with a foreigner?
How will you greet a Columbian / Canadian / Frenchman / Japanese?
Suggested Answer:
To a Columbian, touch shoulders and kiss him/her on the cheek; to a Canadian, shake hands; to a Frenchman, kiss him/her on the cheek; to a Japanese, bow to him/her.
2. Speaking
Divide Ss into groups of two. Each group is supposed to choose one of the situations given in Speaking task on P67 and make up their dialogues. After that, choose some groups to present their dialogues.
3. Post-speaking
Ask Ss to choose the best dialogue (proper body language is very important in their dialogue) and then sum up the differences in Western and Chinese body languages.
Step 3. Homework
Ask Ss to go on speaking with one or more people by using body language.
Ask Ss to preview Reading task (Workbook) and Writing task (Workbook).
Period 6 Reading task (Workbook) & Writing task (Workbook)
Teaching Goals:
To know more about greeting gestures.
To develop Ss’ reading ability.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Reading task (Workbook)
1. Leading-in
Ask Ss to discuss the following question.
Do you know a universal sign in body language? What is it?
2. Fast-reading
Ask Ss to read the text quickly and silently and then answer the question.
What is text mainly about?
Suggested Answer:
It is mainly about a little history of the gesture — the open hand.
3. Intensive reading
(1) Ask Ss to read the text carefully and finish the exercise under the text on P66.
(2) Ask Ss to find out what they cannot understand in the text and try to analyze them by discussing.
Step 2. Writing task (Workbook)
Purpose: To improve Ss’ writing ability.
1. Ask Ss to talk about the following questions.
What does Chinese people mean by patting stomach gently?
What does Westerners mean by putting hand at throat?
Suggested answers: The two gestures mean the same — I’m full.
2. Tell Ss that there are many situations like the above. Then Ask Ss to look through the form of Writing task on P68 and complete it by discussing in pairs.
3. Ask some pairs to present their forms to the class and let the whole class decide which is the best.
4. Ask Ss to discuss the following questions.
Have you ever seen or heard about the different kinds of body language? What are they?
Do you find them unusual, funny or difficult to understand?
Do you think you should learn more about body language in different cultures? Why?
5. Ask Ss to write a composition according to the answers to the questions above.
Step 3. Homework
1. Ask Ss to review all the new words and phrases of the unit and prepare for a dictation.
2. Ask Ss to make notes about the grammar rule of the v–ing form of the verb.
For example:
作时间状语：Be careful (when) crossing the street.
Don’t mention this when talking to him.
(2) 作原因状语：Being ill, she didn’t go to work.
Not knowing her address, we couldn’t get in touch with her.
(3) 作结果状语：Her husband died, leaving her with two children.
第四单元：
第一节 完形填空(共10小题；每小题2分，满分20分)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从21-30各题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
Once I worked in Australia with my sisters. In a village there was an elderly man. I am sure that you have never seen a situation as difficult as that 21 old man’s. He was completely ignored by everyone. His home was untidy and 22 .
I told him, “Let me clean your house, wash your clothes, and make your bed. You will feel much 23 if you allow me to do them.” He finally 24 . When I cleaned his house, I discovered a beautiful lamp, covered with 25 . Only God knows how many years had passed since he last lit it. I asked him, “Don’t you ever 26 it?” He answered, “No. No one comes to see me. I have no 27 to light it. Whom would I light it for?” I asked, “Would you light it if my sisters 28 ?” He replied, “Certainly.”
From that day on every evening my sisters visited him, talked with him, cleaned the lamp and 29 it. Two years passed. I had nearly forgotten that man when he sent me a letter. It said: “The 30 light you lit in my life still shines. Thank you.” It’s a very small thing and we often ignore small things. However, something small but kind may change a person’s life.
21. A. careless B. poor C. sick D. busy
22. A. dirty B. empty C. cold D. dark
23. A. healthier B. younger
C. better D. stronger
24. A. cried B. agreed C. left D. refused
25. A. cloth B. decorations
C. paper D. dust
26. A. touch B. clean C. use D. enjoy
27. A. time B. money
C. oil D. need
28. A. came B. helped
C. minded D. read
29. A. played B. lit C. watched D. praised
30. A. clean B. big C. valuable D. colorful
第二节 语法填空 (共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空，并将答案填写在后面标号为31-40的相应位置上。
Not a long time ago, I went to a nursing college after I graduated from high school in my hometown. During my second month at 31 college, our professor gave us a pop quiz. I made good preparation for it 32 went through the questions quickly and easily, until I read the last 33 : “What is the first name of the woman, 34 does the cleaning in the college?”
Surely 35 was some kind of joke. Several times I had noticed the woman 36 (clean) outside. She was tall, dark-haired and in her 50s, but how would I know her name? 37 (leave) the last question undone, I handed in my paper and the bell rang. When the class ended one of the students asked 38 the last question would count toward our quiz grade. “ 39 your careers you will meet a great number of people. All of them are of great 40 (important) and they deserve your attention and care, even if all you do is smile and say hello,” said the professor. I’ve never forgotten that lesson since then and I also learned that her name was Ruthie.
31. ____ 32. ____ 33. ____ 34. ____ 35. ____
36. ____ 37. ____ 38. ____ 39. ____ 40. ____
Ⅲ. 阅读 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 阅读理解 （共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
■
A
难度：★
She took time to ask whether her students had eaten breakfast in the morning, or if they had enough warm clothes to wear in winter. My English teacher, Marsha Pincus, did all that and more for me when I was growing up in inner-city Philadelphia, one of eight kids raised by a single mother.
Mrs. Pincus told me to come by or to call her if I needed to. She cared about me. She gave a skinny kid like me some extra support.
I was always something of a smart-mouth when I was young, but Mrs. Pincus helped me channel my enthusiasm （热情） into something positive. When she was out on maternity （怀孕） leave with her first child, a substitute teacher came in for English classes. On the first day, this teacher had trouble controlling the classroom. I watched kids cutting up in front of her and got really mad. This was my favorite class; I loved learning Shakespeare.
I knew the substitute would talk to Mrs. Pincus and that she’d be disappointed. “We need to stop this!” I shouted. Usually I was the one clowning around, but the kids seemed to listen. I ended up standing in front of the room discussing Julius Caesar. Later, the substitute told Mrs. Pincus about the skinny boy who taught the lesson. Mrs. Pincus said she knew right away what had happened. “Without her even naming you, I knew it was you,” she told me.
Looking back, I think that was when the teacher in me started to emerge （显现）. Mrs. Pincus retired this year after more than 30 years of teaching. I spoke at her retirement party. It was one of the hardest things I’ve ever done. But because of this lady’s encouragement, I learned I belonged to the classroom, the front of it.
41. We can say that the author is most probably ____.
A. a journalist B. a teacher
C. a lawyer D. a novelist
42. According to the passage, we can know that a substitute teacher is a teacher ____.
A. who is going to give birth to a baby
B. who is very popular with all the students
C. who is weak both mentally and physically
D. who does the work of another teacher for a limited period of time
43. What can we know about Mrs. Marsha Pincus?
A. She liked to ask her students all kinds of questions.
B. She gave birth to more than eight children all her
life.
C. She cared about all her students, especially the
author.
D. She taught the author literature before her retirement.
44. It can be inferred from the text that ____.
A. the substitute teacher was lacking in knowledge
about English
B. Mrs. Pincus got really mad when she first learned
about what happened
C. the author was quite thin when the story happened
D. Mrs. Pincus and the substitute teacher were good
friends
45. What is the author’s purpose in writing the text?
A. To remember one of his favorite teachers.
B. To tell an inspiring story about himself in his teens.
C. To show his close relationship with his teacher.
D. To share his good time spent in middle school.
B
难度：★★
My friend is a rather old-fashioned lady. She is always quite delicate and elegant（文雅的）, especially in her language. She and her husband were planning to attend a family party, so she wrote to a hotel and booked a room. She wanted to make sure the hotel was fully equipped, but didn’t know how to ask about the toilet facilities （卫生间设备）. She just couldn’t bring herself to write the word “toilet” in her letter. After much thought, she finally came up with the old-fashioned term “bathroom commode”. But when she wrote that down she felt that she was being too forward. So she started all over again, wrote the trip purpose this time, and referred to the bathroom commode merely as the B.C.. “Does the hotel have its own B.C.?” is what she finally wrote.
Well, the hotel owner wasn’t old-fashioned at all, and he couldn’t figure out what the woman was talking about. That B.C. business really stumped him. After worrying about it for a while, he showed the letter to some waiters, but no one could figure out what she meant either. So the hotel owner, finally coming to the conclusion that the lady was talking about the location of the Baptist Church, sat down and wrote the following reply:
“Dear Madam, I regret very much the delay （延期） in answering your letter, but I now take the pleasure of informing you that the B.C. is located nine miles north of the hotel and is capable （有能力的） of seating 250 people at one time. I admit it is quite a distance away if you are in the habit of going regularly, but no doubt a great number of people take their lunches and make a day of it. They usually arrive early and stay late. If you don’t start early you might not make it in time. I would like to say it pains me very much not being able to go more often, but it is surely not because of a lack of desire on my part. If you decide to come to our hotel, perhaps I could go with you the first time you go, sit with you, and introduce you to all the folks.”
46. Why did the author’s friend write “B.C.” instead of “toilet”?
A. She tried to make her letter difficult to understand.
B. She was quite old and liked to make the letter brief.
C. She could spell out neither “toilet” nor “bathroom
commode”.
D. She thought it was a politer way to express what she meant.
47. All of the following are mentioned in the lady’s letter except that ____.
A. she wanted to know the exact location of the hotel
B. she would attend a family party with her husband
C. she would like to book a room in the hotel
D. she wanted to find out whether the hotel would meet her needs
48. The underlined word “stumped” in the second paragraph is the closest in meaning to ____.
A. interested B. puzzled
C. shocked D. disappointed
49. By writing “a great number of people take their lunches and make a day of it”, the hotel owner means that ____.
A. it is a long way from the hotel to the church
B. the church has never served lunch at noon before
C. the church is very popular with local people
D. people like to share their lunches in the church
50. What is the writer’s purpose in writing the text?
A. To persuade people not to use old-fashioned terms.
B. To tell a funny story about an old-fashioned lady.
C. To introduce two different meanings of “B.C.”.
D. To criticize the old-fashioned lady’s foolish
behavior.
C
难度：★★★
Muntazer al-Zaidi threw a shoe. Or rather, he threw two. Both were aimed at the head of George W. Bush, as he gave a press conference in Baghdad.
In fact, few people in the West don’t care about the matters of feet. In much of South East Asia, it’s consi-
dered rude to cross your legs while sitting down. In north India, my friend Hamish was once nearly hit by some Indians for pointing his feet at a local person.
As you may already know from that tiresome bank advertisement, it’s very easy to cause foreign offence（冒犯）. In Japan it’s rude to blow your nose and, as in China, rude to leave your chopsticks standing up in a bowl of rice. In the Philippines, you can be arrested（逮捕） for calling somebody by bending your finger, because this suggests that he or she is a dog. In much of southern Europe and North Africa, the “thumbs up” sign doesn’t mean “yes” or “very good”, but in fact means “sit on this”. In Turkey, the “OK” circle sign refers to be the bit they’d sit down with. Almost everywhere else in the world, it is deeply rude to point. In India, you are expected to point with your chin （下巴）.
If you are going to insult（侮辱） somebody from another culture, it really pays to know what you are doing. You can go a long way with hand gestures. The extended middle finger is fairly widely understood, but the same cannot be said for our beloved British V-sign, which even Americans might think of Winston Churchill, or hippies.
51. From the underlined sentence, we can know that ____.
A. most of the Western people pay attention to the
matters of feet
B. only few Western people think the problems with feet important
C. there is something wrong with the Western people’s feet
D. the Western people think comfortable shoes are
important for feet
52. The writer’s friend was nearly hit by some Indians
because ____.
A. he crossed his legs while sitting down
B. he threw his shoes everywhere
C. he pointed his feet at an Indian
D. he showed great anger to the local people
53. In Japan, it is not polite to ____.
A. bow to strangers in a formal ceremony
B. blow your nose when you meet others
C. bend your fingers in the street
D. speak to others in a low voice
54. When eating rice in China, you should never ____.
A. use chopsticks because they are too long
B. eat with your mouth full because it’s rude
C. eat a full bowl of rice up because it’s too much
D. leave your chopsticks standing up in the bowl
55. Which of the following is TRUE according to the
passage?
A. Most of Philippines don’t like dogs and cats.
B. It means “Yes” in Turkey when people show the “OK” circle sign.
C. It’s considered rude to point Indians with your
chin.
D. The “thumbs up” sign means “sit on this” in North Africa.
第二节 信息匹配（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）
以下是一些为孩子准备的生日礼物的简介：
A. Computers for Children
There are some cheap learning computers for children under twelve. By getting this for your child you’re not only helping their learning skills get stronger but also giving them a responsibility by letting them have their own computer.
B. Electric Riders
Electric Riders are very popular. There are several models to choose from and most stores usually have them in stock.
C. A Pig House
Every child loves the idea of having their own space to store their money. So a pig house would be a perfect way to show them that you care about their independence. Children can put their pocket money or their small favorite things into it.
D. A Bedroom Set
A themed bedroom set for children under twelve can prove to be highly rewarding. It can hold small things in a child’s bedroom, such as toys, pencils and other things that your child put on his/ her bed or desk.
E. A Camping Set
A new camping set equipped with a large room tent and sleeping bag would be not only a wonderful gift for your child but for all of his/her friends as well.
F. A Puppy
Most children will respond well to the idea of taking care of small pets. A puppy can be a great investment （投资）that will show your child that you have faith (信心) in her/his ability to be responsible.
以下是一些即将过生日的孩子的信息，请根据这些信息匹配他/她想得到的生日礼物：
56. Mike will be six years old next week. His parents decided to buy him a small animal as his birthday gift because he loves small animals very much. And he promised to take good care of it.
57. Jane will be eleven years old next month and she is now in Grade 5. When her parents asked what birthday gift she wanted, she said she would like a gift which could help her to improve her learning skills and responsibility.
58. John is an eleven-year-old naughty boy. He can’t tidy his own bedroom well. He often puts his own things such as toys, his school things and clothes on his bed or desk. With his twelfth birthday coming near, his parents want to give him a gift in which all these things can be stored.
59. Mary has many relatives and she usually gets a lot of pocket money from her grandparents, uncles, aunts and her parents. In order to show her independence, she keeps her pocket money herself. She asked her mother to buy her a birthday gift in which she can store her money.
60. Tony will be twelve in ten days. On his birthday, he will go camping with some of his friends in the mountains. But now he has no tent and he is worried.
Ⅳ. 写作 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 基础写作（共1小题；满分15分）
在日常生活中，我们同他人交流和沟通的方式有很多种，除了通过语言和书信我们还可以同时用肢体语言来表达我们的思想和想法以及与他人交流。
【写作内容】
1. 我们会用点头，摇头，竖起大拇指等肢体语言来表达我们想说的内容；
2. 请结合你所知道的及生活中的实例，谈一谈你对肢体语言的认识与看法。
【写作要求】
必须使用5个句子介绍所给出的全部内容。
【评分标准】
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
第二节 选做题一：读写任务 （共1小题；满分25分）
阅读下面的短文，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。
One day an old man approached the building of the Chinese Football Association. He told the guard, “I would like to meet with Xie Yalong.” The guard looked at the man and said, “Sir, Mr. Xie is not the president and no longer works here.” The old man said, “Okay”, and walked away.
The following day, the same old man approached the building and said to the same guard, “I would like to meet with Xie Yalong.” The guard again told the man, “Sir, as I said yesterday, Mr. Xie is not the president and no longer works here.” The man thanked him and walked away.
The third day, the same old man approached the building and spoke to the very same guard, saying, “I would like to meet with Xie Yalong.” The guard looked at the man and said, “Sir, this is the third day that you have been here asking to speak to Mr. Xie. I’ve told you already that Mr. Xie is not the president and no longer works here. Don’t you understand?” The old man looked at the guard and said, “Oh, I understand. I just love hearing it.” The guard nodded and said, “See you tomorrow, Sir.”
[写作内容]
假设上文是某笑话网站上的一篇文章。请根据其内容，写一篇英语短文向你校英文校刊投稿，稿件要求如下：
1 以约30个词概括短文的要点。
2 然后以约120个词写一篇短文，包括如下要点：
1) 以你所了解的背景知识，说明幽默对人们生活的影响；
2) 你的感想。
参考词汇：tension 紧张
[写作要求]
可以使用实例或其他论述方法支持你的论点，也可以参照阅读材料的内容，但不得直接引用原文中的句子；
参考答案及解析
21. B。由下文可知这个老人很贫穷。
22. A。由下文可知老人的家又乱又脏。
23. C。由“clean your house, wash your clothes, and make your bed”可知，通过打扫房子、洗衣服及整理床被可以让老人感觉更好一些。
24. B。由下文“When I cleaned his house”可知，老人同意了作者的建议。
25. D。由下文“Only God knows how many years had passed since he last lit it”及作者和老人的对话可知，灯很久没有用过了，布满了灰尘。
26. C。由下文“No. No one comes to see me”及“Whom would I light it for?”可知，作者问的是“难道你从来没有使用过它吗？”
27. D。根据作者和老人的对话可知，老人说的是：没有人来看我，我没必要点灯。
28. A。作者问老人：“如果我的姐妹们来看你，你愿意把灯点亮吗？”
29. B。姐妹们每天晚上都来看望老人，与老人聊天，擦拭那盏灯，并点亮它。上文“Would you light it ...”也有暗示。
30. C。作者为老人点燃了生命中的明灯，老人当然觉得这是弥足珍贵的。下文“However, something small but kind may change a person’s life.”也有暗示。
31. the。考查冠词。college是第二次出现，为特指，故使用定冠词。
32. and。考查连词。根据空格前后的逻辑关系可知，本空应填入并列连词and。
33. one。考查代词。根据句意“我做题做得又快又轻松直到最后一道题才难住了我”可知，此处应填入不定代词one，指代question。
34. who。考查关系代词。分析句子结构可知，本句是非限制性定语从句，由先行词是woman和从句缺少主语可知，此处应使用关系代词who。
35. it。考查代词。本句缺少主语，根据句意应为指代上文中的the last (one)，所以使用指示代词it。
36. cleaning。考查现在分词作宾语补足语。根据空格前面的动词noticed及句意可知作者注意到的妇女打扫卫生是一个动作片段而不是整个过程，排除使用notice sb. do sth.，故此处应使用现在分词形式。notice sb. doing sth.注意到某人正在做某事。
37. Leaving. 考查现在分词作伴随状语。本句已有谓语动词，且主语和动词leave之间存在着主动关系，故此处应使用现在分词形式。
38. if/whether。考查宾语从句引导词。分析句子结构可知“ 38 the last question would count toward our quiz grade.”，同学问最后一题是否计入总分，本空应填入if/whether引导宾语从句。
39. In。考查介词。由句意“在你们的职业生涯里你们会遇到很多人”可知，本空应填入介词In。
40. importance。考查词性变化。由空格前面的of可知，本空应使用名词importance, of importance意为important。
41. B。推理判断题。根据文章最后一段中的“Looking back, I think that was when the teacher in me started to emerge.”和“But because of this lady’s encouragement, I learned I belonged to the classroom, the front of it.”可知作者深受这位英语老师的影响，发现自己也是属于讲台的。
42. D。词义猜测题。因为英语老师Mrs. Pincus要生孩子了，所以班里来了一位代课老师“a substitute teacher”。
43. C。细节理解题。从文章第一段中的叙述得知Mrs. Pincus经常对学生们嘘寒问暖，呵护备至，而对我的关心更是有过之而无不及。
44. C。推理判断题。根据文章第四段中的“Later, the substitute told Mrs. Pincus about the skinny boy who taught the lesson.”可知，作者当时很瘦。
45. A。作者意图题。作者在Mrs. Pincus退休的时候写下了这篇文章，回忆了当年发生的故事。正是Mrs. Pincus的关怀和鼓励改变了作者，因此撰此文纪念老师，感谢老师。
46. D。推理判断题。这位守旧的女士在各个方面都很精细、雅致，尤其是在语言上，所以她在写信表达“卫生间”时几经斟酌，最后用“B.C.”来代替，其目的是不想太直接，她认为这样才更为妥当。
47. A。细节理解题。根据文章第一段内容可知，这位女士和她丈夫打算参加一个家庭聚会，想在旅馆预定一个房间，同时想了解一下旅馆设施，并通过写信把这些信息告知旅馆负责人。
48. B。词义猜测题。这位旅馆负责人不懂得老式术语，不明白这位女士的意思，所以“B.C.”这个字眼把他给“难住”了。
49. C。句意理解题。旅馆负责人误以为这位女士说的是“the Baptist Church”，此处他写信向女士讲述教堂每天人很多，而且人们通常一呆就是一天，由此可知the Baptist Church很受当地人的欢迎。
50. B。作者意图题。本文讲述了一个守旧的女士因为使用老式语言引出的一个笑话，其目的就是博得读者一笑，没有什么其他含义。
51. A。句意理解题。该句的大意为：事实上，很少有西方人不关心有关脚的问题。由此可以推出答案。
52. C。细节理解题。根据文章第二段中的“In north India, my friend Hamish was once nearly hit by some Indians for pointing his feet at a local person.”可知答案。
53. B。细节理解题。根据文章第三段中的“In Japan it’s rude to blow your nose and…”可知答案为B。A项和D项本文中并没有提到；而C项的做法在菲律宾被认为是不礼貌行为。
54. D。细节理解题。根据文章第三段的“... as in China, rude to leave your chopsticks standing up in a bowl of rice.”可知答案。
55. D。细节理解题。A项内容文中并没有提及；根据“In Turkey, the “OK” circle sign refers to be the bit they’d sit down with.”可知B项错误；根据“In India, you are expected to point with your chin.”可知C项错误；根据“In much of southern Europe and North Africa, the “thumbs up” sign doesn’t mean “yes” or “very good”, but in fact means “sit on this”.”可知D项正确。
56. F。Mike非常喜欢小动物，并且承诺会好好照顾小动物。所以F项A Puppy是最适合他的生日礼物。
57. A。Jane想要得到一个能改善她学习技巧，并且能增强责任感的生日礼物。根据A项中的叙述“... not only helping their learning skills get stronger but also giving them a responsibility by letting them have their own computer.”可知A项的礼物最适合Jane。
58. D。John是一个淘气的孩子，他不会整理房间，经常乱放东西。所以D项的礼物A Bedroom Set很适合John。
59. C。Mary平时会收到很多亲戚给的零花钱。为了显示她的独立自主，她自己来保管这些钱。她希望妈妈可以送给她一个能储存零花钱的生日礼物。
60. E。马上就要到Tony的12岁生日了，他准备生日那天和朋友们到野外露营，但是现在他还没有帐篷，很发愁。所以E项的礼物A Camping Set很适合他。
Unit 4 听力材料及参考答案
（Text 1）
M: Let’s go for a nice long walk into the country this morning.
W: I’d love to, but I’m catching a cold.
（Text 2）
M: Have you bought your books yet?
W: I got my English book, but the maths and history books were sold out. We don’t have a book for our music course.
（Text 3）
W: You won’t be able to get to the airport in time to catch that plane at six o’clock.
M: I have realized that now. I’ll have to get my ticket changed.
（Text 4）
M: I think we should replace that old typewriter.
W: Why not the typist?
（Text 5）
M: I’ll go to Beijing to visit my uncle during the summer vacation. What about you?
W: I’ll spend some time in the library reading some novels and see some of my friends.
（Text 6）
W: You hit my car!
M: I’m not responsible! You stopped too suddenly!
W: I didn’t stop too suddenly! You were following me too closely!
M: If you hadn’t hit the brake so hard, none of this would have happened.
W: A small child ran in front of my car! I had to stop suddenly. Anyway, the law states that if you hit a car from behind, you are responsible, no matter how quickly the car in front stops.
M: I’m not paying for any damage.
W: We’ll see about that when the police get here.
M: The police? No! If I get one more ticket, I’ll lose my driver’s licence!
W: Well, that’s too bad. Maybe this will teach you not to follow so closely!
（Text 7）
M: Where to go?
W: The Pacific Hotel on Granville Street.
M: Have you just arrived in Canada?
W: No, I’ve been here since last September.
M: I guess you’re a student.
W: Actually, I’m from China, and I’m on an educational tour.
M: I see. By the way, when will you head for home?
W: At the end of August. And what about you? Have you been driving a taxi very long?
M: Only a couple of hours!
W: Do you mean you’re just learning how to do this?
M: Just a joke! This is a second job. I do this on weekends to earn a little money. We call it moonlighting.
W: Moonlighting? I do this in China too.
(After a few minutes)
M: Here you are. The Pacific Hotel. The meter says $17.25.
W: Here you are. Keep the change.
（Text 8）
W: Good evening, sir. I’m the Assistant Manager.
M: Good evening.
W: I’m afraid we’ve had a complaint from your neighbour about the noise. He’s trying to get some sleep as he will have an early start tomorrow. I’m sure you understand.
M: Oh, I see.
W: Do you think it might be possible to ask your friends to be a little quieter? We do like to give our guests a chance of getting a good night’s sleep. It is well after eleven.
M: Oh, I’m so sorry. I do apologize. I suppose we were talking rather loudly. It’s just that we’ve reached an important agreement. We were having a bit of a celebration.
W: I’m pleased to hear it. Shall I ask Room Service to bring you some coffee?
M: No, that won’t be necessary. We were just about to pack up anyway.
W: Thank you, sir, and good night to you.
（Text 9）
W: How come David is always so full of energy?
M: He has a strange but highly effective way of sleeping.
W: What is that?
M: He takes a short sleep for an hour every six hours and has a total of four hours of sleep each day.
W: Where did he get that strange idea?
M: He read from a book which said that it was the best way for human beings to and he believed it.
W: How many hours do you sleep a day?
M: I need at least seven hours. I once tried to follow David’s example but it never worked out for me.
W: If I sleep during the day, I can never wake up.
M: Not every one is David, I guess.
（Text 10）
There were three professors at the railway station. They were deep in conversation. The train had just moved, but they did not notice it. Then the guard shouted, “Take your seats, please!”
The professors heard the guard and rushed for the train. Two of them got on the train before it moved. The third one was left behind. It was Professor Egghead. He looked sad.
One of the professor’s students was at the station. He tried to comfort the professor. “It wasn’t bad, sir,” said the student, “two out of three caught the train. That’s quite good, you know.” “I know,” the professor said, “but it was my train. My friends only came to say goodbye.”
参考答案：
1-5 BBACC 6-10 BCCBA
11-15 BCAAB 16-20 ACABC
21-25 AACAB 26-30 BDCBA
31-35 ABDDB 36-40 ACDCA
41-45 CADBA 46-50 ACCDC
51-55 ADBCB 56-59 BCDA
60-65 FTFTFF 66. similar
67. local 68. strangers
69. comedy 70. gesture
71. actions 72. adults
73. agreement 74. cheeks
75. learned 76. yawning
77. was punished 78. express
79. nodded 80. approaching
81. represented 82. introduce
83. avoid 84. misunderstands
85. touch 86. approach
87. cheek 88. chest
89. touch 90. general
91. misunderstanding 92. represents
93. action 94. express
95. agreement
96. A good student should always be curious to learn.
97. Lu Xun is one of the major writers in China.
98. The boy told the doctor that he had a pain in his chest by using a gesture.
99. a. It is likely that she will succeed.
b. She is likely to succeed.
100. In general, he can express himself in spoken English.
One possible version:
　 The first picture is a puzzled face. The boy doesn’t know why his plant died.
　　 The second one is an angry face because the woman’s car has been stolen.
　　 The third picture shows us that a teacher is disappointed when she gets the results. Many of her students failed in the exam.
　　 The fourth face is a sad one. The boy perhaps has failed in the exam or done something wrong. He feels very sorry and he is crying.
　　 The fifth picture is a happy face. He may get the first prize in the competition or succeed in the final exam. He raises his arms and expresses his happiness.
随堂演练
及时体验 巩固提升
Ⅰ.用适当的介词填空
1．We often express our meanings________the help of body language.
答案　with
2．Deaf people have to understand people's feelings________body language.
答案　through
3．I must limit my living expenses________500 dollars a month.
答案　to
4．Do you like the way________which he speaks to you?
答案　in
5．It wasn't a good thing. ________ the contrary, it was a mistake.
答案　On
6．The policeman can defend himself ________ knife attacks.
答案　against
Ⅱ.单句语法填空(不多于3个单词)
1．The________in our school want to________in computer at college.(major)
答案　majority; major
2．He is________about anything and when I'm telling him something he is always staring at me with________(curious)
答案　curious; curiosity
3. He________me yesterday and I think his________makes me upset.(avoid)
答案　avoided; avoidance
4．Can you________the________in your area？(represent)
答案　represent; representatives
5．Try to find out the exact________of the damaged ship.(local)
答案　locality
6．Did you see the man ________(shake) hands with our teacher? He is from Jordan.
答案　shaking
7．I saw several young people enter the waiting area ________(look) around curiously.
答案　looking
8．When Tony approached too close to her, she stepped back, ________(appear) surprised and put up her hands, as if in defense.
答案　appearing
9．Headmaster came into the meeting-room, ________(smile), as if he had some good news to tell us.
答案　smiling
10．The monitor came ________(dash) into the door, announcing that there was an urgent meeting for us to attend.
答案　dashing
随堂演练
及时体验 巩固提升
Ⅰ.用适当的介词或副词填空
1．I was waiting ________ my son to come home ________ school when I saw him coming out of the Internet Bar.
答案　for; from
2．Now I will introduce a new classmate ________ you.
答案　to
3．I live close ________ our school. It's only ten minutes' walk.
答案　to
4．People in Columbia like to kiss others ________ the cheeks.
答案　on
5．It's a sign of friendship to shake hands ________ people when they meet.
答案　with
6．The baby reached ________ his hand as if for something.
答案　out
7．Cultural customs ________ body languages are different from country to country.
答案　for
8．Japanese people like to bow ________ people when they meet face to face.
答案　to
9．The teacher asked the students to put ________ their hands.
答案　up
Ⅱ.翻译句子
1．我们的足球队可能要获胜。(likely)
_______________________________________________________
答案　It is likely that our football team will win. /Our football team is likely to win.
2．我将代表我们学校去参加这次会议。(represent)
_______________________________________________________
答案　I will represent our school to attend the meeting.
3．总的来说，这个女孩是个很好的学生。
_______________________________________________________
答案　In general, this girl is a very good student.
4．随着冬季的来临，天气变得越来越冷了。(approach)
_______________________________________________________
答案　As the winter approached, the weather was becoming colder and colder.
5．政府减少了国防开支。(defence)
_______________________________________________________
答案　The government has reduced its expense on defence.
英语·必修4(人教版)
单元过关检测卷(四)
A卷　基础知识检测
一、用所给单词的适当形式填空
1．Some students lose marks__________(simple) because they don't read the question properly.
答案：simply
2．She was always__________(defence) her husband in front of their daughter.
答案：defending
3．__________(speak) language as well as body gestures helps us communicate with each other better.
答案：Spoken
4．Ray, you must have ____________(understand) her! Joan would never say something like that.
答案：misunderstood
5．The hostess ________(greeting) her guests with ease.
答案：greeted
6．He is being very impatient, which you can see from his ________(face) expression.
答案：facial
7．Are the following __________(state) true or false?
答案：statements
8．He was filled with ________(angry) at the way he had been treated.
答案：anger
二、用本单元所学的单词或短语完成下面的短文
As a stranger in the city, it was 1.________(可能)that I would succeed.The 2.________(大部分)part of my time was spent looking for new jobs and seeing different managers.Each failure made me 3.________(丢脸)．I lost heart until I went shopping one day.I 4.________(快要接近) a supermarket when a storm broke out.I 5.________(冲进)the supermarket，where there were lots of people at the entrance, waiting for the rain to stop.
“Mom, let's go through the rain.” I heard a sweet voice. 6.________(出于好奇) I turned my head and found a young woman and a little girl 7.________(靠近站着)me.The mother's 8.________(面部表情)suggested that she was very sad.
“We'll be all wet if we do.”said the mother.
“When you were talking to Daddy about his cancer, you said, ‘If we can get ourselves through this, we can get through everything！’”
“You are right, dear，” the mother 9.________(点点头), and then they ran into the rain.
It was the words “If we can get ourselves through this, we can get through everything” that encouraged me a lot.I knew that it was time for me to 10.________(采取行动)now.
答案： 1.likely　2.major　3.lose face　4.was approaching
5．dashed into　6.Out of curiosity
7．standing close to　8.facial expression
9．nodded her head　10.take action
三、完成下列句子
1．________(总的来说)，her work has been good, but this essay is dreadful.
答案：In general
2．She ____________ (感觉非常安逸) during the vacation but now she has to go back to work again.
答案：felt completely at ease
3．The children in my class are ____________(彼此年龄相近)．
答案：close to each other in age
4．All our officers are trained to ____________(进行自卫) knife attacks.
答案：defend themselves against
5．I ____________ (本来打算做的), but I'm afraid I forgot.
答案：intended to do it
四、语法填空
Until recently daydreaming was viewed as a waste of time. Or it 1.________(consider) an unhealthy escape from real life and its duties. But now some people are taking a fresh look at daydreaming. Some think it may be a very 2.________(health) thing to do. Some researchers are finding that daydreaming may be important to mental health. Daydreaming, they tell us, 3.________(be) a good means of relaxation. But its benefits go 4.________this. A number of psychologists have conducted experiments and have reached some 5.________(surprise) conclusions.
Dr. Joan T. Freyberg has concluded that daydreaming contributes to intellectual growth. It 6.________improves 7.________(concentrate)，attention span, and the ability to get along with others. Industrialist Henry J. Kaiser believed that much of his success was due to the positive use of daydreaming. Florence Nightingale dreamed of becoming a nurse. The young Thomas Edison pictured 8.________as an inventor. For these notable achievers, it appears 9.________their daydreams came true. Dr. Harry Emerson Fosdick offered this advice：hold a picture of yourself in your mind's eye, and you will be drawn toward it. Picture yourself 10.________as defeated and that alone will make victory impossible.
答案：1．was considered　2.healthy　3.is　4.beyond
5．surprising　6.also　7.concentration　8.himself
9．that　10.vividly

B卷　综合检测
(测试时间：120分钟，评价分值：135分)
第一部分　语言知识及应用(共两节，满分45分)
第一节：完形填空(共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分)
阅读下面的短文，掌握其大意，从各题所给的四个选项中选出最佳选项。
Push!
At midnight Peter was awakened by heavy knocks on the door.He rolled over and look to his　1　， and it was half past one.“I'm not getting　2　at this time，” he　3　to himself, and rolled over.
Then, a　4　knock followed.“Aren't you going to　5　it？” said his wife.
So he dragged himself out of bed and went downstairs.He opened the door and there was a man　6　at the door.It didn't take long to　7　the man was drunk.
“Hi, there，”slurred(嘟囔) the stranger, “Can you give me a push？”
“No, get lost.It's half past one.I was in bed ，”Peter said and slammed the door.He went back up to bed and told his wife what had happened.
She said, “That wasn't very　8　of you.Remember that night we had a　9　in the pouring rain on the way to pick the kids up and you had to　10　that man's door to get our car 　11　again? What would have happened if he'd told us to get lost？”
“But the guy was　12　，” said Peter.
“It doesn't matter，”said the wife.“He needs help and it would be the Christian thing to help him.”
So Peter went out of bed again, got dressed, and went downstairs.He opened the door, and not being able to see the stranger anywhere, he shouted, “Hey, do you still want a　13　？”
And he heard a　14　，“Yeah, please.”
So, still being unable to see the stranger, he shouted, “Where are you？”
The drunk replied, “Over here, on the　15　.”
(　　)1.A.door B．clock C．wife D．window
(　　)2.A.out of bed B．out of the house C．down to work D．into trouble
(　　)3.A.complained B．explained C．replied D．thought
(　　)4.A.weaker B．louder C．longer D．angrier
(　　)5.A.stand B．stop C．answer D．refuse
答案：1～5　BADBC
(　　)6.A.standing B．lying C．knocking D．looking
(　　)7.A.remember B．show C．realize D．doubt
(　　)8.A.nice B．foolish C．typical D．generous
(　　)9.A.hard time B．quarrel C．fight D．breakdown
(　　)10.A.drive to B．pass by C．knock on D．drop into
答案：6～10ACADC
(　　)11.A.started B．refreshed C．united D．delighted
(　　)12.A.mad B．drunk C．different D．dangerous
(　　)13.A.rest B．push C．room D．lift
(　　)14.A.lady B．gentleman C．drunk D．voice
(　　)15.A.roof B．bed C．swing D．ground
　答案：11～15ABBDC
第二节：语法填空(共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面的短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空。
Language learning begins with listening.Some linguists say children are greatly different in the amount of listening 16.________they do before they start speaking, and later starters are often long listeners.Most children 17.________(obey) spoken instructions some time before they can speak, though the word “ obey” is hardly accurate 18.________a description of the eager and delighted cooperation usually shown by children.Before 19.________can speak, many children will also ask questions by gestures and by making questioning noises.
Any attempt to study the development from 20.________noises babies make to their first spoken words leads to considerable difficulties.It is agreed that they enjoy 21.________(make) noises, and that during the first few months one or two noises sort themselves as particularly expressive as delight, pain, friendliness，and so on.But since these can't be said to show the baby's 22.________(intend) to communicate, they can hardly be regarded as early forms of language.It is agreed，too，23.________from about three months they play with sounds for enjoyment, and that by six months they are able to add new words 24.________their store.This self-imitation (模仿) contributes to deliberate imitation of sounds or words spoken to them by other people.The problem then arises as to the point at which one can say that these imitations can 25.________(consider) as speech.
16．解析：引导定语从句修饰前面的listening。
答案：that
17．解析：根据句意用将来时态。
答案：will obey
18．解析：此处意为“作为”。
答案：as
19．解析：指后面的many children。
答案：they
20．解析：根据其所接的定语从句可知是特指。
答案：the
21．解析：根据前面的enjoy的用法可知。
答案：making
22．解析：名词作宾语。
答案：intention
23．解析：引导主语从句。
答案：that
24．解析：根据前面的add的用法可知。
答案：to
25．解析：由主语可知用被动语态。
答案：be considered
第二部分　阅读(共两节，满分50分)
第一节：阅读理解(共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分)
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中选出最佳选项。
A
There is one language that is used in every country in the world.The people who use it are young and old, short and tall, thin and fat.It is everybody's second language.It is easy to understand, although you can't hear it.It is sign language.
When you wave to a friend who is across the street, you are using sign language.When you smile at someone, you are saying, “I want to be friendly”， but you are not using speech.You are using sign language.When you raise your hand in class, you are saying, “Please ask me.I think I know the correct answer.”
Babies who can't talk can point at things.They are using sign language.A policeman who wants to stop traffic holds up his hands.He is using sign language.
Many years ago, a French priest, Charles Michel de Epee, became interested in education for deaf people.He invented a finger alphabet (字母表)．It is still in use.People can make the sign for letters and spell words with their hands, and deaf people can read and understand them.Soon there were schools for the deaf in many countries.The only university for the deaf is Gallaudet College in Washington, D．C.
Today, in the United States, there are special TV news programs for deaf people.The newsreader tells the news in sign language.At the same time, the words appear on the TV screen.
The actors in the Theatre of Deaf don't spell every word.Sometimes they use hand signs.When they put two hands together, it means sandwich.They can make a roof with their hands when they want to show a house.One finger in front of an actor's mouth can mean quiet.You can talk to people who are behind windows that are closed.And when you go swimming with your friends, you can have conversations under water.
How many hand signs do you use every day?
(　　)26.Which of the following about sign language is TRUE?
A．It is a special language used in a few countries in the world.
B．It is a way to express one's ideas without words.
C．It is only used by the deaf.
D．It can be heard.
解析：由第一段可知A、C、D三项错误。
答案：B
(　　)27.If you want to express the idea that “I am very friendly” to someone, you will________．
A．raise your hand B．put one hand onto the other
C．smile to the person D．make a roof with your hands
解析：细节题，第二段“When you smile at someone，you are saying，‘I want to be friendly’”。
答案：C
(　　)28.Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage?
A．Hand signs instead of finger signs are used everyday.
B．There are schools, colleges and universities for the deaf in the USA.
C．The French priest Charles invented sign language.
D．Even babies are using sign language.
解析：根据全文，排除A、B、C三项，D项在第三段的第一、二句可得知。
答案：D
(　　)29.What does the underlined word “roof” mean?
A．An article in a house. B．A room in a house.
C．The top of a house. D．A window of a house.
解析：失聪的人要表示房子，是双手伸开，指尖相对，呈三角状，似房子的外形。
答案：A
(　　)30.The passage is mainly about________．
A．an introduction to sign language
B．the importance of sign language
C．a famous priest in France
D．how to use sign language
解析：主旨大意题。主要介绍手语的使用。
答案：C
B
How you shake hands can show a lot about your personality.Palm-to-palm contact suggests that you are an honest person.A weak handshake shows a lack of confidence.Be careful not to shake somebody's hand too hard.This would suggest that you are really going over the top and trying to be something that you are not.
Your eyes are the windows to your soul.Avoiding eye contact while speaking to somebody can be considered very rude.Shifty (诡诈的)eyes are also considered to be a sign of dishonesty.If you are being interviewed, you need to answer questions calmly and look at the interviewer in the eyes as you speak.This does not mean that you stare or glare into the eyes of other persons, which can make them feel extremely uncomfortable.
A good posture is a sign of a confident person.When reading people by body language, always pay attention to their postures.If you are sitting at the table and having a conversation, you can lean forward to listen.If you are standing, make sure you stand erectly to look confident.
How you place your arms can say a lot about the thoughts that are running in your mind.Putting the arms across the chest makes the other person feel that you are creating a kind of barrier(障碍)between the person and you.Therefore, in professional meetings or discussions, let your arms rest at your side or hold an object.
Reading people by body language can be fun and interesting if you manage to learn the ropes well.Use these methods to get more success in your professional and personal affairs.
(　　)31.According to Paragraph 1, a weak handshake shows that the person________．
A．is very honest B．is very careless
C．lacks self-confidence D．wants to make a good impression
(　　)32.From Paragraph 2, we can learn the writer would probably agree that________．
a．eye contact is very important in a conversation
b．shifty eyes should be avoided in a conversation
c．staring into one's eyes in a conversation makes him or her comfortable
d．eye contact should be avoided to keep calm during an interview
A．abcd B．abd C．cd D．ab
(　　)33.What does the underlined word “erectly” in Paragraph 3 mean?
A．Straight. B．Forward. C．Backward D．Casually
(　　)34.What is Paragraph 4 mainly about?
A．How to hide the thoughts that are running in your mind.
B．How to avoid creating a barrier in a conversation
C．How to behave well in an international meeting.
D．How to place your arms in a conversation.
(　　)35.What is the writer's purpose in writing the passage?
A．To prove that good handshakes are very important.
B．To tell us how to read people by body language.
C．To advise us to avoid eye contact while speaking.
D．To tell us how to make fun and interesting body language.
答案：31～35　CDADBC
C
Facial expressions carry meaning that is determined by situations and relationships.For example，in American culture the smile is in general an expression of pleasure.Yet it also has other uses.A woman's smile at a police officer does not carry the same meaning as the smile she gives to a young child.A smile may show love or politeness.It can also hide true feelings.It often causes confusion (困惑) across cultures.For example，many people in Russia consider smiling at strangers in public to be unusual and even improper.Yet many Americans smile freely at strangers in public places (although this is less common in big cities)．Some Russians believe that Americans smile in the wrong places; some Americans believe that Russians don't smile enough.In Southeast Asian cultures，a smile is frequently used to cover painful feelings.Vietnamese people may tell a sad story but end the story with a smile.
Our faces show emotions (情感)，but we should not attempt to “read” people from another culture as we would “read” someone from our own culture.The fact that members of one culture do not express their emotions as openly as do members of another does not mean that they do not experience emotions.Rather，there are cultural differences in the amount of facial expressiveness permitted.For example，in public and in formal situations many Japanese do not show their emotions as freely as Americans do.When with friends，Japanese and Americans seem to show their emotions similarly.
It is difficult to generalize about Americans and facial expressiveness because of personal and cultural backgrounds in the United States.People from certain cultural backgrounds in the United States seem to be more facially expressive than others.The key is to try not to judge people whose ways of showing emotion are different.If we judge according to our own cultural habits，we may make the mistake of “reading” the other person incorrectly.
语篇解读：本文是一篇议论文。文章阐述了面部表情取决于情景和人们之间的关系。文章通篇阐述了面部表情的种种表现形式，以及文化之间的差异导致的面部表情的不同含义。
36．What does the smile usually mean in the U．S.?
A．Love. B．Politeness. C．Joy. D．Thankfulness.
解析：根据文章第一段中的“in American culture (文化) the smile is in general an expression of pleasure”可知，在美国文化中，一般地说，微笑是快乐的表情。此处joy是pleasure的同义词。故选C。
答案：C
37．What does the word “It” underlined in Paragraph 1 refer to?
A．Smile. B．Love. C．Politeness. D．Facial expressions.
解析：根据语意可知“It”代指smile。
答案：A
38．The author mentions the smile of the Vietnamese to prove that smile can________．
A．show friendliness to strangers
B．be used to hide true feelings
C．be used in the wrong places
D．show personal habits
解析：根据文章第一段中的“It can also hide true feelings.It often causes confusion (困惑) across cultures.”可知这是一个中心句，其后用例证法阐述：微笑能隐藏真正的感情。它常常导致跨文化间的困惑。其中越南人讲故事的例子就是为了说明这一观点。故选B。
答案：B
39．What should we do before attempting to “read” people?
A．Learn about their relations with others.
B．Understand their cultural backgrounds.
C．Find out about their past experience.
D．Figure out what they will do next.
解析：根据文章最后一段中的“The key is to try not to judge people whose ways of showing emotion are different.If we judge according to our own cultural habits，we may make the mistake of ”reading“ the other person incorrectly.”可知，我们在“读”人们的表情的时候，要先理解他们的文化背景，否则就会出错。
答案：B
40．What would be the best title for the test?
A．Cultural Differences B．Smiles and Relationship
C．Facial Expressiveness D．Habits and Emotions
解析：文章通篇阐述了面部表情的种种表现形式，以及文化之间的差异导致的面部表情的不同含义。所以C正确。
答案：C
D
Body language is a nonverbal communication that becomes a key in understanding children's feelings and thoughts.The following are the basic components of body language of children：
Face－Shortly after birth, a baby shows facial expression reflecting inner-most(内心深处的)feelings.At the age of three，a child has different inner-most emotional expressions.
Posture－Once toddlers(学步的儿童)begin to move, they show a variety of body postures.For example，when they move slowly and hunch their shoulders (耸肩) , it means they are sad.
Hands and fingers－If your children close their hands and clench them tight，they are certainly upset and angry.However，if their fingers open and their arms hang beside their body, it means that they are relaxed.
Foot－If your children move their foot forward and backward，it indicates that they are thinking about something or they may feel guilty about what they have said，or they are frightened.
Distance－When a child is in a bad mood, he creates a distance between you and him by sitting in the opposite corner of the room.Otherwise, he wants to hug you when he is frightened.
It is better for you to understand some facts about body language in order to build a better relationship between you and your child.The following points are some facts about body language：
Body language is more often used than spoken language.The results of a study showed that less than 10% of emotion was expressed in words，but more than 90% was expressed in body language.Words are more often used by children to communicate the facts, while body language is used to communicate emotions.
Body language is less controllable than spoken language.Smile, body postures, the movement of hands and feet, eye contact, and other gestures are done unconsciously.
When you are trying to understand a child's body language, do not forget that body language is not an exact science.Your understanding is not always right.Increasing your experience by paying careful attention to children in every situation is the best way to improve your ability to read a child's body language.
(　　)41.Which of the following actions shows that a child may be thinking about something?
A．Opening the fingers.
B．Closing the hands tight.
C．Sitting in the opposite corner of the room.
D．Moving the foot forward and backward.
(　　)42.From the passage we know that________．
A．a child starts to use facial expression to express feelings at the age of three
B．when a child moves slowly and hunches his shoulders，he may be not happy
C．a child starts to use body posture shortly after birth
D．a child may hug you when he feels guilty
(　　)43.What can we learn from the passage?
A．Body language is used less than spoken language.
B．Body language is used more to communicate facts.
C．Body language is more controllable than spoken language.
D．We may make mistakes in understanding a child's body language.
(　　)44.What's the author's purpose in writing this passage?
A．To tell parents how to understand children's body language better.
B．To show the importance of body language in daily life.
C．To explain different kinds of body language.
D．To help us learn foreign culture better.
(　　)45.In which part of a website will we most probably read this passage?
A．Staying healthy. B．Business life.
C．Child development. D．Travel guide.
答案：41～45　DBDAC
第二节：信息匹配(共5题；每小题2分，满分10分)
阅读下列相关信息，并按照要求匹配信息。
首先，请阅读下面材料：
A．Taking care of yourself is not being selfish.By caring enough to treat your body well，you will be in better shape to take care of those around you.No one can take care of your health except yourself.
B．Believe in yourself and your ability.Have a “can-do” attitude.Make a list of successful changes that you have made in the past.It is easier to achieve a goal when you are optimistic.Using humour and laugh off occasional lapses(过失)．Have confidence that you can get back on track with your healthy routine.
C．Seek out a friend or co-worker who will make you feel comfortable.You will find out making friends is a happy thing in the world.Regular phone calls，emails or visits over coffee could help you keep a good contact with them.Perhaps your cheerleader could become your exercise buddy(密友)．
D．Reward yourself as you make simple changes that in the end will result in achieving your overall goal.Celebration is part of successful change.Create a list of incentives (动机) that will keep you motivated.
E．Adopt eating and physical activity habits that can become part of your lifestyle.Have a backup plan for those days when your plans to eat well and be active are challenged.If you can't walk due to the weather，have an exercise video to use.If you have no time to pack a healthy lunch，choose a small fast food sandwich and side salad.
F．Go on a trip.Work and family are two most important things in people's lives.People try to tackle the two things at once，but most of them fail.Just as an old saying goes：People who know how to rest know how to work.Go out with your family and have a good time.
请阅读以下个人信息，然后匹配信息。
(　　)46.Tommy，a computer engineer，doesn't believe his working ability.Though he works hard，he never gets praise from his boss.
(　　)47.Jack dislikes going home after a full day's work.He says that it makes him feel lonely.
(　　)48.Linda，a housewife，spends most of her time cooking and looking after babies.She is worn out now.
(　　)49.Bob，a businessman，doesn't care much about his success and has lost his struggling motivation (动力)．
(　　)50.Cathy worked continuously for two weeks without rest.Now she is worried about her family，especially her five-year-old daughter.
答案：46～50　BCADF
第三部分　写作(共两节，满分40分)
第一节：基础写作(共1小题，满分15分)
写作内容：
请根据以下信息，写一篇关于王石的英文简介。
以下是关于目前中国登顶珠穆朗玛峰(Mount Everest)最年长纪录创造者王石的个人简历：
籍贯：广西柳州市
生日：1951年1月
职业：商人，探险运动家
个人爱好：登山、航海
登山经历：1999年5月，登顶高6 178米的玉珠峰；
2000年至2003年每年均登珠穆朗玛峰数次；
2010年5月22日，成功登顶珠穆朗玛峰南坡(the southern slope)。
写作要求：
只能使用五个句子表达全部内容。
评分标准：
句子结构准确，信息内容完整。篇章结构连贯。
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
答案：One possible version：
Wang Shi was born in Liuzhou，Guangxi in January 1951.As a businessman and an adventure athlete，Wang likes climbing and sailing.In May 1999，Wang reached the top of Yuzhu of Mount Everest，which is 6，178 meters high.Between 2000 and 2003，he climbed Mount Everest several times each year.Furthermore，Wang reached the southern slope of Mount Everest successfully on May 22，2010.
第二节：读写任务(共1小题，满分25分)
You're getting a hidden peek , a peek world of what's really going on.When you can read body language, every moment spent with others can be valuable and, if you are in business profitable.Body language is crucial, and the messages and secrets hidden behind can be unveiled through reading body gestures.
Reading body gestures can convey more messages and secrets than people realize.Paul Ekman, a psychologist in the study of emotion has devoted a lot to this area.His team asked volunteers to make faces corresponding to a particular emotion and filmed the result.As a result, he found that there were actually seven universal expressions of emotions on the face：happiness, sadness, anger, fear, surprise, contempt and disgust.He developed an entire system of looking at the muscles of the face.The influence of Ekman's facial expression research can be seen today.Facial recognition systems help consumer research get access to the inner world of customers: how they react to different foods and advertisements.Today these systems are even being installed in airports to refine security checks.
写作内容：
1．以约30词概括这段短文的内容。
2．然后以120词讲述一次你(或你的朋友)使用身势语的经历，内容包括：
(1)时间、地点和起因。
(2)身势语的重要性。
(3)你认为怎样才能更好地掌握身势语。
写作要求：
作文中可使用自己的亲身经历或虚构的故事，也可以参照阅读材料的内容，但不得直接引用原文中的句子。
评分标准：
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，语句连贯。
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
答案：One possible version：
Paul Ekman did a research on the facial expressions with his team，which had a great influence.Reading the facial expressions，we can know a lot of information hidden behind.
In fact，in real life，everyone would have an experience of using body language.I remember yesterday，I came across a foreigner who got lost in the bookstore near my school.
Due to my poor oral English，I couldn't make myself understood at first.However，with great efforts，I successfully helped him find his way with a lot of gestures. There is no doubt that in intercultural communication and understanding the different cultural implication of Chinese and English，body language can promote people's cross-cultural communication competence.
Besides，it reinforces the heart-to-heart understanding.And it is helpful for people to diminish or avoid misunderstandings caused by the cultural differences of body language. Here are some effective ways to master body language to start with，what we should do is remember how people from different cultures act and to keep an understanding and tolerant attitude towards the differences.What's more，we are supposed to do our utmost to read as many books as possible.
Unit 4 Body language
第一部分：听力（共两节，满分30分）
第一节（共5小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分）
请听下面5段对话，选出最佳选项。
1. What will the woman probably do?
A. Take a long walk. B. Take a good rest. C. Go to the country.
2. What book has the woman bought?
A. A music book. B. An English book. C. A history book.
3. What is the man going to do?
A. Take another flight. B. Give the ticket to someone else.
C. Catch the plane at 6:00.
4. What does the woman mean?
A. They should buy a new typewriter.
B. They should find a new place for the typewriter.
C. They should find a better typist.
5. What are the two speakers talking about?
A. The study plan. B. The school plan. C. The vacation plan.
第二节（共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
请听下面5段对话或独白，选出最佳选项。
请听第6段材料，回答第6、7题。
6. Why did the woman stop her car suddenly?
A. The man’s car hit her car. B. A small child ran in front of her car.
C. The traffic lights turned red.
7. What would happen if the man got another ticket?
A. He would pay a lot of money for the damage.
B. He would lose his job.
C. He would lose his driver’s license.
请听第7段材料，回答第8至10题。
8. When did the woman get to Canada?
A. Several days ago. B. Last month. C. Last September.
9. What’s the meaning of moonlighting?
A. A kind of lamp. B. A second job. C. A kind of toy.
10. How much does it cost the woman to get to the Pacific Hotel?
A. $17.25. B. $70.25. C. $71.52.
请听第8段材料，回答第11至14题。
11. What do we know about the man’s neighbour?
A. He’s sleeping now.
B. He will have to get up early tomorrow.
C. He’s making noise.
12. What were the man and his friends doing?
A. They were having a rest. B. They were having a birthday party.
C. They were having a celebration.
13. What were the man and his friends about to do?
A. End their activity. B. Leave where they were.
C. Apologize to their neighbour.
14. Where does the conversation probably take place?
A. In a hotel. B. At home. C. In the manager’s office.
请听第9段材料，回答第15至17题。
15. How does the man feel about David’s way of sleeping?
A. It’s harmful. B. It’s strange. C. It’s the best.
16. How many hours does David sleep a day?
A. Four. B. Six. C. Seven.
17. What does the man mean at the end of the conversation?
A. People should develop a habit like David’s.
B. People need longer hours of sleep.
C. People have different sleeping habits.
请听第10段材料，回答第18至20题。
18. What were the professors doing?
A. They were talking. B. They were reading. C. They were sleeping.
19. Why did the other two professors come to the railway station?
A. To catch the train.
B. To say goodbye to Professor Egghead.
C. To meet Professor Egghead.
20. What do we learn about these professors?
A. They are serious. B. They are helpful.
C. They are absent-minded.
第二部分：英语知识运用（共两节，满分45分）
第一节：语法和词汇知识（共15小题；每小题1分, 满分15分）
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
21. If you are ______ about Brazil, you may read this book.
A. curious B. upset C. strange D. interested
22. It is very ______ that she will ring me tonight.
A. likely B. possibly C. probably D. perhaps
23. Your experiences are ______ to ours, but your end result is entirely different.
A. same B. different C. similar D. equal
24. As a student, you should try to ______ being late for your class.
A. avoid B. refuse C. prevent D. punish
25. Though she has been in England for half a year, she is still unable to _____ in simple English.
A. explain herself B. express herself
C. speak her mind D. make herself understand
26. —What do you mean by saying that?
—I think you _______ what I said. I meant no harm.
A. understood B. misunderstood
C. heard D. followed
27. —_______ for snakes while hiking in the woods.
—I’ll dress appropriately to protect myself.
A. Walk out B. Go out C. Set out D. Watch out
28. At this time tomorrow, we _______ across the big desert ahead.
A. are to drive B. are going to drive
C. will be driving D. will drive
29. “It’s raining too heavily at this moment,” said the old woman, ________ out of the window.
A. to look B. looking C. having looked D. looked
30. _______, a learned man makes fewer mistakes in life than a man without knowledge.
A. In general B. As general C. On general D. At general
31. —I don’t like this kind of music.
—_______. It’s too noisy.
A. Nor do I B. Neither am I C. Nor I do D. Neither I am
32. How _______ I was when I heard the _______ news!
A. disappointing; disappointed B. disappointed; disappointing
C. disappointing; disappointing D. disappointed; disappointed
33. She is very hard-working, _____ he is very lazy.
A. when B. that C. which D. while
34. Before graduation, we had got a lot of practical _____ by doing a part-time job in the factory and it was really ______ for all of us.
A. experiences; great experience B. experience; great experience
C. experiences; a great experience D. experience; a great experience
35. They ______ the idea that children could learn to read as babies.
A. thought B. introduced C. invented D. discovered
第二节：完形填空（共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从36—55各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
Once upon a time, there was a large mountainside, where an eagle’s nest rested. The eagle’s nest contained four 36 eagle eggs. One day an earthquake rocked (使震动) the mountain 37 one of the eggs to roll down the mountain, 38 a chicken farm, which was in the valley below. The chickens knew that they must 39 and care for the eagle’s egg, so an old hen (母鸡) 40 to hatch (孵) and raise the large egg.
One day, the egg hatched and a beautiful eagle was born. 41 , however, the eagle was raised to be a(n) 42 . Soon, the eagle believed he was 43 more than a chicken. The eagle loved his home and family, 44 his spirit cried out for more. While playing a game on the farm one day, the eagle looked to the skies above and 45 a group of eagles soaring in the skies. “Oh,” the eagle 46 , “I wish I could soar like those birds.” The chickens shouted with 47 , “You cannot soar with those birds. You are a chicken and chickens do not soar.”
The eagle 48 staring at his real family up above, 49 that he could be with them. Each time the eagle would let his 50 be known, he was told it couldn’t be done. That is 51 the eagle learned to believe. Slowly, the eagle 52 dreaming and continued to live his life like a chicken. 53 , after a long life as a chicken, the eagle 54 .
You become what you believe you are; so if you ever dream to become an eagle, 55 your dreams, not the words of a chicken.
36. A. large B. curious C. small D. fortunate
37. A. guiding B. blowing C. causing D. inviting
38. A. on B. over C. past D. to
39. A. introduce B. punish C. protect D. share
40. A. offered B. regretted C. managed D. turned
41. A. Carefully B. Gently C. Sadly D. Luckily
42. A. chicken B. eagle C. hero D. fool
43. A. something B. everything C. anything D. nothing
44. A. and B. but C. so D. however
45. A. noticed B. recognized C. respected D. watched
46. A. cried B. smiled C. argued D. explained
47. A. excitement B. anger C. laughter D. surprise
48. A. approached B. avoided C. continued D. considered
49. A. promising B. proving C. believing D. dreaming
50. A. suggestion B. advantage C. dream D. discovery
51. A. what B. why C. how D. when
52. A. went B. enjoyed C. began D. stopped
53. A. Happily B. Finally C. Quickly D. Probably
54. A. gave up B. broke down C. passed away D. died out
55. A. steal B. follow C. have D. remember
第三部分：阅读理解（共两节；每小题2分，满分20分）
第一节：阅读下面短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
There is one language that is used in every country in the world. The people who use it are young and old, short and tall, thin and fat. It is everybody’s second language. It is easy to understand, although you can’t hear it. It is sign language.
When you wave to a friend who is across the street, you are using sign language. When you smile at someone, you are saying, “I want to be friendly”, but you are not using speech. You are using sign language. When you raise your hand in class, you are saying, “Please ask me. I think I know the correct answer.”
Babies who can’t talk can point at things. They are using sign language. A policeman who wants to stop traffic holds up his hands. He is using sign language.
Many years ago, a French priest, Charles Michel de Epee, became interested in education for deaf people. He invented a finger alphabet (字母表). It is still in use. People can make the sign for letters and spell words with their hands, and deaf people can read and understand them. Soon there were schools for the deaf in many countries. The only university for the deaf is Gallaudet College in Washington, D.C.
Today, in the United States, there are special TV news programs for deaf people. The newsreader tells the news in sign language. At the same time, the words appear on the TV screen.
The actors in the Theatre of Deaf don’t spell every word. Sometimes they use hand signs. When they put two hands together, it means sandwich. They can make a roof with their hands when they want to show a house. One finger in front of an actor’s mouth can mean quiet. You can talk to people who are behind windows that are closed. And when you go swimming with your friends, you can have conversations under water.
How many hand signs do you use every day?
56. Which of the following about sign language is TRUE?
A. It is a special language used in a few countries in the world.
B. It is a way to express one’s ideas without words.
C. It is only used by the deaf.
D. It can be heard.
57. If you want to express the idea that “I am very friendly” to someone, you will ______.
A. raise your hand B. put one hand onto the other
C. smile to the person D. make a roof with your hands
58. Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage?
A. Hand signs instead of finger signs are used everyday.
B. There are schools, colleges and universities for the deaf in the USA.
C. The French priest Charles invented sign language.
D. Even babies are using sign language.
59. The passage is mainly about ______.
A. an introduction to sign language B. the importance of sign language
C. a famous priest in France D. how to use sign language
第二节：阅读下面短文, 并根据短文内容判断正误（正确：T；错误：F）。
There are some basic things to know about kite flying that can help you to enjoy the sport more. Here are a few of the most important ones.
First, if you have ever seen someone flying a kite in a movie, you probably saw him or her get the kite off the ground by running into the wind. However, this is not the way to launch a kite. Most beginners will find a “high start” launch to be the easiest. For a high start launch, have a friend stand about one hundred feet away, facing into the wind. Your friend should face you and hold the kite gently. Place some tension(拉力) on the flying line by pulling gently on the line. With a steady breeze behind you, tug gently on the line, and the kite will rise.
If your kite begins to dive (俯冲), don’t panic or pull on the line. Dropping the reel (线轴) will cause it to spin out of control, and could cause someone to be hurt. Simply let the line go slack (松弛的). This usually will right the kite in midair.
For a kite that is pulling hard away from you, have a friend stand behind you and take up the slack line as you bring it in. Hand over hand, pull down the kite. It is very important to have gloves on to do this, or you may burn or cut your hands. It is recommended (建议) that you always wear gloves while flying kites.
When two kite lines get crossed, pulling may cause enough friction to cut one or both of the lines. Instead of pulling, both fliers should walk towards one another until their lines uncross as they pass.
60. To launch a kite, run into the wind holding the kite behind you.
61. In a high start launch, a friend stands about one hundred feet away from you holding the kite.
62. If your kite begins to dive from the sky, immediately drop the reel.
63. It is suggested that you always wear gloves when flying a kite.
64. If your kite is pulling hard away from you, you should run after it.
65. If two kite lines get crossed, you should pull them apart.
第四部分: 写作(共五节，满分55分)
第一节： 单词拼写。根据下列句子及所缺单词的首字母或汉语意思，写出单词的正确形式。（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
66. I like bread, cake, and other ______ (类似的) foods.
67. He is one of the l______ farmers, not a visitor.
68. We are s______ here. Can you direct us to the town hall?
69. The actor liked working on ______ (喜剧) because he loved to make people laugh.
70. He didn’t speak, but with a g______ he told me to follow him.
71. I can tell by his a______ that he is unhappy, though he said nothing.
72. The a______ stayed up, but the kids went to bed.
73. Their ______(同意) about the matter surprised me.
74. If I drink too much red wine, my ______(面颊) go all red.
75. The more _______ (有学问的) a man is, the more modest he usually is.
第二节：用所给动词的适当形式填空。（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
punish, approach, represent, nod, express, yawn, introduce, avoid, misunderstand, touch
76. Stop ______ and go to bed if you’re tired.
77. He ______ by his father for telling lies yesterday.
78. We can’t ______ to you how grateful we are.
79. Mr Smith ______ when he passed me in the street.
80. A strong typhoon is ______ Fujian.
81. She ______ her fellow-workers at the union meeting last time.
82. May I ______ myself? My name is Meg Johnson.
83. Children quickly learn how to ______ punishment.
84. He complains that his wife always ______ him.
85. Don’t ______ the door; the paint is wet.
第三节： 请用下列单词的适当形式填空。（有多余选项）（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）　　　　　
cheek, touch, represent, punish, action,
approach, chest, misunderstand, curious,
agreement, express, general
When you learn another language, you have to learn what people from another culture mean when they move or indicate without speaking.
Watch what people from different cultures do when they introduce themselves. Some 86 the person they are greeting and kiss them on the 87 , some kiss on both cheeks, some shake hands, some bow, some beat the 88 and some just nod as it is not their custom to 89 the other person.
In 90 , it is very important to avoid 91 each other. Learn what a yawn 92 in the culture of the people you are meeting. It is likely to be a rude 93 to some. So be very careful how you carry yourself and how you 94 yourself when in another country.
We are all in 95 about one thing: we are all anxious to communicate with other human beings. It is how we do it that differs!
第四节：根据括号内的提示翻译下列句子。（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）
96. 一个优秀的学生应该总是渴望学习。(be curious to)
97. 鲁迅是中国的大作家之一。 (major)
98. 那个男孩用手势告诉医生他胸部疼痛。(chest; gesture)
99. 她可能成功。 (likely)
100. 一般来说，他是能用英语口语表达思想的。(general; expression; spoken)
第五节：书面表达（满分15分）
请分别描述下面五幅图中每个人的表情，可适当发挥。

Unit 4 Body language
单元测试
一、基础测试　
A. 单词拼写
请根据汉语提示或首字母写出单词的正确形式
1.They made a (重大的) discovery.
2.The rose (代表) England.
3.He is a (有求知欲的) boy who is always asking questions
4.Heavy footsteps signaled the teacher’s (接近)
5.They have broken the (协议) between us
6.Don’t you know him? Let me i___________ you to him.
7. The guests e their thanks before leaving.
8. He can help you answer this difficult question because he is a very l man.
9. A speak louder than words.
10. He was p for his crime and was sentenced to death.
B. 句型转换
根据A句句义，用适当的句型或短语完成B 句,使其句义相同或相近。
11. A: I have never been abroad .He has never been abroad ,either.
B: I have never been abroad. he.
12. A: He will probably come tomorrow
B: He will be come tomorrow
13. A: I’m a good cook and she is a good cook too.
B: I am a cook she is.
14. A: We have similar opinions
B: My opinions are his
15. A: We were disappointed at what he did.
B: What he did ____________ us.
C. 完成句子
16. A student should always be (很想) learn
17. Do you think it _ (可能) rain
18. He is (与…相似) his father in appearance.
19. The stone struck________ _______ ________ _________ (我的头)
20. _______ ________ ________ ________ (并不是所有的学生) have understood the question.
二、单项填空
21. I’m afraid Jones can’t make it nine o’clock tomorrow. He _______a meeting in Queensland.
A. will have B. will be having
C. is going to have D. is to have
22. Jumping out of _________ airplane at ten thousand feet is quite _________ exciting experience.
A.不填; the B.不填; an
C. an; an D. the; the
23. When first _____ into the market, these products enjoyed great success.
A. introducing B. introduced
C. introduce D. being introduced
24. —Let me introduce myself. I’m Albert.
— ___________
A. What a pleasure!
B. It’s my pleasure.
C. I’m very pleased.
D. Pleased to meet you.
25. Neither side was willing to give in at all. As a result, no agreement ___________.
A. was reached B. has reached
C. had reached D. had been reached
26. The way ______ he did it was different from _______ we were used to.
A. in which; what B. in what; what
C. in that; what D. that; that
27. If you think about this problem _____ another way, you will be sure to find a way _____ it.
A. with; to solve B. in; of solving
C. in; in solving D. with; of solving
28. A bullet hit the solider and he was wounded in _______ leg.
A. a B. one C. the D. his
29. In writing a letter of application(求职信), keep in mind what a possible employer is most to want to know about
A. probably B. possibly
C. likely D. able
30. — I hear Professor Smith shook hands with everyone present. How lucky you are!
—But he didn’t even see me,___________ shake hands with me.
A .but B .much more than
C. as well as D .let alone
31. —I’m going to the post office.
—___________ you’re there, can you get me some stamps?
A. As B. While
C. Because D. If
32. As we often see, some people work best in tasks alone, ______ others work best in groups.
A. when B. since
C. while D. because
33. , he can’t go out for a walk as usual.
A With so much work to do
B With so much work ding
C With so work done
D With out so much work to do
34. In Athens the Chinese team got 32 gold medals, ____ second of all the competing countries.
A. having ranked?????????????B. ranked?
C. to rank????????????????? D. ranking
35. The old man came, a big dog.
A .followed
B. following by
C. followed by
D. and followed by
三、完形填空
阅读下面短文，掌握大意，然后从36-55各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳答案。
?When a child is faced with a problem, he or she may not be able to deal with it. Children need to learn??? 36? . You can help someone to learn how to solve problems. The best way is to???37?? the time to talk about problems as they appear. Of course, this is not easy to do. Problems have a? 38?? of bursting upon someone at the???39?? time. But even if the time is not the best, you should try to help.?There are many things you can do to help a child???40 ??? problem-solving skills. One good way is to find out what caused the??41 . This is a skill that children do not learn???42? help. A child may knock over his or her glass of milk at the dinner table, but he or she may not realize that the glass was too???43?? to the edge. You can show the child what the problem is. Then it can be solved.?The next step for a child is to learn how to solve the problem???44? . This step takes???45? . Some people are afraid of being wrong or that they cannot solve problems. You can help by talking about some possible???46? . The two of you can decide which answer is the best. Let the child try it???47? . Now the child will see that problem can be solved, and you can???48 him or her for choosing an answer.?Another step to problem-solving is to help children see the???49?? of cause and effect. If a child knocks over a glass, it will fall and break. He or she might???50?? to write on the wall. But the pencil always leaves a???51? . Soon the child will see the links between cause and effect, and then he or she is on the???52?? to growth. The child will see someone else knock over a glass. He or she now knows that it will break. The child may see someone writing on the wall. Now that child can??53?? how it will get there.?The ability to solve problems is not easy for children to learn. It is not easy for adults???54? . It takes patience for you, and it takes??? 55??? for the child. But problem-solving can be taught. All you need is time and effort.36. A. why?B. where ?C. what??D. how 37. A. find? ?B. take? ??C. spend? ?D. choose38. A. way ?B. sign? ??C. habit ??D. limit 39. A. exact ?B. ordinary ?C. worst ?D. usual 40. A. practice B. learn ??C. watch ?D. follow 41. A. way? ????B. skill? ?? C. effect? ????D. problem 42. A. on??B. by??C. without ?D. with43. A. big?? ?B. near??C. far??D. close 44. A. quickly? B. correctly C. alone ? ?D. simply 45.A. courage ???B. money C. time ????D. patience 46.A. help? ????B. ways C. answers ???D. information 47.A. out? ?B. off?? ??C. about?? ?D. at48.A. praise? ???B. encourage C. support? ???D. congratulate 49.A. difference???B. laws C. relation ???D. meaning?? 50.A. happen????B. consider C. like ????D. choose 51.A. line ?B. mark? ?C. drawing? ?D. point? 52.A. development? ??B. victoryC. purpose ???D. road 53.A. know ?B. tell? ??C. show??D. declare54.A. also?B. neither? ?C. either? ?D. too 55.A. course? ???B. thoughts C. practice? ???D. study
四、阅读理解
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C或D）中，选出最佳选项
A
It was a warm April day when a big fat envelope came in the mail from the only college I had ever imagined attending. I tore open the packet. My eyes were fixed on the word "congratulations". I don't remember ever smiling so wide.
Then I looked at my financial(财政的) package.
The cost of Dream School's tuition(学费), room and board was around $40,000 - an impossible sum! How could I afford to attend? What good reasons did I have to go there when three other fine colleges were offering me free tuition? My other choices were good, solid schools even if they weren't as famous as my first choice.
In my mind, attending my dream university would be the only way to realize my dream of becoming a world-class writer. My parents understood how I felt. They told me that even though it would be a financial problem, I could go wherever I would be happiest. But as I was always careful with money, I wasn't sure what to do.
One of the schools that offered me a full ride had an informational dinner one night in the spring. Considering my parents' financial difficulties, I decided to drive the 45 minutes and attend. At first, all I had planned to do was smile politely, eat free food, and listen quietly. But I surprised myself.
At dinner the president of the university talked about the wonderful activities on campus(校园) including guest lectures and social gatherings. He also made it perfectly clear that free food would be offered at all future events. He continued with explanations of professors, class sizes, activities, and sporting events on campus. As he spoke, I began to realize that this school, though not as good as my first choice, might be the best one for me. It seemed small yet with many great programs. It seemed challenging yet caring.
As the president ended his speech, we clapped politely and pushed back our chairs. As I walked out that door, a feeling of comfort washed over me. Looking at the campus that night, I realized that I would be spending the next four years right there.
In all honesty, my university is not as well-known as my "dream" university. However, it turned out to be the right choice of schools for me.
56. How did the author feel when he started to read the letter?
A. He was full of joy.
B. He was lost in his dream.
C. He was worried about the money.
D. He was uncertain which school to go to.
57. We can learn from the passage that the parents were _______.
A. honest B. strict C. supportive D. decisive
58. In Paragraph 5, "offered me a full ride" can be replaced by " ________".
A. would pay for transport to the school
B. would show me around the campus
C. would offer free meals at all events
D. would charge me nothing for tuition
59. What does the author mainly want to say?
A. Your second-choice college may actually be your best fit.
B. You should consider comfort in your choice of schools.
C. You should try your best to attend your dream school.
D. Your choice of schools should be based on their fame.
B
　　Large companies need a way to reach the savings of the public at large. The same problem, on a smaller scale, faces practically every company trying to develop new products and create new jobs. There can be little hope of raising the money needed from friends and people we know, and while banks may agree to provide short-term finance, they are generally unwilling to provide money for long-term projects. So companies turn to the public, inviting people to lend them money, or take a share in the business in exchange for a share in future interests.This they do by issuing stocks (股票) and shares in the business through the Stock Exchange. By doing so they can put into circulation (流通) the savings of single persons and institutions, both at home and abroad.
　　When the saver needs his money back, he does not have to go to the company with whom be originally placed it. Instead, he sells his shares through a stockbroker to some other saver who is seeking to invest his money.
　　Many of the services needed both by industry and by each of us are provided by the Government or by local organizations. Without hospitals, roads, electricity, telephones, railways, this country could not work. All these require continuous spending on new equipment and new development if they are to serve us properly, requiring more money than is raised through taxes alone. The Government, local organizations , and nationalized industries therefore frequently need to borrow money to finance major capital spending, and they, too, come to the Stock Exchange.
There is hardly a man or woman in this country whose standard of living does not depend on the ability of his or her employers to raise money to finance new development. In one way or another this new money must come from the savings of the country. The Stock Exchange exists to provide a channel through which these savings can reach those who need finance.
　　60. The money which enables these companies to go ahead with their projects is _______ .
　　A. exchanged for part ownership in the Stock Exchange
　　B. raised by the selling of shares in the companies
　　C. repaid to its original owners as soon as possible
　　D. invested in different companies on the Stock Exchange
　　61. All the basic services on which we depend are _______ .
　　A. unable to provide for the needs
　　B. financed wholly by rates and taxes
　　C. in constant need of financial support
　　D. run by the Government or our local organizations
　　62. The Stock Exchange makes it possible for the Government, local organizations and nationalized industries _______ .
　　A. to make certain everybody saves money
　　B. to borrow as much money as they wish
　　C. to make certain everybody lends money to them
　　D. to raise money to finance new development
　　63. The underlined word "invest" here probably means _______ .
　　A. lose more money with
　　B. provide less money with
　　C. borrow less money with
　　D. buy shares in order to make a profit
C
Asian athletes have had a spare time in the first two days of the World Indoor Championships in Birmingham, England. But Chinese hurdler(跨栏运动员) Liu Xiang surprised everyone by taking the bronze medal in the men's 60-meter hurdles.
Liu became the first Chinese male athlete to get a world indoor medal in the 18-year history of the championship and was the only Asian medallist this time.
"Karaoke (卡拉OK)! That's what I'm going to do. I'm going to get a big group of my friends together and sing. I love both Western and Chinese music but especially Michael Jackson," said Liu after clocking 7.25 seconds in the final to take his place on the podium (领奖台).
"Frankly speaking, I didn't think I was in the shape to win a medal," Liu said. "On my arrival here, my aim was just to fight my way into the final. After I did that, I thought I might just get into the top six. I knew British hurdler Colin Jackson was going to be here and he's the world record holder indoors and out."
"There was also Cuba's reigning (统治的) Olympic champion Anier Garcia and Allen Johnson, from the United States." It was Johnson, the reigning world outdoor champion, who was successful in 7.47 seconds with Garcia second and Jackson finished back in fifth.
Now Liu will never underestimate his chances again and is aiming for glory in Paris later this year.
"There is the World Championship outdoors in the summer and I have now got to think that I can get a medal. I can never again think that I can't get a medal," he said. Liu's success here marks his rapid transition into the senior ranks.
"The university gives me a lot of flexibility. My courses are very easy and the teachers are very helpful," said Liu.
They might have to be even more accommodating(乐于助人的) now if Liu starts taking on celebrity status, although an invite to his homecoming karaoke party may help.
64. The first sentence "Asian athletes have had a spare time in the first two days..." means "________".
A. Asian athletes can do things at their will in the first two days
B. Asian athletes haven't any achievements in the first two days
C. Asian athletes could match athletes from other continents
D. Asian athletes are tired of competing in the first two days
65. The underlined sentence means "________".
A. I was not satisfied with my performances
B. winning a medal can't show what I have done
C. I didn't think I was able to win a medal
D. I haven't told anyone about my achievements in the hurdles
66. Liu ________ the World Championship outdoors in Paris later this year.
A. is busy preparing for
B. has great pressure on
C. is more confident of his ability in
D. pays little attention to
67. Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage?
A. Liu Xiang was the youngest athlete to take part in the competition in England.
B. Liu Xiang was the first Asian medallist to get a world indoor medal.
C. Liu Xiang is not only a good athlete but a music-lover.
D. Liu Xiang finds it hard to get along with teachers in university.
68. Of the following persons, who hasn't got a medal in the World Indoor Championship?
A. Garcia. B. Allen Johnson.
C. Liu Xiang. D. Michael Jackson.
D
Millions of stars are travelling about in space. A few form groups which journey together, but most of them travel alone.
And they travel through a universe so large that one star seldom comes near to another. For the most part each star makes its journey in complete loneliness, like a ship on an empty ocean. The ship will be well over a million miles from its nearest neighbor. From this it is easy to understand why a star seldom finds another anywhere near it.
We believe, however, that two thousand million years ago, another star wandering through space, happened to come near our sun. Just as the sun and the moon raise tides (潮汐) on the earth, so this star must have raised tides on the surface of the sun. But they were very different from the small tides that are raised in our oceans; a large tidal wave must have travelled over the surface of the sun, at last forming a mountain so high that we cannot imagine it. As the cause of the disturbance came nearer, so the mountain rose higher and higher. And before the star began to move away again, its tidal pull had become so powerful that this mountain was torn to pieces and threw off small parts of itself into space. These small pieces have been going round the sun ever since. They are the planets.
69. Two thousand million years ago, the mountain on the sun was raised probably because ________.
A. another star happened to come near the sun
B. the sun and the moon raised the tides on the earth
C. the star moved away from the sun
D. a large tidal wave of a star travelled over the surface of the sun
70. The article suggests that ________.
A. how space formed B. no one knows where the earth comes from
C. our earth used to be one part of a high mountain on the sun
D. our earth exists before the sun
71. The expression "the cause of the disturbance" refers to ________.
A. the powerful tidal pull
B. the star coming near
C. one of the sun's planets
D. the large tidal wave
72. In this article, the writer mainly wants to tell the readers ________.
A. how the high mountains were formed on the sun
B. why the tides over the surface of the sun were so powerful
C. where the planets in the universe came from
D. that the universe is so large that we cannot imagine it
E
?Four hundred and three babies are crying loudly. Do you know how to make them quiet in 41 seconds? There is an amazing new product on sale in Japan which does exactly this. It is an LP (a long-playing record) of sounds from inside a mother’s body, which a hospital doctor recorded. In tests with the record she played the LP to 403 crying babies. After 41 seconds not one baby was crying and 161 of them were sleeping.　　?The record began as an experiment by Professor Hajime Minooka of the Nippon Medical University near Tokyo. He was looking for something natural that helped new-born babies go to sleep. The sound of the mothers’ heart-beat and other body sounds are the things the babies heard inside their mothers. They feel safe and happy when they hear these sounds again. And they go to sleep.　　?Hospitals in Osaka and Tokyo are using the LP. 10, 000 young couples are using it too. Toshiba Music Company who makes and sells the records is very happy. One and a half million couples marry every year in Japan. Many will have babies, so the LP will definitely be a hit!
73. Which of the following is TRUE according to the?? passage?　　 A. About 55% of the crying babies fell asleep after 41 seconds hearing the LP.　　 B. The LP sounds were first recorded by Professor Hajime Minooka.　　 C. The LP is produced and sold by Toshiba Music Company.　　 D. One million and a half babies are born in Japan every year.74. Babies feel ______when they hear these LP sounds.　　 A. the sounds to be their mothers’ voices　　 B. as if they were inside their mothers　　 C. the music natural and soft???? D. themselves sleeping together with their?mothers75. The underlined word “hit(in the last paragraph)” means “______”.　　 A. popular thing?? ??B. amazement?? C. strike　?? 　??D. experiment
五、书面表达
日常生活中我们经常可以看见一些乞丐在街上或地下人行通道乞讨。最近, 一些大城市如北京、上海等地通过法规禁止乞丐在地下人行通道行乞留宿。你们班就此事进行了讨论。请你根据以下讨论结果用英语写一篇短文。
?? 46%的同学不同意这种政府行为。一些乞丐是生活所迫，不得不乞讨。他们有的是在地下人行道靠卖艺为生。社会应该帮助这些人。
??? 54%的同学认为乞丐损害了城市形象，给城市造成许多麻烦。况且许多乞丐并不是丧失劳动力，而是由于懒惰利用别人的同情心。所以政府应禁止乞丐进入公共场所。
??? 注意：1. 短文的开头已给出，但不计入总词数；??? 　??????? 2. 词数：120左右；　???????? 3. 参考词汇：地下人行道 subway???? 同情心 compassion。
In everyday life we often see some beggars begging in the streets or subways. Recently some big cities such as Beijing and Shanghai have passed the law to ban beggars from subways. We have had a discussion about it... _________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
参考答案
一、基础测试　
A. 单词拼写
1. major 2. represents 3. curious 4. approach 5. agreement 6. introduce
7. expressed 8. learned 9. Actions 10. punished
B. 句型转换
1. Neither /Nor has 12. likely to 13. as good as 14. similar to 15. disappointed
C. 完成句子
16.curious to 17. is likely to 18. similar to 19. me on the head 20. Not all the students
二、单项填空
21—25 BCBDA 26—30 ABCCD 31—35 BCADC
重点解析：
21.句意为：恐怕Jones不能定在明天九点，那时他将正在昆士兰开会。
22. 一般说来，单数可数名词前或者用不定冠词，或者用定冠词the，不可秃头使用。故首先排除A、B项。experience作“经验"讲，是不可数名词;作“经历"讲，是可数名词。如：He has no experience of teaching.他没有教学经验。He has many interesting experiences in his life.他一生中有很多有趣的经历。依据题意判断，此处的experience表示“一次经历”。故选C。
23. 本题考查非谓语动词的用法。products与introduce的关系是被动的，故选B。when引导的是一个省略句，补全为 “When they were first introduced to the market, …”。全句意思为：“这些产品一投放市场，就获得了成功。”
24. 本题考查介绍后的客套用语。
介绍分为自我介绍和介绍他人。自我介绍一般先提出自我介绍的意向，说出自己的姓名、身份等。一般可以说：
Please allow me to introduce myself. / Let me introduce myself. / May I introduce myself? My name is…/ I’m …
比较随便的场合可以说：
Hello, my name is … 或Hi, I’m…
介绍他人时一般需要介绍双方的姓名以及与介绍人的关系。如：
Bob, let me introduce my friend Peter. Peter, this is my friend Bob.
Tang Lin, I want to introduce my friend, Jane.
介绍后，被介绍双方的客套语：
I’m pleased/glad/delighted to meet you.
It’s nice to meet you.
常用省略形式：Pleased / Glad to meet you.
25. reach agreement意为“达成协议”,依据第二句的主谓关系，应使用被动语态，故首先排除B、C两项; 从句意看，第一句的动作在前，第二句的动作在后，故第二句不可使用过去完成时。
26. the way后的定语从句可以由that引导，也可以由in which引导，故首先排除B、C项；what引导宾语从句时，既有词义，又在宾语从句中作句子成分，而that引导宾语从句时，只起引导作用，不在宾语从句中作句子成分。题干中宾语从句缺宾语，因而选A。
27. way作“方法”、“方式”、“手段”解时，其后可跟动词不定式或“of+v-ing”作定语，构成a way of doing/to do结构，意为“做…的方法”。way之前用介词in表示“用…方法”。
28. 句意,一个子弹击中了这名士兵他的腿受伤了。
29. 本题考查词的辨析。从语法上讲四个选项都正确，但是able用在此处语义不通;probable和possible作表语时都不用人作主语; likely作表语时既可以人作主语也可物作主语。
句意为：在写求职信的时候，心中要有数这位准雇主最有可能想知道什么。
31. 本题考查根据语境选用连词的能力。解题的关键是第一句I’m going to the post office。由于已说要去邮局，再用条件从句就不合适。故排除D项。A、C两项也不符前文语境。故选B。
33. 由于他不能像往常一样去散步，是因为有许多作业要做，所以用不定式表示将来
35. 如果选用D项，and后应该使用被动语态。
三、完形填空
36-40 DBACB??? ?41-45 DCDCA??46-50 CAABC?? ?51-55 BDBCC重点解析：
36.上一句说到孩子们遇到问题时往往不会解决,因此他们需要学会如何去解决。这是一句省略语,是承接上一句而来的。后面补充起来应是...how to deal with it。37. take the time to do sth. 意为“花时间(从容地)做某事”,正好与后一句相照应。38. 表示按照某种方式。39. 此句的意思是,问题总是在最不该发生的时候发生,即:发生问题的时候是人最不愉快、最没有准备的时候。exact所指意义不清, 而ordinary, usual均与burst upon(突然发生)意义矛盾。40. 本文中心是谈(帮助)教会小孩学会解决问题的方法、技巧,而不是去实践它。且skill是不和watch或follow搭配的。41. 找到出现问题的原因是学会解决问题的方法之一。42. 这种技巧的学习不是无师自通的,而是需要帮助的。not...without构成否定之否定,这里是肯定学习的必要性。44. 在上文的基础上,论述的观点在推进、深入。第二步就是学会如何独立地解决问题,这是前一种学习的升华。其余几项从逻辑、层次上都不符。45. 独立解决问题最需要的是有这种勇气。从下一句可以得出这一结论。46. 从后文可知,此处应为answer(方案)。48. 对小孩所做出的正确选择要肯定、表扬。encourage, support是在结果之前所需要做的事, 不妥; congratulate的结构是congratulate sb. on sth,也不妥;praise sb. for doing sth.表示“因……而表扬某人”。49. law在此的意思是“规律,规则”。本段进一步深入,谈到要让小孩看清事物发生的因果规律。后文一直是在对此继续阐述。若是relation则后应跟between cause and effect。50. 小孩喜欢在墙上随意写写画画。这里是列举孩子们最不经意的事来说明因果之间的规律。happen to do sth.表示 “碰巧做某事”; choose to do sth. 表示 “选择做某事”,都与文意不合; consider后应该是doing sth.。51. 在墙上画就要留下痕迹。mark表示“痕迹”; line表示“线段”; point表示“点”; drawing表示“图画”,在此处都不确切。52. on the road to 表示“在……过程中”,此句意思是“懂了这一点,就说明他是在成长”。53. 根据文意,这里只能用tell一词。tell在此处的意思是“说明,解释,分辨”;know只表示内心“知道,明白”; show表示“用行动、动作给别人展示”; declare表示用语言来“宣称,断言”。此处是说小孩能(用语言)说明事情之所以如此。
四、阅读理解
56—60ACDAB 61—65CDDBC 66—70 CCDAC 71—75 BCCBA
重点解析：
56. 正确选项是A。从第一段中:My eyes were fixed on the word "congratulations." I don't remember ever smiling so wide. 可以证明,表示作者心情的。
57. 正确答案是C。文中第四段:My parents understood how I felt. They told me that even though it would be a financial problem, I could go wherever I would be happiest. 可以看出,他的父母是十分支持他的。而作者本人的心情是:But as I was always careful with money, I wasn't sure what to do. 这中间充分展示出人物间的新型互爱关系,父母关心儿子的前程,儿子体谅家庭的经济困难。
58. 正确答案是D。下划线的文字"offered me a full ride" 直译为"提供我全程乘车"。这是十分幽默的语言,更为有趣的是这所院校还:... had an informational dinner one night in the spring.
59. 正确选项是A。依据文中最后一段:In all honesty, my university is not as well-known as my "dream" university. However, it turned out to be the right choice of schools for me
60. 总结归纳题。A有较大干扰性。从..., or take a share in the business in exchange for a share in future interests可以看出可交换的是赚得的利益,而不是投资的钱,因此A不合题意。答案B是对inviting people to lend them money, or take a share in the business in exchange for a share in future interests的总结。
61.推理判断题.首先我们应该理解basic services 指hospitals, roads, electricity, telephones, railways 等,从第三段The Government, local organizations, and nationalized industries therefore frequently need to borrow money to finance major capital spending,...得知basic services 需要持续不断的财政支持。
62. 细节题。从最后一段首句得此答案。在这一句中his or her employers即指本题中的Government, local organizations, nationalized industries.
63. 词意推测题.买股票的人都想赚钱,invest his money意思是"投资; 入股",因此D为最佳答案。
64. 据下一句的意思和两句间的关系。下一句讲到刘翔获得了一枚铜牌;从but可知两句间是转折关系。因此,该句应指亚洲的运动员在前两天没有取得好成绩。
65. 从下文"After I did that, I thought I might just get into the top six."可知。
67. 根据短文大意可知C选项是正确的。短文中没有讲到他是最年轻的运动员,因此A选项是错误的;B选项与第二段第一句意思不符;D选项与最后两段意思不符。
68. 从第三段可知Michael Jackson是刘翔喜欢的歌星而不是运动员。从第五段可知Allen Johnson 第一,Garcia第二, Colin Jackson第五。
五、书面表达
One possible version:
??? In everyday life we often see some beggars begging in the streets or subways. Recently some big cities such as Beijing and Shanghai have passed the law to ban beggars from subways. We have had a discussion about it.
??? 46% of the students are against the idea. They think it is not right for the government to forbid beggars begging in subways. Some beggars really have difficulties in making a living. They play music in subways to survive. We shouldn’t look down upon these people. The society should take some measures to help them.
　? On the other hand, 54% of the students are for the idea. They think beggars won’t do any good to our city’s image. Beggars make a lot of trouble for the city. What’s worse, some beggars are just taking advantage of other people's compassion to make easy money. So the government should forbid beggars public places.
随堂演练
及时体验 巩固提升
Ⅰ.短语填空
give sb. a hug， at a distance， at ease， lose face， turn one's back to， make a fist， up and down， from side to side， look away， be respectful to
1．Just feel ________________ and make yourself at home.
答案　at ease
2．The children feel very happy and are jumping ________________.
答案　up and down
3．If you are angry at a person, you will ________________ him or her.
答案　turn your back to
4．Place the tree ________________ of 10 meters from this one.
答案　at a distance
5．Everyone should be ________________ others regardless of class, race or sex.
答案　respectful to
6．Sometimes if a person ________________， he/she might also smile in order to hide it.
答案　loses face/has lost face
7．________________ and shaking it shows that a person is angry and threatening another person.
答案　Making a fist
8．If we don't agree with somebody or refuse one's request, we always shake our heads ________________.
答案　from side to side
9．Please don't ________________ from the person with whom you are talking; it is not respectful to do so and the person may think you are losing interest in the talk.
答案　look away
10．It is not a good idea to ________________ to a boss or a teacher.
答案　give a hug
Ⅱ.翻译句子
1．按说你不应该说那些。(be intended to do sth.)
_______________________________________________________
答案　You weren't intended to say that.
2．度假时他完全放松下来，可是他现在又回到工作中去了。(at ease)
_______________________________________________________
答案　He felt completely at ease during the vacation but now he has to go back to his work again.
3．约翰虚弱地不能再站下去了。(too...to)
_______________________________________________________
答案　John was too weak to stand any longer.
4．我认为我们不应该被人看到在一起旅游，因为他们会误解的。(misunderstand)
_______________________________________________________
答案　I don't think we should be seen traveling together, because they might misunderstand us.
5．最后我们达成每人一半的协议。(agreement)
_______________________________________________________
答案　At last we reached an agreement that we two get the half.
第四单元综合测评
本试卷分第Ⅰ卷(选择题)和第Ⅱ卷(非选择题)两部分。共150分，考试时间120分钟。
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节，满分30分)
第一节　(共5小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
1．What are the two speakers going to buy?
A. Bread.　　　 B. Cheese.　　　
C. Eggs.
2．How does the woman find the fish?
A. Just so-so. B. Bad.
C. Quite good.
3．Where does the conversation take place?
A. In the bookstore.
B. In the library.
C. In the classroom.
4．What does the man mean?
A. He doesn't like the hotel.
B. They can't afford to stay at the hotel.
C. They do not want to stay at a hotel.
5．What do we learn from the conversation?
A. Mary has never studied mathematics.
B. Mary must be good at mathematics.
C. Mary probably is poor at mathematics.
第二节　(共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6～8题。
6．Where is the man now?
A. At home.
B. At his friend's.
C. In a restaurant.
7．What is the woman most likely?
A. The man's wife.
B. The man's friend.
C. A waitress.
8．Which of the following does the man like most?
A. Pork. B. Chicken.
C. Fish.
听第7段材料，回答第9～11题。
9．Who will probably pay a visit to the ABC company?
A. Customers. B. Reporters.
C. Tourists.
10．Where will the woman meet the visitors?
A. At the office.
B. At a restaurant.
C. At the factory.
11．What is the relationship between the woman and the man?
A. Teacher and student.
B. Assistant and boss.
C. Visitor and host.
听第8段材料，回答第12～14题。
12．What is the most probable relationship between the two speakers?
A. Schoolmates.
B. Teacher and student.
C. Trainer and trainee.
13．Why did the woman get an A?
A. She is good at taking tests.
B. Her teacher is an easy grader.
C. Her teacher made a mistake.
14．What will the man do about his history course?
A. Drop out.
B. Ask the woman for help.
C. Continue.
听第9段材料，回答第15～17题。
15．Why does the woman want to call Susan?
A. To put off the meeting.
B. To bring forward the meeting.
C. To remind her to attend the meeting on time.
16．How long will the meeting last?
A. 2 hours. B. 3 hours.
C. 4 hours.
17．What does the woman ask Susan to prepare for lunch?
A. Drinks and sandwiches.
B. Coffee and hamburgers.
C. Drinks and hot dogs.
听第10段材料，回答第18～20题。
18．Why don't most American people eat dinner at home?
A. Because they are very busy.
B. Because they like fast food very much.
C. Because fast food is cheap.
19．Which of the following advantages isn't mentioned for fast food?
A. They are delicious.
B. They are convenient.
C. They are not expensive.
20．What does the speaker advise us to do?
A. Add some nutrients to fast food.
B. Not to eat too much fast food.
C. Never eat fast food.
答案　1－5　CCABC　6－10　CCBBC
11－15　BABCA　16－20　BAAAB
听力材料
Text 1
M：What do we need at the shop?
W：Well, we've got enough bread, but we need more eggs.
M：What about cheese?
W：No, we've got plenty.
Text 2
M：How about my fish?
W：It couldn't be better. Cooking is really your field.
Text 3
M：I like these books, but they look like quite expensive.
W：$15 for two books. That's really not very expensive for good books.
Text 4
W：Why don't we stay at the Grand Regency Hotel?
M: You are joking! Do you know how expensive that place is?
Text 5
M：What's the matter with Mary?
W: She becomes nervous whenever it comes to learning mathematics.
Text 6
W：Have you decided on something, Sir?
M: Yes. I prefer beer. Well, a glass of beer.
W: What would you like to eat?
M: Fried chicken, beef, beancurd and two pancakes.
W: Do you want any soup?
M: Let me see. . . Egg soup, please.
Text 7
W：Steven, do you know these people want to write about our ABC company?
M：Yes. You are meeting them next week, aren't you?
W：Yeah. Where should I take them, the factory perhaps?
M：I suppose they prefer the office, because it is more comfortable.
W：Well, I did think here. But maybe a restaurant somewhere.
M：I think they prefer to see where our products are made.
W：OK. I'll meet them there.
Text 8
M：Have you ever taken history?
W: Yeah. Last semester.
M: Who was your professor?
W: It was Professor Johnson.
M: I have him this semester. What did you think of him?
W: He's a terrible instructor and demands a lot, but fortunately, he's an easy grader.
M: What did you end up getting?
W: I got an A. Sounds good. None of my test scores were that high, so I don't know how I got a perfect grade. Are you enjoying the class so far?
M: I hate it and I was about to drop out. But after hearing about your experience, I think I will continue.
W: Yes. Definitely stay in the class. You will get a better grade than your test scores. He does that deliberately to make all the students study hard.
M: Thanks for letting me know. I feel better now.
Text 9
W：Hello, this is Rose, can I speak to Susan?
M: Hello, this is Joe, Susan went out of the office just now. Would you like to leave a message?
W: Yeah, can you tell her that the meeting on Monday has to be put off?
M: Alright, the meeting on Monday is put off.
W: And tell her to find out if it's possible to change it to Tuesday morning, please. The best starting time for me would be 11 o'clock.
M: OK, on Tuesday at 11 a．m..
W: Yeah, and please remind her that she needs to book a meeting room with sitting for a dozen people.
M: OK, er, should she arrange lunch in a restaurant?
W: Oh, no, no, can you ask Susan to arrange for drinks, coffee, colds, soft drinks, and some sandwiches, then we can continue the meeting over lunch if we need to.
M: Alright, anything else?
W: Oh and the meeting has to finish by 2 o'clock because I have an appointment in the afternoon.
M: OK, I've got all that.
W: Lovely, fine, thanks, Joe.
Text 10
Because of the fast pace of American life, many families cannot eat together around the family table evening. Many people have to be at work during the normal dinner hours.
For this reason, fast-food restaurants became very popular. These restaurants serve foods such as hamburgers, tacos and French fries. Fast-food restaurants are really fast. You don't have to wait a minute or two for your food. They are also convenient. You may dress casually, and in some places you can even order from your car and drive away with your food without going into the restaurant. Finally, fast-food restaurants are inexpensive.
Fast food has its shortcomings, too. Most fast-food meals are not very healthy. They are often high in fats and low in other important nutrients. It is advisable not to eat too much fast food.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节，满分40分)
第一节(共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分)
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中，选出最佳选项。
A
This day three foreign gentlemen came to a bus stop in England and waited. About five minutes later, the bus they wanted came along. They were just going to get on when suddenly there was a loud noise behind them. People rushed onto the bus and tried to push them out of the way. Someone shouted at them. The bus conductor came rushing down the stairs to see what the trouble was about. The three foreigners seemed all at sea and looked embarrassed. No one had told them about the British custom of lining up for a bus — the first person who arrives at the bus stop is the first person to get on the bus.
Learning the language of a country isn't enough. If you want to have a pleasant visit, find out as much as possible about the manners and customs of your host country. You will probably be surprised just how different, they can be from your own. A visitor to India would do well if he/she knows that people there consider it impolite to use the left hand for passing food at table. The left hand is supposed to be used for washing yourself. Also in India, you might see a man shaking his head to show that he doesn't agree. But in many parts of India a shake of the head means agreement. Nodding your head when you are given a drink in Bulgaria will probably leave you thirsty.
At a meal in countries on the Arabic Peninsula, you will find that your glass is repeatedly refilled as soon as you drink up. If you think that you have had enough, you should take the cup or glass in your hand and give it a little shake from side to side or place your hand over the top.
In Europe it is quite usual to cross your legs when you are sitting talking to someone even at an important meeting. Doing this in Thailand, however, could cause trouble. Also, you should try to avoid touching the head of an adult — it's just not done in Thailand.
21．The British people tried to push the three gentlemen out of the way because the gentlemen ________.
A. were foreigners
B. didn't have tickets
C. made a loud noise
D. didn't line up for the bus
答案与解析　D　在第一自然段的最后，有这样的句子：No one had told them about the British custom of lining up for a bus — the first person who arrives at the bus stop is the first person to get on the bus.从此句可知那三位先生并不知道在英国乘车的习惯，所以答案是D。
22．According to the article, if you want to have a pleasant journey in a foreign country，you should ________.
A. learn the language of the country
B. understand the manners and customs of the country
C. have enough time and money
D. make friends with the people there
答案与解析　B　答案在第二自然段的第二个句子。
23．In India it is considered impolite ________.
A. to use the right hand for passing food at table
B. to pass food with the left hand
C. to eat food with your hands
D. to help yourself at table
答案与解析　B　可在第二自然段直接找到答案。
24．The best title for this article is ________.
A. People's Everyday Life
B. Mind Your Manners
C. Shaking and Nodding Head
D. Taking a Bus in England
答案与解析　B　通读全文就会发现，只学习一门外语是不够的，还要多了解该国的风俗习惯，否则就会遇到麻烦，所以答案是B。
B
When you put brand-name clothes on, you feel cool! You look good ，and you feel good about yourself, too.
I once saw a boy wearing brand names all over his body. He looked like the cover of a magazine. He was breathtaking! But, he took my breath away because I was laughing at how silly he looked. Maybe he thought he would feel better about himself by dressing that way. But I thought he just looked stupid.
The truly cool kids don't need clothes to make themselves feel cool; they are confident about themselves no matter what they wear. When we look for cool friends to hang out with, we shouldn't always choose the best-dressed because they may only think of their appearance. Such people aren't cool friends.
So don't care too much about wearing brand names, but do try to look good. Appearance matters, but it isn't everything，and we shouldn't spend all our money buying the latest brand-name fashion. Let's save money for more fun things!
Brand-name clothes：To Wear or Not to Wear Nike, Guess, Levi's ... these are some of the foreign brand names I see in Shanghai. Many boys and girls like them. When they wear them they get more attention in school. And most importantly, the clothes look good.
But have you ever thought of this question: Who paid for your brand-name clothes? Most of these clothes are pretty expensive and your parents are the ones paying the cash. Do you feel good spending tons of your parents' money on your clothes?
The best idea is to buy clothes that look great on you. Your parents won't have to spend so much money on your clothes. Of course, you may buy one or two brand-name clothes and wear them sometimes!
25．The passage suggests with brand names all over your body ________.
A. you're sure to look cool
B. you may look stupid
C. you'll look charming
D. you will be laughed at
答案与解析　B　穿名牌本身没有错，关键是得不得体，钱是不是你自己挣的，否则你看起来会很愚蠢。
26．The truly cool kids are those who ________.
A. wear the best clothes
B. don't care for their appearance
C. are confident of themselves
D. don't wear brand-name clothes
答案与解析　C　第三段前面两句话是答案依据。
27．From the text we know ________.
A. all students like to wear Nike，Guess and Levi's
B. most students buy the brand-name clothes with their own money
C. the brand-name clothes don't look nice
D. it's silly often to ask your parents to buy brand-name clothes for you
答案　D
28．It seems that the passage is telling us ________.
A. how to wear clothes
B. not to wear brand-name clothes
C. fashion is not all
D. what is really cool
答案与解析　C　这其实是文章的论点，能够穿名牌当然好，但要注意得体，要注意钱是不是自己挣的，更重要的是，穿上名牌并不代表一切。真正酷的人不在乎名牌，而是对自己的自信。
C
The Daily Mail Offer Director's Chairs
TELEPHONE YOUR ORDER ON 01509 638620
For much of this century, the director's chair has been regarded as the most suitable chair for home and garden. Lightweight and easy to carry when folded, it is quite comfortable and certainly has a special style of its own.
Our chairs have all unusually superlative, one-piece seat and back, which makes them look smarter than most, and a coordinating hardwood frame. Available(可买到的) in A (green seat with green frame) or B (natural coloured seat with stained wood frame) they are on offer for only ￡24.95 each，or buy two of the same colour for ￡44.90 and save ￡5.
■YOU can telephone your order, giving your Master Card/Visa number on 01509 638620 (24 hours a day, seven days a week)．
■PLEASE allow up to 14 days for delivery from receipt of order. Price will be paid back if item is returned within 14 days of receipt.
Post to Daily Mail Director's Chairs Offer L2259, Belton Road West Loughborough，Leics LEll 5XL.
Please send me：________ Director's chair(s) L2259/J015 at ￡24.95 each
________×2 Director's chairs L2259/S262 at ￡44.90
Colour(s)：A________ ________； B________ ________
Name ________ ________(Please include title and initials)
Address ________ ________ Postcode ________ ________
I enclose a crossed cheque payable to Daily Mail Offers for ￡________ of debit my Master Card/Visa account by ￡________ Card No. ________
Expiry date ________ Tel No. ________
■IF YOU do not wish to receive details of other offers or services, please tick this box.
29．According to the advertisement, the director's chair ________.
A. is suitable to be used in the offices
B. can be folded and is easy to carry
C. is made for directors
D. is a new product
答案与解析　B　从第一段所给的句子：Lightweight and easy to carry when folded可知椅子被折叠以后很轻，便于拿走。
30．A man bought two chairs: the type of “A” and the type of “B”. How much did he have to pay?
A. ￡49.90. 　　　　　　 B. ￡29.95.
C. ￡44.90. D. ￡89.80.
答案与解析　A　从．.. A(...) or B(...) they are on offer for only ￡24.95 each(如买A或B颜色的椅子，每把24.95英镑)可知买两把就是49.9英镑(24.95×2)。
31．A man ordered a chair from the Daily Mail Offer and he received it, but he was not satisfied with it. What would be the best way to solve the problem according to the text?
A. The company would send someone to fix it.
B. The chair couldn't be returned after having been sold.
C. He could do nothing but use it.
D. He could return the chair to the company within 14 days.
答案与解析　D　文章最后指出如果顾客对已购买的椅子不满意，可在14天内退货。
D
New rules and behaviour standards(行为规范) for middle school students came out in March. Middle school are going to use a new way to decide who the top students are. The best students won't only have high marks. They will also be kids who don't dye their hair, smoke or drink. The following are some of the new rules.
Tell the truth.
Have you ever copied someone else's work on an exam? Don't do it again! That's not something an honest student should do. If you have played computer games for two hours in your room, don't tell your parents you have done homework.
Do more at school.
Good students love animals and care for other people. April is Bird Loving Month in China. Is your school doing anything to celebrate? You should join! That way, you can learn more about animals and how to protect them. When more people work together, it makes it more fun for everyone.
Have you ever quarreled with your teammates when your basketball team lost? Only working together can make your team stronger. Be friendly to the people you are with. Try to think of others，not only yourself.
Be open to new ideas.
Have you ever thought that people could live on the moon? Maybe you'll discover Earth Ⅱ some day. Don't look down on new ideas. Everyone's ideas are important. You should welcome them, because new ideas make life better for everyone.
Protect yourself.
Has someone ever taken money from one of your classmates? Don't let it happen to you. If you have to go home late, you should let your parents know.
Use the Internet carefully.
The Internet can be very useful for your studies. But some things on the Internet aren't for kids, so try to look at Web pages that are good for you. You can use the Web for fun or homework. Can't you find any good Web sites for children? Here are some：
http：//kidseastday, com; http：//www. chinakids.net. cn.
32．The school new rules will help kids by telling them ________.
A. how they can study well
B. what they should do at school
C. what is right and what is wrong
D. how they can protect themselves
答案与解析　C　本文主要介绍了中学生新行为规范中主要的几个条款，即黑标题部分内容，讲述了学生该做什么不该做什么等，因此，C项为正确答案。
33. According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true?
A. Take care of yourself when you are out.
B. Tell the truth，even when you are wrong.
C. Keep some animals to protect them.
D. Use the Internet, but keep away from bad things.
答案与解析　C　本题可以采用排除法，A选项与Protect yourself.的内容相符合；B选项与Tell the truth.的内容相符合；D选项与Use the Internet carefully.中的内容相符合；文中没有提到“养动物保护它们”，所以选项C与原文不符，因此本题应选C项。
34. The main idea of the fourth paragraph is about ________.
A. making the team stronger
B. working together with others
C. being a good friend to others
D. getting on well with others
答案与解析　B　根据第四段中的“Only working together can make your team stronger. Be friendly to the people you are with. Try to think of others，not only yourself.”可知强调团结，与人友好，为别人着想，因此，B项为正确答案。
35. The passage tells us how to ________.
A. be top students B. do more at school
C. care for others D. use the Internet
答案与解析　A　根据全文可知文章第一段中的“Middle schools are going to use a new way to decide who the top students are.”是文章的主要意思。
第二节(共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分)
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
The Wife-carrying World Championship has been celebrated in a small town in central Finland since 1992. In 1992, the people of the town decided to restart some long-forgotten traditions. __36__ He was said to only accept men as members of his gang who proved their worth in challenges. At that time, it was also a common practice to steal women from neighboring villages.
__37__ A large number of competitors, people, and journalists from Finland to Canada attend the Wife-carrying World Championship every year.
__38__ The Wife-carrying World Championship is held on a 253.5 meters long official track. The track has two dry obstacles and a water obstacle, about a meter deep. The wife to be carried may be your own, or your neighbor's. The minimum weight of the wife to be carded is 49 kg. If she is less than 49 kg, the wife will be given a heavy bag to carry. Each time a competitor drops his wife that couple will be fined 15 seconds. __39__
Alongside with the Wife-carrying World Championship, there is also a team competition. The distance is the same but three men in the team carry the wife in turns. At the exchange point the carrier has to drink official “wife-carrying drink”. Then he may continue the race. __40__
While the Wife-carrying World Championship is being held, there are bands playing music, a wife-carrying dance and other forms of entertainment.
A. There are a few basic rules.
B. People everywhere hold the event.
C. A special prize is awarded to the team.
D. Do you know how these traditions restarted?
E. This event is becoming increasingly popular.
F. The winner is the couple who complete the course in the shortest time.
G. Back in the late 1800s, there was a robber called Rosvo-Ronkainen in that area.
答案　36.G　37.E　38.A　39.F　40.C
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节，满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分)
阅读下面短文，从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
Jane gave the customer a small sales slip that came out of the register (自动记录器). She counted out the __41__ carefully and put it in the man's hand. The man thanked her and left.
She felt pretty good after all, Jane thought. It was good to have __42__ her first day of work __43__ she was really tired and her feet hurt. She looked at the clock，and it was 5：20. In ten minutes the store would __44__. Jane wondered whether she had made any mistakes. Suppose she had less money in her register than what was __45__ on the sales slips.
Just then a tall man came __46__. “May I please have this pen？” the man asked. He __47__ a blue ball-point pen. On the pen there was a little paper with the __48__： $0.79. The man handed over the pen and a __49__.
Jane put it into the cash (现金) register and gave the man __50__ change.
“__51__ a minute！” the man said sharply, “You shortchanged me, young lady. I gave you a __52__ bill. This is change for a 5.”
__53__， Jane got mad. She __54__ said, “You're wrong.” Then she __55__ that the manager had told her not to __56__ back to customers. Suddenly she realized that she was not __57__ whether the bill was a five or a ten. Of course，she was sure at first that it was a five __58__ she would not have given him the wrong change.
She could feel a lump in her throat (哽咽), but she could not __59__ whether it was anger or __60__. What would she do?
41．A. coins 　　　　　　B. dollars
C. food D. change
42．A. got B. found
C. finished D. practiced
43．A. as if B. even though
C. simply because D. so that
44．A. end B. close
C. pay her D. check her
45．A. left B. totaled
C. put D. offered
46．A. out B. on
C. over D. down
47．A. looked for B. turned in
C. held up D. pointed out
48．A. cost B. prize
C. money D. price
49．A. bill B. card
C. check D. charge
50．A. extra B. his
C. its D. more
51．A. Hold B. Come
C. Wait D. Stand
52．A. five-dollar B. ten-dollar
C. right D. good
53．A. At last B. At first
C. As usual D. As a result
54．A. then B. almost
C. immediately D. thus
55．A. thought B. recognized
C. understood D. remembered
56．A. give B. go
C. talk D. quarrel
57．A. doubtful B. believable
C. happy D. sure
58．A. but B. so
C. or D. for
59．A. say B. speak
C. know D. tell
60．A. fear B. madness
C. joy D. pride
答案与解析　
41．D　简给了顾客购物发票并仔细数了数零钱放在男人手中，由倒数第四段最后一句也可得到答案。change在这里指“零钱、找头”。A、B两项太具体，文中没有提示。
42．C　从下一句商店在10分钟后关门可以知道，她一天的工作即将结束。联系下文可排除其他选项。
43．B　联系上文的It was good以及后面的she was really tired and her feet hurt可知前后为转折关系。good与tired，hurt间为转折关系，因此排除其他选项。
44．B　由上文Jane结束了工作并在回顾一天的工作感受可知10分钟后商店就要关门了。end表“结束”，一般不用于商店关门。
45．B　从空后的on the sales slips我们知道，自动记录器将销售的总额打在购物发票上。total在这里是动词，意思是“统计”。根据常识可知，收银机里的钱数应同购物发票上打出来的钱数一致，故排除其他三项。
46．C　从空后的May I please have this pen可以知道有个人过来买东西。come over“过来”。come out“出来；发芽”；come on“快点”，come down“走下来”，均不合文意。
47．C　那个人要买钢笔，因此他举起那支钢笔让Jane看一下需要花多少钱。look for“寻找”，turn in“上缴”，point out“指出；提出”。
48．D　从空后的$0.79可以知道上面标注了价格。cost“花费”，prize“奖金”均与文意不符。
49．A　由下句Jane把它放入收银机可知，男人拿起笔来的同时给了钞票。由第47空后的bill也可得到提示。check意思是“支票”，一般买这么便宜的物品不会用到支票。
50．B　Jane给那人找了零钱。extra意思是“额外的”，指比实际的要多。联系上下文我们知道Jane最担心的是找错钱，因此她不会多给。
51．C　从下文You shortchanged me可以知道那人以Jane少给他找了零钱为由让她等一下。联系下文排除其他选项。
52．B　联系下一段中第四句话“突然她意识到她不确定那张钞票是5美元还是10美元的”，及其下一句“这是5美元零钱”，可得此答案。其他三项不符合文意。
53．B　从下文的Then可以得此答案：刚开始，Jane差点发狂了。分析事情的发展情况可以排除其他选项。
54．B　由她想到经理的话可以知道她没有顶撞那人，因此说她几乎说出“你错了”。其他三项都表示Jane说出了那句话，与文意相矛盾。
55．D　从空后的the manager had told her可以推知她记起了经理曾经告诉她的话。如选A项，则应为think of the words of the manager。
56．C　联系上文她没有对顾客说出You are wrong可以推断经理告诉过她不要顶撞顾客。talk back to sb.意思是“顶撞某人”。give back“归还；恢复”，go back“回来”，都与文意不符；quarrel通常不与back搭配。
57．D　从空后的whether the bill was a five or a ten我们知道，她对是一张五元还是十元的bill没有把握了。doubtful“怀疑的”，believable“可信的”都不能与其后的whether ... or ...搭配。
58．C　由上一句Jane现在不确定可知她一开始确信那个人给的是5美元，并且她没有找错钱，故两句为并列关系。其他三项所表示的逻辑关系都不对。
59．D　从空后的内容我们可以得出tell的答案提示。tell与can连用，意思是“辨别”。其他选项搭配错误。
60．A　从空前的anger可以知道，她自己也不能辨别出自己是生气还是害怕。受到了顾客的指责不会高兴或自豪，故C，D不正确；联系上文可以知道Jane很好地控制住了自己，因此madness不合适。
第Ⅱ卷
第二节　(共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面材料，在空白处填入适当的内容(不多于3个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
Some experts say that the Chinese were the first people __61__ (discover) the land that is now called America. They say that many centuries ago __62__ (explore) set sail from a port in China and made a long voyage __63__ ended on the shores of America. If this is true, then they sailed much __64__ (far) than anyone else had at that time, and arrived in America long __65__ Columbus. According to some experts, the Vikings also sailed __66__ America by crossing the Atlantic, probably from Greenland.
Some years ago, __67__ was difficult to persuade people that the Chinese and the Vikings risked their lives crossing oceans in search of other lands. Why would they look for __68__ (know) lands? More and more information has been collected now, however, and more and more reasons __69__ (find) for why the Chinese and Vikings might have made such long sea journeys. We have to hope that __70__ (eventual) we will know who discovered America, and who discovered it again later.
61．________　62.________　63.________　64.________
65．________　66.________　67.________　68.________
69．________　70.________
答案　61.to discover　62.explorers　63.that/which
64．further/farther　65.before　66.to/for　67.it
68．unknown　69.have been found　70.eventually
第四部分　写作(共两节，满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文，请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。作文中共有10处错误，每句中最多有两处。错误涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加：在缺词处加一个漏词符号(∧)，并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除：把多余的词用斜线()划掉。
修改：在错的词下画一横线，并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意：1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词。
2．只允许修改10处，多者(从第11处起)不计分。
Today I was having a PE lesson while I fell down and hurt my foot. I was in greatly pain at that moment, but I tried to act as if nothing had happened until the class is over. Though I had difficulty walk back to my classroom, I still didn't tell anyone but even refused the offer of help of classmates. As result, the hurt in my foot became worse. Now I know I'm wrong. We can tell others our need for help and accept his help. Some day we can not help others in return. In this way, we can get along to each other happy and peacefully.
答案　
Today I was having a PE lesson  I fell down and hurt my foot. I was in  pain at that moment, but I tried to act as if nothing had happened until the class  over. Though I had difficulty  back to my classroom, I still didn't tell anyone  even refused the offer of help of classmates. As  result, the hurt in my foot became worse. Now I know I'm wrong. We can tell others our need for help and accept  help. Some day we can  help others in return. In this way, we can get along  each other  and peacefully.
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假如你是一位高中老师，在新学期召开的第一次班会上，对学生进行礼仪常规教育。内容包括如下要点：
1．应该对别人表示尊重，无论是老师还是同学。
2．与别人说话时不要左顾右盼。
3．见面要相互问好，离开要说再见，和别人握手是好习惯。
4．课间不要追逐打闹。
5．不但在学校要有礼貌，在家也一样。
注意　1.以短文形式表达。
2．词数100左右。
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
范文　
Boys and girls，
New term has begun. Now I'd like to say something you should pay particular attention to at school.
As a student of good manners，first，we should show respect for others, no matter whether they are your teachers or your classmates. Second, you shouldn't look about while you're talking with others. It may mean rudeness. Use body language as much as you can. Say hello to one another when you meet and also remember to say goodbye when you depart. Third, shaking hands with others will be accepted as a good habit. But it is a bad habit to run after one another between classes. At last I hope all the students in our class will be polite not only at school but also at home.
Wish you happy in the new term！
Unit 4检测题
第一节 单项填空
从A、B、C和D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
1. Susan, ________ university student from Europe, teaches me ________ art in her spare time.
A. an; / B. a; the C. an; the D. a; /
2. Tyron was very angry, but cool-headed enough to ________ rushing into the boss’s office.
A. prevent B. avoid C. protect D. allow
3. On this map what does a star ________?
A. tell B. represent C. say D. mean
4. I first met Mr Smith in America. He ________ at Stanford University then.
A. studied B. had studied C. is studying D. was studying
5. Our bodies are strengthened by taking exercise. ________, our minds are developed by learning.
A. Possibly B. Likely C. Similarly D. Generally
6. ________, most teenagers now listen to rock music. However, John likes classical music better.
A. In a word B. In general C. In time D. In total
7. He tried to ________ answering any question the journalist asked.
A. avoid B. leave C. defeat D. miss
8. ________ we move the picture over there? Do you think it will look better?
A. If only B. What if C. As if D. Even if
9. ________ different kinds of pianos, the factory is sure they can satisfy people’s needs.
A. To produce B. Being produced C. Produced D. Having produced
10. The letter “X” can be used ________ an unknown number.
A. to expressing B. to express C. expressing D. expression
11. The Big6 Model is one ________ to teaching information literacy skills.
A. attitude B. appearance C. approach D. altitude
12. ________, the teacher asked whether anyone wished to ask a question.
A. Finishing his lecture B. To finish the lecture
C. Having finished his lecture D. Finished the lecture
13. — It’s a very interesting book.
— ________.
— And thank you very much for letting me keep it so long.
A. I’m glad you like it. B. That’s all right.
C. Don’t mention it. D. I hope you like it.
14. — When was it that you got home last night?
— It _______ around nine o’clock when I drove back home, for it was very dark.
A. must have been B. had to be C. was to be D. must be
15. People are encouraged to speak openly, but careless words are ________ to hurt others’ feelings.
A. possible B. probable C. likely D. sure
第二节 完形填空
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
An elderly carpenter (木匠) was ready to retire. He told his employer-contractor of his plans to ___16___ the house-building business to live a more leisurely life with his wife and 17 his extended family. He would18 the paycheck each week, 19 he wanted to retire. They could get by (survive).
The contractor (订约人) was 20 to see his good worker go & asked if he could build just one more house as a 21 . The carpenter said yes, but over time it was easy to see that his 22 was not in his work. He resorted to shoddy workmanship and used 23 materials. It was an 24 way to end a dedicated career.
When the carpenter finished his work, his employer came to 25 the house. Then he handed the 26 to the carpenter and said, "This is your house... my gift to you."
The carpenter was 27 !
What a shame! If he had only known he was building his own house, he would have done it all so 28 .
So it is with us. We build 29 , a day at a time, often putting 30 our best into the building. Then, with a shock, we 31 we have to live in the house we have built. If we could do it over, we would do it much differently.
But, you cannot 32 . You are the carpenter, and every day you hammer a nail, place a board, or erect a wall. Someone once said, "Life is a do-it-yourself project." Your 33 , and the choices you make today, help build the "house" you will live in tomorrow. 34 , build 35 !
16. A. leave B. lead C. avoid D. gain
17. A. depend B. cheer C. enjoy D. satisfy
18. A. depend on B. receive C. benefit from D. miss
19. A. so B. but C. when D. even if
20. A. sorry B. glad C. disappointed D. cheerful
21. A. service B. personal favour C. work D. good end
22. A. curiosity B. energy C. heart D. patience
23. A. less good B. best C. solid D. valuable
24. A. rude B. wise C. wonderful D. unfortunate
25. A. sell B. buy C. inspect D. admire
26. A. house B. front-door key C. gift D. award
27. A. shocked B. satisfied C. silly D. tired
28. A. secretly B. rapidly C. willingly D. differently
29. A. our houses B. our lives C. our building D. our work
30. A. less than B. more than C. no more than D. no less than
31. A. promise B. decide C. realize D. consider
32. A. throw away B. apologize C. go ahead D. go back
33. A. character B. attitude C. force D. honesty
34. A. Therefore B. However C. Obviously D. Instead
35. A. simply B. personally C. gradually D. wisely
第三部分：阅读理解
阅读下列短文, 从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中，选出最佳选项。
A
We convey (传达) information through the position and movement of the body. We often use gestures or body movements to stress what we are saying. For example, when I lecture (演讲), I often use my hands to emphasize (强调) points or point to something on the blackboard. Some people use them more than others. The victory (胜利) sign, the OK sign, the goodbye wave and the blowing of a kiss are all popular gestures in America. It is important to recognize, however, that most gestures are not universally recognized. For example, although the OK gesture means acceptance in America, it has other meanings in other cultures. In France it means worthlessness. And in Greece, it is considered obscene (淫秽).
There are some sex differences in nonverbal behavior. In American culture, men tend to sit or stand with legs apart and hands outward, while women tend to keep legs together and hands at their sides. Women are also better than men at understanding nonverbal gestures.
A nonverbal behaviour is to have the tongue just slightly protruding (突出) from the mouth. A study showed that people were less willing to approach others who had their tongues showing. Perhaps this is why people often tend to avoid individuals with bad nonverbal behaviours. When we make decisions about other people, we learn to recognize nonverbal cues (提示) and interpret (理解) them along with verbal information.
36. From the passage we can know that ________.
A. body language in America is more popular than in other countries
B. the deferent cultures share the same body languages
C. the same gestures in deferent cultures may have the deferent meanings
D. body language is more important than words
37. Which of the following statements is TRUE according to the passage?
A. Women’s body language is easier to understand.
B. Women have a better understanding of body language than men.
C. In American culture, men care more about their gestures than women.
D. In American culture, men and women always employ the deferent gestures.
38. It may be concluded from this passage that ________.
A. body language can completely replace words
B. different cultures share different nonverbal behaviours
C. body language sounds louder than verbal information
D. body language can be helpful for us to communicate with each other
B
Most good interviewers will make an effort to establish and keep eye contact. Make sure that you do not find yourself looking down or away. If you wear glasses, be sure to buy the non-glare lenses. Do not stare.
Rapidly nodding your head can leave the impression that you are impatient and too eager to add something to the conversation -- if only the interviewer would let you. Slower nodding, on the other hand, emphasizes interest, shows that you are validating (确认) the comments of your interviewer, and encourages him to continue. Tilting (倾斜) the head slightly, when combined with eye contact and a natural smile, shows friendliness and approachability (可接近的).
Your smile is one of the most powerful positive body signals. Everybody looks better when they smile. Offer an unforced, confident smile. Avoid at all costs the technique that some applicants use: grinning idiotically (白痴般地裂口笑) for the length of the interview, no matter what. This will only communicate that you are insincere (虚假的).
It’s worth remembering that the mouth provides a seemingly limitless supply of opportunities to convey weakness. This may be done by touching the mouth frequently; "faking" a cough when confused with a difficult question; and /or gnawing (咬) on one’s lips absentmindedly (茫然地). Employing any of these "insincerity signs" when you are asked about say, why you lost your last job, will confirm (确认) or instill (慢慢灌输) suspicions about your honesty.
39. The mouth may make your weakness known by ________according to the passage.
A. pretending to be coughing B. having an unforced smile
C. blowing a kiss D. showing your teeth
40. The main purpose of this text is to ________.
A. tell you how to communicate with others effectively.
B. show you how to make yourself more understandable
C. remind you of respecting the interviewer.
D. give you some advice on facial signals for job interviews
41. What does the underlined word “suspicion” in the last paragraph mean?
A. understanding B. uncertainty C. expression D. agreement
42. Which facial signal can cause you to lose an opportunity of being employed?
A. Gnawing on one’s lips. B. A natural smile.
C. A natural smile. D. Touching the mouth occasionally.
C
About five states in Nigeria will experience a total eclipse (日蚀) of the sun on March 29, 2006, according to a forecast by the Ministry of Science and Technology this week.
An eclipse occurs in one of two ways: when the moon passes between the earth and the sun so that all or part of the sun cannot be seen for a time, or when the earth passes between the moon and the sun so that you cannot see all or part of the moon for a time. The first case is a solar eclipse or eclipse of the sun, which occurs as the earth enters the shadow of the moon. The second describes a lunar eclipse or eclipse of the moon, which happens when the moon enters the shadow of the earth.
More than 60 percent of Nigerians are uneducated, and eclipses in some parts of the country in the past have caused commotions in which people have been killed and property destroyed. Some Nigerians believe an eclipse is punishment from the gods for evil doing.
The March 29th eclipse would be the fifth in Nigeria’s history, and it is expected to last for 30 minutes — 9:15AM to 9:45AM, according to the official prediction. Nigeria witnessed eclipses in 1898, 1947, 1959, and 2001.
The shadows in an eclipse have a central dark part called umbra, and a less dark external section called penumbra. In the umbra, all the sun’s light is cut off, and this is called total eclipse; while in the penumbra, only a part of the light from the sun is cut off from the moon, and it is called partial eclipse.
Five Nigerian states — Oyo, Kwara, Niger, Zamfara, and Katsina — are expected to have total eclipse, while other parts of the country will experience partial eclipse.
43. This passage is mainly written to ________.
A. predict a eclipse of the sun in Nigeria
B. compare a eclipse of the sun with a eclipse of the moon
C. provide information on a coming eclipse of the sun in Nigeria
D. show that people in Nigeria receive little education
44. If this passage is taken from a newspaper, which section is the passage probably from?
A. Entertainment. B. Economy. C. Education. D. Science.
45. The best title for this passage is ________.
A. What Is an Eclipse
B. How Foolish People in Nigeria Are
C. Nigeria Expects Solar Eclipse
D. Solar Eclipse Happens on March 29, 2006
第四部分：写作
第一节 主观阅读
阅读下面短文，根据文章内容回答下列问题。
There are a lot of differences between Americans and Chinese in romance. The main differences are in physical actions and oral expression. In physical actions, Americans are more open. They hug each other when they meet together and give kisses to each other when they want to express their love. They share their emotions directly.
Unlike Americans, Chinese are shy about showing their feelings physically. They always keep their emotions under control. The only romantic hint is to hold hands with each other in their own room. They take working hard and being responsible as ways to show their romantic feelings to their spouses (配偶). In oral expression, Americans say sweet words to each other any time, such as "I love you", "Honey", etc. They send cards to show the feelings of apology and being sorry, greetings and appreciation. Americans are open-minded. In contrast, Chinese rarely say "I like you" to each other. Even if they do something wrong, they don’t apologize to their spouses. They think that there is nothing to be sorry for between a couple. They believe that buying gifts for each other is a waste of money. They think that to do their best and support the family in the wealthy condition shows their love to the spouse. That is much better than saying sweet words. In conclusion, Americans are open and direct, but Chinese are shy. There is really a lot of difference in romantic expression between the American and Chinese.
46. How do Americans show romance in a physical way?
_______________________________________________________________________________
47. What can we conclude from Americans’ romantic expressions?
_______________________________________________________________________________
48. What do Americans and Chinese do to show congratulations to someone?
_______________________________________________________________________________
49. What do Chinese do to show their romantic feeling to their spouses?
_______________________________________________________________________________
50. Why do Chinese think it unnecessary to apologize to one’s wife or husband?
第二节 书面表达
假设你班将举行一次英语晚会，主题为“中学生应该如何使用家长给的零花钱 ”。请你根据提示写一篇发言稿。
使用方式
好处
存入银行
养成节约的习惯
购买书籍
获取知识
其他
培养兴趣（音乐、体育、集邮等）
注意：1. 词数100左右;
2. 参考词汇: 零花钱 pocket money 节约thrift
选做题：
阅读下面短文，在各横线上写出空白处所缺的单词 (每空一词)，使补足后的短文意思通顺、结构完整。
And with this prize that I have 51 as a Prize of Peace, I am going to try to make the home 52 many people who 53 no home. Because I believe that 54 begins at home, and if we can create a 55 for the poor I think that more 56 more love will spread. When I pick up a person from the street, hungry, I give 57 a plate of rice, a piece of bread to have him satisfied. I have removed that hunger. But a 58 who is shut out, who feels unwanted, unloved, terrified, the person who has been thrown out from society — that poverty is so full of hurt and so unbearable… And so let us always meet each 59 with a smile, for the smile is the beginning of love, and once we begin to love each other naturally we want to do 60 .
检测题参考答案、重点解析
参考答案
1-5 DBBDC 6-10 BABDB 11-15 CCAAC
16-20 ACDBA 21-25 BCADC 26-30 BADBA 31-35 CDBAD
36-40 CBDAA 41-45 BDCDC
46. They show love to their lovers by hugging and kissing.
47. From their ways of showing romance, we may conclude that Americans are more open and direct than the Chinese while the Chinese are a bit shy and indirect.
48. They will show it in different ways. Americans will send cards to each other, while the Chinese won’t do the same. They think it a waste of money to do that.
49. They think the best way is to work harder and be responsible for their family, which they think is to show their romantic feelings to their spouse.
50. Because they think they are a couple and there is nothing wrong between them.
书面表达
One possible version:
Dear friends, I’m very glad to have the chance to speak to so many classmates here at present. Today I’d like to talk about how middle school students should deal with their pocket money properly. As is known to all, we can easily get pocket money from our parents if we want to. But it is no good for us spending it at will. In my opinion, we may spend some on books and magazines, from which we can get a lot of knowledge and pleasure. If we love music, sports or stamp collecting, we can develop the interests in them by using some of our pocket money. On the other hand, if possible, we’d better put some in the bank, which will help us form the habit of thrift. Don’t you think so? I really hope you will give me your opinions about it. Thank you.
选做题:
51. received / got 52. for 53. have 54. love 55. home
56. and 57. him 58. person 59. other 60. something
重点解析
1. D。university读音是以辅音音素开头，所以用a；art在这里指“美术，艺术”，是泛指，所以前面不加the。
2. B。prevent常用prevent sb (from) doing sth结构，表示“防止；预防”；avoid意为“避免”，后面跟名词或动词-ing形式作宾语；protect意为“保护”；allow意为“允许”。根据句意，“虽然Tyron很生气，但是他头脑很冷静”，就不会做不恰当的事情，也不会“冲进领导的办公室”，所以用avoid最合适。
3. B。根据句意，“在这张地图上，这颗红星____中国的首都。”红星与首都在此只能是代表的关系，所以不能用A（告诉）、C（代替）或者D（意味着），所以选B，represent意为“代表”。
4. D。本句选用过去进行时，指那时动作正在发生。
5. C。usually意为“通常”；curiously意为“好奇地；奇怪地”；similarly意为“类似地”；particularly意为“独特地；显著地”。根据句意，“通过锻炼来强健身体”与“通过学习来提高智力”之间具有一种类比的关系，所以用similarly最合适。
6. B。in a word意为“总之；一句话；总而言之”；in general意为“大体上；一般地”；in all意为“总共”；in total意为“总共”。通过句意可以看出，“大多数青少年喜欢听摇滚乐”是一种一般的普通的情况，所以选B。
7. A。significant意为“有意义的；重大的；重要的”；major意为“主要的；重要的；大的”；considerate意为“考虑周到的”；greater意为“更大的”。根据句意，这里指“一个比较重大的改变”，用more来修饰，不能用major，因为major本身已经具有“比较”的含义；greater只能用much来修饰；considerate不合题意，所以选significant。
8. B。what if这里指“如果……将会怎样”，表示对一种假设的提问；if only指“要是……就好了”；as if意为“好像”；even if意为“即使”。根据句意，这里应选A。
9. D。根据后半句说，“工厂确认足以满足人们的需要”，那么前提应该是“生产各种各样的钢琴”应该已经成为事实，所以用现在完成时，动词-ing形式作状语。
10. B。encourage意为“鼓励”；express意为“表达”；explain意为“解释”；exchange意为“交流”。句意为：学会很好地表达自己，是现代教育的一个很重要的内容。
11. C。attitude to / towards指“对……的态度”；appearance指“出现”；approach指“方法；途径”，后常接to；altitude指“海拔；高度”。根据句意，这里指一种“教学方法”，所以用approach。注：Big6 Model 的全称是Big6 Model of Information Problem-Solving，指Big6信息问题解决模式，属于“问题解决”式的研究学习。
12. C。keep in touch with意为“保持联络”；within reach of意为“离得很近；在范围内”；out of touch with意为“失去联系；不再了解情况”；out of reach of意为“够不着”。
句中指曾祖父对现代潮流不闻不问，所以选C。
13. A。交际用语。由情景可知，B将一本书借给了A，A觉得这本书很有趣，故B说“我很高兴你喜欢”，A接着说：“谢谢你借给了我这么长的时间”。That’s all right回答感谢和道歉；Don’t mention it(别人道谢时回答)不客气；I hope you like it指期望对方喜欢，而事实是对方的确很喜欢，所以选A。
14. A。must have done表示对过去情况有把握的推测。
15. C。常用sb / sth be likely to do或it’s likely +从句，表示“可能”；certain表示“确定的”；probable后常跟that从句表示“很有可能”；be sure to do sth指“一定；务必去做某事”。
16. A。第一句说“老木匠准备退休了”，由此可以得知，他要离开建房子的行业。但是并没有avoid（避开、躲避）的意思，更不是lead（领导）、gain（获得）的意思。
17. C。“enjoy his extended family”指享受家庭带来的天伦之乐。respect指“尊敬”；cheer指“欢呼”；satisfy指“满足；使满意”，三项都不合语境。
18. D。因为退休后就没有薪水了，所以用miss the paycheck表示“得不到薪水”。depend on指“依靠；依赖”；receive指“收到；接到”；benefit from指“受益于”。
19. B。前后是转折关系。虽然没有薪水了，但他还是想退休，因为生活还能过得去。
20. A。从后文的good worker可以看出，他在老板的眼中，是个好工人，所以老板对他的退休表示“遗憾”，而不是B（高兴的）、C（失望的）、D（愉快的；高兴的）。
21. B。老板请他在离去之前，再帮忙建一座房子，所以用“a personal favour”。service指“服务”；work指“工作”；end指“结局”，都不合语境。
22. C。从后文他对建房子的态度可知，“他的心思（heart）已经不在工作上了。”curiosity指“好奇心”；energy指“精力”；patience指“耐性”。
23. A。他这座房子没有建好，是因为用的是劣质材料。
24. D。他建的这座劣质房子竟然成了老板送给自己的礼物，以如此方式结束自己的事业，不能不说是一种“不幸”。
25. C。inspect有“检查”的意思，房子建成后，老板来验收房子，而不是A（卖）、B（买）、D（赞美）。
26. B。因为老板说“房子是你的了，我给你的礼物”，自然递给他的是房门的“钥匙”。
27. A。木匠没有想到自己建的这座房子竟然是给自己的，所以听到老板的话，木匠的反应只能是“震惊”（shocked）。
28. D。如果知道房子是为自己建的，他就不这样了，会以不同的方式建房子。differently指“不同地”；secretly指“秘密地”；rapidly指“迅速地”；willingly指“欣然地”。
29. B。本文作者把“建房子”比作“创造生活”，所以选life。
30. A。在创造生活的时候，有时会像木匠那样犯“不尽心尽力”的错误。less than指“小于”；more than指“多于”；no more than指“只是”；no less than指“正如”。
31. C。realize指“意识到”的意思。句意为“突然意识到，我们将不得不住进我们自己建造的房子”，这里指一种醒悟，所以不能用promise（允许）、decide（决定）、consider（考虑；照顾）。
32. D。这里指生活不会重来。一旦已经建成了房子，那么就不能返回。go back指“回去”；throw away指“扔掉；丢弃”；throw off指“扔开；脱掉”；go ahead指“前进”。
33. B。从全文来看，木匠错就错在他的态度不对，自以为这是最后一座房子，因而没有尽心尽力地去完成，导致最后的遗憾，所以这里作总结的时候，“态度”是很重要的一个内容，同时还包含“你现在所做的决定”，将决定你未来的生活。
34. A。根据tomorrow（明天），意指“未来”，可以确定用将来时。
35. D。根据木匠的经验，这里作者给读者提出了建议，希望今天做的每件事情都是认认真真地做的，所以应该给自己营造一个很好的环境。所以simply（简单地）、personally（亲自）、gradually（逐渐地）都不符合语境，wisely指“明智地”。
36. C。文中举例说到了许多关于美国的身势语的内容，但是并没有说身势语在美国就比在其他国家更流行，所以A错误；从第一段中“… most gestures are not universally recognized”以及后文关于表达OK的身势语在不同国家表示的不同含义，说明身势语在不同文化环境中表达的含义是不相同的，所以B错误，而C刚好表达了这样的意思，所以C正确；全文讲述了身势语在日常交流中的重要作用，但是并不是说比语言更重要，所以D错误。
37. B。第二段主要讲述了由于性别的不同，从而在非语言行为中也存在着许多不同，而女性比男性更能很好地理解身势语，所以B项正确。A项说，女性的身势语比较容易理解，与文意有悖；C项，在美国文化中，男性比女性更关注姿态，而文中主要是介绍了男性与女性在站着或坐着时的不同姿态的介绍，所以不能得出本结论；从第二段第一句“There are some sex differences in non-verbal behaviour”知，有一些差异，但并不是D说的“always have different gestures”。
38. D。从最后一段知，我们可以通过结合非语言（如身势语）的提示，透过语言信息来了解一个人，所以D项说，身势语可以帮助了解一个人，是正确的。A项说身势语决定了一个人的个性，未免有失偏颇；B项说语言信息不如身势语有用，显然不对，文中意思是身势语能够辅助了解一个人；C项说身势语比语言信息有效，也是不正确的。
39. A。A项说假装正在咳嗽，这是用来掩饰内心虚弱的一种方式，从文中最后一段可以看出；B（从容不迫地微笑）、C（飞吻）、D（露出牙齿地笑）都是自信的表现。
40. A。根据文中最后一段可以看出，咬嘴唇是“convey weakness”的一种方式，所以如果在面试的时候，老有这样的表现的话，那就很容易丧失掉这次机会。自然的微笑、自然的眼神交流以及偶尔摸嘴，都不是很大的问题。
41. B。根据前面“insincerity signs”以及问道“为什么会失去上次的工作”知，对待这样不真诚的行为，面试者就会更加肯定“对你的忠诚度”的“怀疑”。understanding指“理解”；uncertainty指“不确定”；expression指“表达”；agreement指“同意；一致”。
42. D。全文主要讲解了关于面部表情的建议，所以D正确。“如何有效地与人交流”、“如何让别人更能理解自己的意思”、“提醒你要尊敬面试者”都不是本文的主要意思。
43. C。该文主要介绍的是即将在尼日利亚发生的日食。故选C。
44. D。文中很明确地介绍了日蚀是怎样发生的，以及日全食与日偏食的原因等，所以本文涉及的是日食方面的科普知识，故选D。
45. C。标题概括题。C项标题准确反映了本文的主题内容。
聚焦 -ing形式作状语
-ing形式作状语，可表示时间、原因、方式、伴随、条件等。如：
1. She sat at the desk reading a newspaper. (伴随)
2. Hang Wei went to school, taking a train. (方式)
3. While reading the book, he nodded from time to time. (时间)
4. Not having received a reply, we wrote again. (原因)
5. Heating water，we can change it into vapor． (条件)
注意：①-ing形式作状语，其逻辑主语应与句子的主语一致。
②-ing形式前可有while, when, unless, though, if等连词。
[高考真题]
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
1. _______ from heart trouble for years, Professor White has to take some medicine with him wherever he goes. (上海2001春)
A. Suffered B. Suffering C. Having suffered D. Being suffered
2. Finding her car stolen, _______. (上海2001)
A. a policeman was asked to help B. the area was searched thoroughly
C. it was looked for everywhere D. she hurried to a policeman for help
3. He sent me an e-mail, ________ to get further information. (上海2000)
A. hoped B. hoping C. to hope D. hope
4. While building a tunnel through the mountain, _______. (上海2000春)
A. an underground lake was discovered
B. there was an underground lake discovered
C. a lake was discovered underground
D. the workers discovered an underground lake
5. Suddenly, a tall man driving a golden carriage ________ the girl and took her away, ________ into the woods. (上海2004春)
A. seizing; disappeared B. seized; disappeared
C. seizing; disappearing D. seized; disappearing
6. _______ in the queue for half an hour, Tom suddenly realized that he had left his wallet at home. (北京2004)
A. To wait B. Have waited C. Having waited D. To have waited
7. European football is played in 80 countries, ______ it the most popular sport in the world. (NMET 1998)
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
8. ______ the programme, they have to stay there for another two weeks. (广东2004)
A. Not completing B. Not completed
C. Not having completed D. Having not completed
9. Though _______ money, his parents managed to send him to university.
(上海2002)
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
10. Having been attacked by terrorists, _______. (上海2004)
A. doctors came to their rescue B. the tall building collapsed
C. an emergency measure was taken D. warnings were given to tourists
Key: 1-5 CDBDD 6-10 CACCB
课件26张PPT。 Unit 4
Body language
Learning about languagedefence, likely, Italy, canteen, represent, dash, approach, association, cheek, flightAnswer key for Ex.1Discovering useful words and expressions approached, Jordan, cheek, curiously, dashed,
misunderstood, contraryAnswer key for Ex.2crossroads, adult, major, dormitory, greeted, representing, association, spoken, Colombia, curious, flightAnswer key for Ex.3 Answer key for Ex.1 (P.29)Discovering useful structures: Using structures (P.64) 2 Fill in the blanks with the correct forms
of the verbs in the box and then put
the sentences into Chinese.
be bore count drive encourage
enter get speak wear whisper1. It seemed that he avoided ________
too close to her.
2. The news that the Chinese team won the
gold medal was very ___________ .
3. It is clear that your _______ English will
greatly improve if you can practice ________
whenever you can.gettingencouragingspokenspeaking4. I saw them ____________ to each other,
obviously they do not want to be heard
by others.
5. I watched the people ________ the theatre,
___________ a total of 547.
6. The man with sun-glasses _______ the
sunglasses is a detective.
7. _______ ill, he did not take part in the
sports meeting.whisperingenteringwearingBeingcounting 8. _________ his car around is his main
hobby.
9. I almost fell asleep when I saw that
_________ film.DrivingboringThe –ing form as the Attributive and AdverbialGrammarV-ing 形式V-ing 形式由 “do＋ing” 构成, 其
否定形式是 “not doing”, V-ing 可以
带宾语或状语构成 V-ing 短语, 没有
人称和数的变化, 但有时态和语态
的变化。现在分词作定语,当分词单独做定语时,放在
所修饰的名词前,说明其修饰名词的性质或
特征,表示供作…之用”和“…的”。现在分词作定语a walking stick(a stick used for walking)drinking water(water for drinking)a waiting room(a room for waiting) working peoplethe rising sun动词 -ing 形式是短语, 应放在所修饰的名词后,
相当于一个定语从句。They are visitors coming from several countries.who come from several countries.Three days later I received a letter offering me
the job.which offered me the job.The girl standing there is my classmate.who stands there现在分词作状语现在分词作状语时, 分词的逻辑主语必须是
句子的主语, 分词必须和句中的主语含有逻辑
上的主谓关系, 否则不能用现在分词作状语。
但要注意它的各种形式变化:主动形式 被动形式
V-ing being V-ed
having V-ed having been V-ed 一般式完成式e. g. Hearing the bell, the students began to
enter the classroom.
听见铃声, 学生们开始走进教室。
(听见和进入两个动作同时发生)
The building being built now is our new
library. 现在正在建造的这栋楼房室我们
的新图书馆。(being built为现在分词的被动
形式, 表示动作正在进行之中)Having done the work, he went home.
完成了工作, 他就回家了。现在分词在句中作状语, 修饰谓语动词或
整个句子, 表示动作发生的原因、时间、
方式、结果、条件、伴随状况等。现在
分词一般不用作表目的地状语(通常用
不定式表目的地状语)。Walking in the street, I came across an old
friend of mine.
(=When I was walking in the street, I came
across an old friend of mine.)While waiting for the bus, he read a copy of
China Daily.
(=While waiting for the bus,he read a copy of
China Daily.)1)表时间状语2) 表原因状语
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
(=as he was ill, he didn’t go to school.)Being a student, you should study hard.
(=Since you are a student, you should study hard.)既然你是一个学生, 你就应该努力学习。由于想到它或许在家, 所以我就给他打了电话。Thinking he might be at home, I called him.
(As I thought he might be at home, I called him.) 3)表方式、伴随情况的状语: 作伴随状语的
分词表示的动作, 必须是主语的一个动作,
或是与谓语所表示地动作(或状态)同时发生,
或是对谓语表示的动词(或状态)作进一步
地补充说明。e.g. He sat on the sofa, watching TV.
(=He sat on the sofa, and watched TV.)他们笑着谈着走进了教室。_____________________ , they went into
the classroom.他斜靠(lean)着墙站着。He stood leaning against the wall.
(＝He stood and leaned against the wall.)Laughing and talking4) 表结果
e.g. Her mother died in 1990, leaving her
with her younger brother.
(=Her mother died in 1990, and left her
with her younger brother.)全国到处在传唱这首歌曲, 使它成了一首
最受欢迎的歌曲。The song is sung all over the country,
________________________________.making it the most popular song5) 表条件Using your head, you will find a way.
(=If you use your head, you will find a way.)一直往前走, 你就会看到一座白色地房子。______________, you will see a white house.Walking ahead6) 与逻辑主语构成独立主格:
　I waiting for the bus, a bird fell on my heard．
　我等汽车时,一只鸟落到我头上。
　All the tickets having been sold out, they
went away disappointedly.
　所有的票已经卖光了,他们失望地离开了。
　Time permitting, we'll do another two
exercises.
如果时间允许, 我们将做另两个练习。有时也可用with (without) +名词(代词宾格)
+分词形式。
With the lights burning, he fell asleep.
他点着灯睡着了。
7)作独立成分:
Judging from(by) his appearance, he must
be an actor. 从外表看, 他一定是个演员。HomeworkFinish exercise 2 on P29 and
exercise 1-3 on P64 in the
workbook.课件67张PPT。Unit 4
Body language
ReadingTo communicate with each other.How can you communicate with
someone if you cannot speak?
Give an example.What do you think is the purpose of language? Pre-reading One form of communication without using any words.gesturepostureDefinition of Body Languageeye contactfacial expressionsmilecrysurpriseangryhappyfearWhat are the following facial expressions?What do people in different countries usually do when meeting?Japan: bowChina, Britain:
handshakeSome western countries: hugRussia, France,
Arab: kiss ReadingCOMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?It tells us about the importance
and necessity of body language
and its differences between
different cultures.The main idea of the whole text:Fast ReadingDivide the passage into several
parts and find out the main idea.You are sent to CIA to meet this
year’s international students.Part 1:
(Para 1)Examples of learned or cultural
“body language”.Part 2
(Para2-3)Summary of body language.Part 4:
(Para 5)Different people has different
body language.Part 3:
(Para 4)Find out the two mistakes. Mr. Garcia Julia SmithThe first mistakefromfrom(Columbia)(Britain)He approaches Ms
Smith by _______ ____
_________ and ______
her on the ________.She _______ ______
appearing _________
and take a few steps
_______ ______ Mr.
Garcia.shouldertouchingherkissedcheekstepped backsurprisedaway fromCareful
ReadingThe second mistakea JapaneseGeorge Cookfrom(Canada)He ________
______ ______
_______ to the
Japanese.He ________ to Mr.
Cook and his nose
_________ Mr.
Cook’s _______
_______.bowedtouchedmovinghandreached his handout Mr. Garcia (Columbia)Julia Smith (Britain)George Cook (Canada)a Japaneseman from
Colombiakiss on the
cheekbowingeveryoneeveryoneJulia
SmithAkira
Nagatawoman from
BritainComplete the chart.man from
Canadashaking
handsshaking hands
noddingAhmed
AzizDarlene
Coulonman from
Jordaneveryonewoman
from Francepeople she
knowsApproach others closely and are more likely
to touch them.
Bow
Shake hands.
Shake hands and stand quite close to other
men. Nod to women but do not shake hands
with them.
Countries: Japan , Jordan , Columbia,
CanadaColumbiaJapanCanadaJordanWays to greet each other1. Mr. Garcia kissed Miss Julia Smith
because they have known each other
well.
2. George Cook reaches his hand out
in order to shake hands with the
Japanese.
3. All cultures don’t greet each the
same way.F True or false?TT 4. When a Japanese bows to you, he
is apologizing to you for what he
has done.
5. French people, like the English, will
keep a certain distance from others.
6. Men from all Muslin countries will
not shake hands with women. F FF 7. From the passage we can see
western cultures are better than
eastern cultures.
8. It’s necessary to study body
language because it helps us to
get better understanding among
people from different cultures. FT 1. What did the writer go to the Capital
International Airport for yesterday?
A. To see off his friend.
B. To meet international students.
C. To buy a flight ticket.
D. To meet some visitors coming from
several countries. BChoose the best answer.2. Where is Tony Garcia from?
A. Britain. B. Japan.
C. Colombia. D. Canada.
3. From Paragraph 2 we know that
Japanese prefer to ____ when they
are introduced to others.
A. bow B. shake hands
C. kiss each other
D. touch others’ shoulders CA4. According to the text, men from the
Middle East often ____.
A. nod heads and wave hands to girls
B. touch others’ heads when they first
meet
C. kiss each other twice on each cheek
when they are introduced to others
D. stand quite close to other men when
they talkD1. Why are the international students
coming to China?They are coming to China to study
at Beijing University.Answer the questions.2. Why is Julia Smith surprised?
3. Why did the author move back from
Ahmed Aziz?Julia Smith is surprised that Mr Garcia touches her shoulder and kisses on the cheek when they meet.The author moved back because he
comes too close to talk to the author.4. What do French people often do
when they meet people they know?They shake hands & kiss each
other twice on each cheek.5. Can we expect people everywhere
to act the same? Why? No. Because people from different
culture or countries act quite
differently sometimes.6. Is the author of this passage male or
female? How do you know?The author is male. Ahmed Aziz will
not shake hands with women, but he
shakes with the author.7. What were the two mistakes that the
author noticed?He noticed that the Colombian man
kissed the British woman, but in her
culture, a kiss from a stranger is not
acceptable. He also noticed that the
Japanese man bowed just as the
Canadian man started to shake hands,
so one man’s nose touched the other
man’s hand.8. Who seemed to prefer to keep more
physical distance from others? Who
seemed to prefer closer physical distance? The British woman, Julia, and probably
the Canadian man, George, seemed to
prefer to keep more physical distance
from others. The Colombian man, Tony,
and the Jordanian man, Ahmed, seemed
to prefer closer physical distance. 9. Did any students have similar greeting
customs? If so, which ones?Yes. Tony from Colombia and Darlene
from France had a similar greeting custom
– a kiss. George from Canada and Ahmed
from Jordan also had a similar greeting
custom – a handshake, but Ahmed shakes
hands only with men.10. “ When in Rome, do as the Romans
do.” What do you think this famous
saying means?This saying means that when we are in
a certain place, we should follow the
customs of the people who live in that
place, not our own customs.11. Why do you think we need to study
body language?It is quite necessary for us to study
body language if we don’t want to
cause any misunderstanding in
communication /so that we don’t
misunderstand each other.Work in groups of four.
Read the following questions
and then choose one to discuss
together.1. If you meet a foreigner who comes
up close to you to talk, what countries
might he be from? How can you show
him that you are uncomfortable with
that?2. If a girl in shorts goes into a Muslim
house and a man takes her outside
pointing at her shoes and shorts, what
should she do? Guess why he is so
particular.
3. What are some situation where body
language is the only form of
communication? Why?Language PointsYesterday, another student and I, representing
our university’s student association, went to the
Capital International Airport to meet this year’s
international students.
昨天, 我和另一个学生代表我们学生会,
到首都国际机场迎接今年的国际学生。
1) represent 动词, “代表” 如：To be chosen to represent their country is the
highest honor for most athletes.
能被选拔出来代表国家参赛, 是多数运动员
的最高荣誉。
I know who you are and whom you represent.
我知道你是谁并代表谁。
【拓展】
representation n. 代表; 表现; 描写
representative adj．有代表性的; 典型的用represent的适当形式完成下列句子。
He was picked out from the whole class
to _________ them at the other school.
This painting is a _____________ of a
storm at sea.
Is a questionnaire answered by 500
people truly _____________ of national
opinion?representrepresentationrepresentative 2) association 名词, 表示“协会; 社团;
学会”, “联合; 交往”。如：
Do you belong to any professional
association?
你属于哪个专业学会?
He is a member of the Association of
University Teachers.
他是大学教师联合会的一名成员。 His English improved enormously because of his association with British people. 因为他和英国人有来往, 所以他的英语突飞猛进。
【拓展】
associate v．
把……联系起来; 由……联想到
in association with
与……联合; 与……有关联 We are working in association with a number
of local companies to raise money for the
homeless.
There has always been a close association
between these two schools. 我们与本地一些公司联合为无家可归
的人筹款。这两所学校一向有密切联系。英译汉She associated happiness with
having money.
I don’t want to associate myself
with them any more. 她把幸福和有钱联想到一起。我不愿再和他们交往了。 2. I saw several young people enter the
waiting area looking around curiously.
我看见几个年轻人走进了等候区, 好奇地向
四处张望。
curious adj. 好奇的; 有求知欲的; 奇怪的
curiosity n. 好奇心
out of curiosity 出于好奇
be curious about sth 对某事感到好奇
be curious to do sth 很想做某事; 渴望做某事As a little girl, she was curious about the
origin of human beings.
The tourists were surrounded by the
curious children.
用curious的适当形式完成下列句子。
I am ________ about what has happened.
A deer behind the tree looked at us
__________.
She has burning _________ to know
what’s going on.
They were ________ to know where he
had gone.curious curiouslycuriositycurious3. After I met them …introduced them to each
other, … Tony approached Julia, touched her
shoulder and kissed her on the cheek.verb + sb. in/ on/ by + the 身体部位
1) approach n. 靠近; 临近; 接近
The enemy ran away at our approach.
在我们接近时, 敌人跑了。
We heard the approach of the train.
我们听见火车开过来了。 n. 方法; 步骤; 通路; 通道
The approach to the house was a narrow path.
通往这房子的路是一条狭窄的小径。
The best approach to learn a foreign language
is the study of the spoken language.
学习外语的最好的途径是学口语。
at the approach of winter 冬季将临的时候
be easy of approach 容易到达; 容易接近
on the approach of death 临死的时候v. 走近; 靠近; 接近
You must approach the bird very quietly or it
will fly away.
你必须悄悄地走近那只鸟, 否则它会飞走的。
The summer is approaching. 夏季即将来临。
approach sb. about sth. 为某事同某人打交道
approach sb. for information 向某人了解情况
approach sb. with a suggestion 向某人建议
2) touch
vt. 触摸, 接触, 触及, 轻触
I told you not to touch my things.
touch sb./ sth. (with sth.)
感动(某人)触动某人(某人的感情)
Her miserable experience touched us
all deeply / touched our hearts with sorrow.
她经历很不幸, 我们深受感动 / 我们都很伤心。 n. 接触, 联系
get / keep in touch with sb.
与……取得/保持联系
be in/ out of ~ （with sb.)
与……有/无联系
We’ve been out of touch for years.4. introduce sb. to sb.
把某人介绍给某人
introduce sth. into… 采用; 引进Please allow me to introduce Mr Smith.
Potatoes were first introduced into Europe
from South America.introduction n. 　
a letter of ~　介绍信
make a self-introduction 作自我介绍
make ~ to each other 互相介绍
Yao Ming is a person needs no ~. 5. apologize v. 道歉, 认错
apologize to sb. for sth. / doing sth.
He apologized to her for not going to her
party. 他因为没有出席她举行的宴会而
向她表示歉意。
apology n.
make an apology to sb. for (doing) sth.
accept / refuse an apologynot … nor 既不……又不……
not all 连用形成部分否定6. Not all cultures greet each other the same
way, nor are they comfortable in the same way
with touching or distance between people.
各种文化背景下的人相互问候的方式不尽相同,
身体接触和相互间距的程度也不尽相同。nor / neither 否定副词, 常置于句首,
此时句子要倒装, 即助动词/系动词/
情态动词放在主语之前。
I don’t like her, nor/neither does Lily.
I am not a nurse, nor/ neither is Lily.
nor = and also not / neither
方式状语= while they are touching…
or being…7. In the same way that people
communicate with spoken language, they
also express their feelings using unspoken
“language” through keeping physical
distance, actions or posture.1) that引导的是方式定语从句。
The way that/ in which/或不用关联词。2) using引导的是状语, v-ing做状语。3)express vt. (用语言, 神色, 动作等)表达,
表示(感情, 意见)
express sth. (to sb.)
The guests express their thanks before leaving.
你对我的帮助, 我感激不尽。
I can’t express to you how grateful I am for
your help.
express oneself (清楚地)表达自己的意思
他仍然不能用英语表达自己的意思。
He is still unable to express himself in Englishexpress n. 快车(=express train)
The 8 am express to Beijing.
(邮局, 铁路, 公路等部门提供的) 速递,
速运
send goods by express 特快货运
expression n. 表达, 表情
a happy expression 愉快的神情4) spoken English
written English
English-speaking countriesI don’t do well in ____ English.
A. speaks B. to speak
C. spoken D. speak
We must practise ____ English every day.
A. to speak B. speak
C. in speaking D. speakingCD8. likely adj. 1) 很可能的[+to-v][+that]John is likely to be in London this autumn. 今年秋天约翰可能在伦敦。
It is likely to rain.
(句子中的it是天气, 并不是形式主语)
2) 适当的, 正合要求的 (+for)
The park is a likely place for the picnic. 这公园倒是个适合野餐的地方。
adv. 很可能We will most likely be late. 我们很有可能会迟到。 辨析: possible, likely, probable
1) possible 作形容词意为“有可能的”, 在三个
词中语气最弱, 强调客观上有可能性, 但常常
有“实际希望很小”的暗示, 在句中作表语和
定语, 通常情况下不能用人作主语, 而以事物
作主语。一般用it作形式主语, 构成
It’s possible that ... 或
It is possible (for sb) to do ...句型。 2) likely 既可作形容词又可作副词用, 意为
“很可能发生的”, 语气较possible强,
较probable弱。它侧重于从表面看来某事
很有可能发生, 与probable意思接近, 有时
二者可以通用, 含义区别也不大。
它的主语可以指人, 也可以指一件事，
其后可以接不定式, 也可用于
It is likely that ... 结构中。3) probable 作形容词意为“可能发生的”、
“有可能成为现实的”, 表示事情十有八九
要发生, 在三个词中语气最强。常用作表语
或定语, 也不能用指人的词作主语, 而以
表示事物的词作主语。通常也用it作形式主语,
其后接that从句, 构成“It is probable that ...”
句型。9. general
1) adj. 普遍的, 全面的
A matter of ~ concern/ interest
普遍(公众)关心/感兴趣的事情
Air-conditioner is in general use now.
2) 总的, 整体的
general idea of the passage
In general 大体上, 通常, 总的来讲
In general, he is a good guy.generally speaking/frankly speaking
honestly speaking10. avoid vt. 避开, 避免
avoid (sth / doing)
I think she is avoiding me.
I avoid meeting him.
avoidable adj.
It is unavoidable to make mistakes in
our life. It is a _______ problem parking your car
in Beijing.
2. Is that Wang Li’s friend from Wuxi? I’d like
him to _________ her to me.majorintroduceComplete the following sentences
with the words and expressions
from the reading.3. As my English vocabulary is very limited,
very often I express my meaning with the
help of ________________.
4. There is a saying that _______ speak
louder than words.
5. Blind people have to understand people’s
feelings through _______ language.
body languageactionsspoken6. Although blind people are not __________
understand your body language, they can
still use body language to _________ their
own ideas.
7. When you ___________ blind people, they
cannot tell if they know you until you
begin to speak. likely toexpressapproach8. I am always _______ about how he _______
bumping into others or falling sown while
walking on the street.
9. The ________ opinion is that the ______
government should take action to help the
blind people
10. In ________, it is better not to kiss
somebody you don’t know as you may
surprise them.
11. My leader wants me to ___________ her
at the meeting.curiousavoidsgenerallocalgeneralrepresentHomework Copy down the new words.
2. Finish the exercises on pages
28 and 29. Pay attention to the
useful words, expressions and
structures.课件61张PPT。Unit 4
Body language
Using language Besides words, how can we know what a person is thinking or feeling?By watching his or her body languagethe way a person stands
the way of folding his or her arms
the way to move his or her hands Discussionangry shysilent laughing You’re great!Come and join us!I’m listening carefully!What are they trying to tell us?How are they expressing themselves?Please stop!Nice to meet you!I’m sorry!Give me a little time!I’m thinking!It’s important.I give up.OK!mysterious smilepleased smilesuccessful smileThink of a situation in which

you communicate with a smile.A smile is a universally understood
body language.To express
almost
any emotionto apologize
to greet
to ask for help
to start a conversation
to make people happy
to get through difficultysmileUniversal gesturesA smile does not always mean that one is happy.A smile can hide other feelings, such as anger, fear or worry.If someone “loses face” they may smile to hide it.A smile usually intends to put people at ease.Body language is never as important
as spoken language.
2. If you are angry at a person, you
might turn your back to him or her.Fast Reading: True or false.FToften more3. You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
You do not threaten a person by refusing to speak. You threaten a person by physical action.F4. If you stand with your arms across your body, you are always protecting yourself from being physically attacked.
You may be protecting yourself from a conversation you do not want, or you may be showing that you do not
agree with someone.F5. If you sit looking away from a person, or with your back turned, you are saying you are not interested in that person.
6. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.TT7. Body language is the same all over the world.
Body language is sometimes the same, but it is sometimes quite different.
8. Most people can understand each other if they try.FTsimilar body language 1.frowning
or turning
one’s back
to someoneto show anger2. closing
one’s hand
and shaking
it at someoneto threaten that person3. nodding the head up and downto show agreementCareful
readingsimilar body language 4. shaking the head to show disagreement
or refusal5. looking away from a person or yawning to show no interest to the person6. standing, holding your arms across your chestto protect yourself from an unwanted conversationsimilar body language 7. sitting, looking at and turning towards the person you are talking to8. rolling your eyes and turn your head awayto show you are interestedto show you do not believe what you hear or you do not like itdifferent body language1.children’s looking directly at an adult in Asia and South Americanot good behavior 2.children’s not looking directly at the teacher in North Americato get punishment from their teachers because they think the children are not telling the truth1. standing too close
to your boss or teacher2. a hug to your boss or teachernot acceptable probably not a good idea to show respectBody language is used by people to
_______ their thoughts and opinions and
to _____________ with each other.
When you talk with others, you are not
just using words, but also using facial
expressions as well as ________. Just
like words, body language _______
from culture to culture. For example,
in manyexpresscommunicategesturesvariesSummary countries, shaking one’s head means “no”
while ________ means “yes”. However,
in Bulgaria, parts of Greece and Iran,
the gestures have the _________ meaning.
Although there’re many interpretations
of our body language, some gestures are
_________. The _____ is the best example.
It can be used to express almost any
________.oppositeuniversalsmileemotionnoddingUse the topic sentences of the first and
last paragraphs to help you write the
main idea.
Use the topic sentences of the middle
paragraphs for the supporting points.1 Before writing, authors usually make a
writing outline. Complete this outline in
your own words, using these steps.Main idea:
Points: 1 Showing happiness
2 Showing unhappiness or anger
3
4
5 Body language has many universal gesture.Universal body language to show agreement or disagreementUniversal body language to show boredomUniversal body language to show respect1. How can we know other's feelings,
even if they do not speak to us?
2. Why should we be careful with our
body language?
3. Why is it important to watch as well
as listen to others?
4. What are some jobs in which using
body language is extremely important?2 Work in groups of four.
Answer the following questions. It is possible to “read” others around us,
even if they do not intend for us to catch
their unspoken communication.
我们可以了解别人, 即使有时他们并不想要
我们了解他们没说出来的语言。
even if, even though 是连词词组, 用来引导
让步状语从句, 意为“尽管; 即使”。
注意:若主句与从句皆表示将来情况, even if
从句可用一般现在时代替将来时。Language Points① We have decided to visit the Museum even
if/even though it rains tomorrow.???????????????????② Even if I leave now, it’ll be too late.
即使我现在离开, 我也会迟到的。③ She understood what I was I was talking
about, even though it was the first time we
had spoken together.??④ He will not let out the secret even if he
knows it.???????????????????????????????????⑤ He will not let out the secret even though
he knows.?????????????????????????2. … its fun_ction is to show happiness
and put people at ease.
at ease 表示“舒适; 自由自在”。如：
He is quite at ease in public.
His manner was so bright and pleasant
that Arthur felt at ease with him at once.
他的态度这样爽朗愉快, 亚瑟立刻觉得
和他在一起没有什么拘束。 The retired old worker is living at his ease. 这位退休工人的生活过得很舒服。
He felt at ease and confident about the future.
他对未来感到轻松自在并且充满信心。
feel at ease 感到舒适而无忧虑
ill at ease 使某人感到不舒适
with ease 容易地; 无困难地
ease off 减轻; 缓和用ease短语的适当形式填空。
在这个陌生的地方, 我觉得不自在。
I don’t feel _______ in the strange place.
他轻而易举地考及格了。
He passed the test __________.
她在那儿人生地不熟, 感到很不安。
She was __________, for she was a stranger
there.
气象预报说, 暴风雨午夜将逐渐减弱。
The weather forecast says the storm will
_________ at midnight. at easewith ease ill at easeease off3. … such as when someone “loses face”
and smiles to hide it. 　　
lose face表示“丢面子; 丢脸”。如：
His careless work made him lose face
with his teacher.
他工作疏忽使他在老师面前丢了脸。
Peter lost face when people found out he
got low grades.
人们发现彼得考分很低时, 他觉得丢脸。【拓展】
lose heart 灰心; 泄气
lose one’s way 迷路
lose one’s temper 发脾气
lose one’s head 惊慌失措; 失去理智
be lost in lose oneself in 沉迷于;专心
致志于
be lost in thought 陷入沉思 英译汉。
If a teacher can’t answer this simple
question, he’ll lose face with his class.

He failed many times, but he did not
lose heart. 如果老师连如此简单的问题都不能回答, 他会在学生面前丢脸的。他失败了许多次, 但他并没有失去信心。He lost his way in the woods.

Mr Green lost his temper when he
found his daughter smoking. 他在森林里迷了路。格林先生发现女儿抽烟时大发脾气。4. Looking away from people or yawning
will, in most cases, make me appear to be
uninterested.
如果把眼光从某人身上移开, 或者打了个
哈欠, 这就会让人知道我不感兴趣。
look away from:?不看, 不注视
Don’t look away from me when I’m
speaking to you.?????????????????????????????????look at? 看;视为? look back? 回头看; 回顾look down on/upon? 轻视, 瞧不起look for 寻找 look forward to? 盼望look into 调查 look out? 小心?????????
look on? 旁观 look over 仔细检查look through? 浏览look up? 仰视; 在词典, 参考中查找Just look at what you’ve done！?
瞧你干了些什么！
The old like looking back on the past.
老年人喜欢回顾过去。
I wish you would not look down upon/on
this kind of work.?
我希望你不要看不起这类工作。We are looking forward to seeing you again.?The police are looking into the accident.????
In that case we will not look on with folded
arms.???????????? 2) yawn
v. 打呵欠
She yawned during the lecture because
it was boring.
她听课时打哈欠, 因为这堂课很乏味。
n. 哈欠
He gave a yawn and then fell asleep.
他打了一个哈欠之后就睡着了。1 Can you guess the correct order of the pictures below? Write your guesses. Then listen to the story on the cassette and write down the correct order.Listening and speakingthe correct order: 2 1 3 4 6 5bought a car from his
brother-in-law
Money changing hands,
smiling faces,
shaking hands,
the brother in law smiling
very happily and rubbing
his hands with joy.driving nervously for
the first time
Nervously looking
around
reacting to traffic,
sudden left turn,
reacting to crashLin Pu and a cyclist
Lin Pu hit a bicycle
Lin Pu knocked over
a basket full of applesL and the cyclist quarreled,
and a policeman walked
towards them
angry, shouting
pointing at bicycle,
pointing at apples on road
shaking his fist (closed hand)
at Lin Pu,Lin Pu, the cyclist and
the policeman
Walking slowly and
frowning,
Taking out paper to
write on
Shaking finger at Lin Pu
Pointing at red light,
Pointing at traffic lanes,
Shaking his head 2 Act out the act the story you just heard.
Act it out once without speaking. Then
act it a second time with words. Use the
expressions below to help you.You may not... Always stay...
Be careful when... Keep away from…
Do not... You’ll have to…
You must... You should never...
Look out! You’ll be fined (200) yuan.
Watch out! You’ll need to…LISTENING TEXTTO DRIVE OR NOT TO DRIVE
C = CYCLIST P = POLICEMAN
Lin Pu is excited, but very nervous. He just got his driver’s license last week and yesterday bought his brother-in-law’s old car. Today, he is driving in the city for the first time.Taxis are going in every direction. People are
crossing the street without paying attention to
the cars, and the people riding bikes never look
before they turn.
Just then, the traffic light in front of him turns
red and the car in front of him stops suddenly.
Lin Pu quickly turns to the right to avoid
hitting the car in front of him. Crash! He hits a bicycle and knocks over a basket full of apples. Then he sees a policeman, walking toward him.C: Look what you did! All my apples are on the road! You must pay for them!P: Driver, What were you thinking? You
didn’t stay in your lane! You’ll have
to pay a fine for this.
L: I’m sorry. I was just trying not to hit
that car in front of me. I’ve just got
my licence and I’m not used to
driving in the city. C: I don’t care if he is used to it or not!
Shouldn’t he have to pay for my
apples, sir?
P: Well, he’ll certainly need to pay a fine
for breaking this traffic rule. You two
will need to discuss what to do about
the apples.L: I don’t have any money. I spent it all
on this car!
C: Well, then at least you can pick up my
apples!
P: You can sell that car or something else,
but you must pay this fine by the end
of the month.
L: Oh, dear! Why did I ever buy a car? Phrases watch out/ be careful whenYou may notYou mustpay attention todriver’s licence呆在自己的行车线内四面八方有义务做… / 打算习惯做某事撞翻当心, 小心
可能不
一定
注意
驾照
stay in your lane
in every direction
be supposed to
be used to doing
knock overS1: I think that there is something
wrong with Lin Pei. When I saw
her today she turned away from me
and would not speak.
S2: Yes, when I saw her in the class, she Speaking and writingSample dialogue looked as if she had been crying.
When I asked her what was wrong,
she frowned and put her head down.
S1: I tried to talk to her, but she crossed
her arms in front of her and
wouldn’t look at me. She got
impatient and shook her head
when I asked her if I could help.S2: The teacher asked her for her homework
and she just shook her head and rolled her
eyes. She told me she didn’t care about
school any more.
S1: What do you think is wrong?
S2: I know her mother has been very ill, and
Lin Pei has had to do all the housework.
Her father is very worried too. Maybe we
should go to her house and offer to
help her.Write some advice for Lin Pei. Describe
her body language and explain why it
worries you. Ask her if she can tell you
why she is acting in this way. Encourage
her to understand that body language
shows how you are feeling and is
important for good communication.Writing A SampleDear Lin Pei:
I noticed this morning that you seemed very upset. It looked as if you had been crying. When I asked you what was wrong, you put your head down. I’m sorry if I embarrassed you. I just want to help. Is there anything wrong? I heard that your mum has been ill and that you are very tired from doing all the housework. Is that true?
I really would like to help you if I can. Can I come and help you with your housework or with your homework? Please let me help you. We are good friends.
Yours, Xiao LingHomework Find more forms of body language on the Internet and try to write a composition about them.课件35张PPT。Unit 4
Body language
Warming upIf you’re happy and you know it,
clap your hands;
If you’re happy and you know it,
clap your hands;
If you’re happy and you know it,
then you really want to show it;
If you’re happy and you know it,
clap your hands!
Stamp your feet!
Shout Hooray!
Do all three!Lets’ enjoy a song!speakingringingwritingtypingSpoken
languageWritten
languageWays of communicatingBody language gesturingThousands of
Hands Kwan-yinWhat is body language? Body language is one form of nonverbal
communication (非言辞交际) without
using words. Eye contact or gaze, facial
expression, gesture, and posture (姿势),
or the way you stand, are different kinds
of body language.Look at the pictures. How are they feeling?happyexcitedsadangryIt is so difficult to make a choice. I don’t know what to do.I can’t believe she said that! That is so unfair.confused angryI’ve lost my wallet. There
was over three thousand
dollars in it. What a pity!I’ve got an A in maths!
I’ve made great progress!
I’ve succeeded at last.sad happytiredIt’s been a long
day. I can’t keep
my eyes open.anger fear joy sadness contempt
轻视 surprisedisgust
厌恶happysadconfusedtiredhatefulfrighteneduneasyeasythrilledconfidentdelightedkindcuriousemotiondepressedokstopsilentwell
doneLet’s look at the following gestures.Victory / peacepick-up 搭便车Please call me!I love you!applauseGood!Thumbs upBad!Thumbs downCome
here!Moving his hand up and down with the palm facing upGood luck!Keeping his fingers crossedMe?Putting the fingers on the chestI don’t know!Shrugging his shouldersThe mother is
trying to quiet her
crying child.He is thinking
deeply.What are they communicating?She is feeling
ill / having a
stomachache.The policeman is
directing traffic /
telling cars to go.Hello! Goodbye! Come here!
Go away! Expensive!
OK! I’m surprised! I’m tired!
I’m confused! Good luck!
I’m delighted! I’m upset!
I’m sad! I forgot! You’re great!Read the following statements. Choose
one and act it out without speaking. SummaryJust like verbal language(言辞), body language
is part of culture. It plays an important role in
daily communication. So, it is very important
to understand and use it correctly. And for a
foreign language learner, it is as necessary to
learn the body language as to learn the verbal
language.Is body language all the same in
different cultures? Body language varies from
culture to culture, though
some are universal. It is
determined to some extent
by social and cultural
practices. Universal gesturesI am tired.I am full.I am hungry. press palms/rest
your head on it/
eyes closed pat or rub
stomach
(in a circle) pat stomachzerorudemoneyOKNo.1rudegreat / good jobNoYesGreet
friendsFranceRussiaOther countriesWhen we are in a certain place, we should
follow the customs of the people who live in
that place, not our own customs. Because
body language varies from culture to culture.
Not all members of all cultures behave the
same way. We should try to master and
respect each other’s culture in order to
make good communication. When in Rome, do as the Romans do！Homework Think of more actions to express
themselves instead of by words.
2. Go over all the new words and
prepare for the reading text.课件44张PPT。Unit 4
Body language
Workbook Listening task on page 62What do you suppose the listening will be about? 2 True or False? Chimps and humans have the same
body language.
2. Jane says that smiling makes chimps
look more friendly.
3. Humans always shout when they feel
angry.
4. Both chimps and humans want to feel
safe and protected.
5. We often show affection when we like
someone.F TF TT 1. Why do both humans and chimps
smile when they are nervous?
Because they hope an enemy will
not hurt them.Exercise 3:2. What things do both humans and
chimps do to make themselves look
dangerous and frightening?
Both humans and chimps stand up,
and try to make themselves look bigger
and more frightening by waving their
arms around or standing over the others.3. What do both humans and chimps
do to make their babies feel safe?
Both humans and chimps hold their
babies and hug and kiss them to make
them feel safe.4. How do bigger chimps make the small
ones feel safe? Do humans do things like
this?
Bigger chimps make the small ones
feel safe by touching them or kissing
and hugging them. Yes, humans will
do things like this if they want to make
their children feel safe. Do you remember Jane Goodall and her study of chimps? One of the things she reported on was how similar chimp body language is to human body language. HUMANS AND CHIMPS Listening text When we humans are worried or frightened, we sometimes smile in a nervous way. Chimps also look as though they are smiling when they are nervous, perhaps to make them look friendly so an enemy will not hurt them.
When we are angry, we often stand up, take a deep breath and put our hands on our sides to look bigger and stronger.We sometimes move close to another person and stand over them to make them feel smaller. We might shout loudly to frighten someone. When chimps are angry they also stand up and wave their arms around. They often walk quickly , throw things about and make noise. They are trying to make themselves seem bigger and more frightening. Chimps and humans want to feel safe and protected, so both chimp and human mothers hold their babies and hug and kiss them. Young chimps and children also love to play and enjoy each other’s company.
A similar thing is true for adults. We humans hug and kiss each other to show that we accept and love someone.When a powerful chimp frightens others, the smaller chimps will bend down or hold their heads low. They will hold out their hands as if they want to be friends.The bigger one will touch them or kiss them and hug them to make them feel safe.
So what do you think? Are we like chimps or are chimps like us? Look at the pictures and try to guess
what they are communicating from the
body language you see. 2. Listen to the tape and number the
pictures. Listening task on P65123456Shen Lei is meeting Julie, his Canadian
friend, at a restaurant.
SL=SHEN LEI J= JULIE
SL: Hello, Julie! Sorry, I’m late. The traffic was terrible.
J: That’s OK. I just arrived. Be careful – the steps are wet. Don’t slip! LUNCH WITH A FRIEND Listening text SL: Thanks. Let’s go in –it’s raining.
J: Oh, look at the beautiful
decorations and flowers. Is it a
special holiday?
SL: No, but it’s a new restaurant, so
the flowers are here to give
congratulations to the owners and
for good luck.J: What do you mean when you say
“good luck”? Do you mean good
luck to make money or good luck
for other things?
SL: It’s for good business in the
restaurant. Now please come over here.
J: Do you want me to sit down here?
Oh, come and look at the fish.SL: We could have some, if you like.
J: How much is the Mandarin fish? It looks very fancy.
SL: It’s a little expensive, but it’s excellent. I think it’s about thirty-eight yuan.
J: What does that mean? It looks like you are pointing a gun at the waitress.SL: We use our fingers to show numbers.
Don’t you?
J: Yes, but not like that.We use our
fingers for numbers one to nine,
but nothing bigger. We wouldn’t
use our fingers to say “thirty-eight”.The two friends have a big lunch, and when they are finished, they are full. They have eaten too much.J: What’s the matter? Do you have a
stomachache?
SL: No, I just ate too much .
J: I’m full too. I always eat too much
in Chinese restaurants .
SL: Yes, It was a really good meal!The Open Hand-
A Universal SignReading
task P66Look at the pictures below and think:
In what situation do they shake hands? Possible answers on P66: It can be dangerous for you to meet
people you do not know.
2. Many Asian people do not usually
physically touch strangers.
3. If we show an open hand, it means that
we are not holding anything dangerous.4. The right hand is usually used because it
is almost always the stronger.
5. People shake their hands when meeting
people to show that they can be trusted.
6. To show respect Muslim people will touch
their heart and mouth when greeting someone.Translate the following sentences:
a. 如果他们不来, 怎么办呢？Difficult pointWhat if we don’t know who the new person is?
What if … 倘使…将会怎样？What if they do not come?b. 倘使我们不能按时到达, 将会这样？
c. 如果我们在不熟悉的地方碰到陌生人,
那该怎么办？What if we are meeting a stranger in
an unfamiliar place?What if we can’t get there on time? 一、单词拼写
1. __________ v. 点头
2. __________ adj. 相似的
3. __________ vt.避免; 消除
4. __________ n.＆ v.姿势; 做手势
5. __________ n.一致; 协议
6. __________ adj. 地方的; 当地的
7. __________ n. 胸膛
8. __________ n.＆vt. 接近; 方法
9. ___________ n.＆adj. 一般的; 普通; 将军nodsimilaravoidgestureagreementlocal chestapproachgeneral10. __________ adj. 好奇的
11. __________ n.＆ adj. 成人的
12. __________ n. 喜剧
13. __________ adj. 较大的;主要的
14. __________ vt. 触摸; 感动
15. __________ n. 陌生人
16. __________ adj. 口头的
17. __________ n. 面颊
18. __________ n. 行为; 动作
19. __________ vt. 惩罚
20. _____________ n. 表达; 表情expressioncuriousadult comedymajortouch stranger spokencheek action punish二、单词运用
When travelling abroad, I’m always
________ about the customs and lifestyle
of ______ people.
2. Our Olympic volunteers, who are
_____________ Chinese people, will go all
out to do a good job.
3. Is that Tom’s friend from USA? I’d like
him to ____________ her to me.curious local representingintroduce 4. At the meeting they discussed three
different a___________ to the study
of maths.
5. He is so tall that his head nearly
t________ the ceiling.
6. I was practically __________ off (睡着)
in that meeting.
ouches pproaches nodding 7. She braked her car hard to avoid _________
(bump) into a car turning suddenly out of a
corner.
8. He raised his hands in a _________ of despair.
9. Children should see Three-D films with the
company of ________.
10. Such wrong behavior should be stopped and
even p_________.unished bumpinggestureadults 三、词语派生
Read the following ____________ and
decide whether they are true or false.
(state)
2. He was a physics _________. That’s to
say, he ____________ in physics. (major)
3. The tiger is a ________________ of the
cat family. (represent)statements majored majorrepresentative 4. The wonderful ______________ (introduce)
of the book arose my __________(curious)
to know more about the story.
5. As we all know, __________ speak louder
than words. (act)
6. Something __________ (speak) hung in the
air between them.
7. Her ________ (face) expression showed that
she did not quite understand what was going on.curiosity introductionactions unspoken facial 8. After a sic-day negotiation(谈判), the two
sides finally came to an __________ (agree).
9. I told him I’d meet him here, but perhaps he
______________ (understand) and went
straight to the pub.
10. He entered the room, ________ (close)
followed by the rest of the family.agreement misunderstood closely 四、词组互译
1. 相反 _______________
2. 一般来说 ____________
3. 丢脸 ____________
4. 愿意 ___________________
5. 背对，拒绝帮助 _________________
6. 面部表情 _________________
7. 伸手 ____________
8. 保护……以免受 _______________defend…againston the contraryin generallose facebe willing to (do….)turn one’s back tofacial expressionreach out9. as well ________
10. close to ___________
11. at ease _________
12. nod at _____________
13. not… nor… ____________
14. be likely to do… __________
15. be wrong about __________
16. not all… / all… not __________并非全部也靠近; 即将放松朝…点头既不…也不很可能误解五、词组运用
词组填空 根据句子提供的语境, 从第四大题中
选一个适当的词组并用其适用的形式填空。
Her husband ___________________ her
without a word, which made her very angry.
2. At first we didn’t feel __________ before him
for we had been told that he was a serious person.
3. She felt so cold that she stood __________
the fire.turned his back toat ease close to4. ____________, people prefer to take the
train instead of the airplane to avoid
spending so much on travel.
5. --I hear you are enjoying your new job.
--________________, I found it rather dull.
In generalOn the contrary翻译填空 根据汉语意思, 从上述短语中选一个
恰当的词组完成句子。
6. 来自不同文化背景的人会经常误解对方。
People from different cultures can often
__________________ each other.
7. 他对绘画和作曲都有兴趣。
He is interested in painting and composing
_________.be wrong aboutas well句子翻译 从上述短语中选择恰当的短语翻译
下列句子。
8. 整整一个星期, 他既没给她写信, 也没给她
打电话。
9. 并非所有人都喜欢吃辛辣的食物。Not all people enjoy spicy food.
/All people do not enjoy spicy food.For a whole week he did not write to her
nor give her a call.六、翻译1. 当你走近一个人的时候, 你的面部表情会表现
出你是否友好。(approach;facial;expression)When you approach someone, your facial
expression show if you are friendly.2. 我对他们在舞台上怎样演出喜剧感到
非常好奇。(curious; comedy; represent)I am very curious about how they
represent the comedy on the stage.They are likely to misunderstand each other,
and can’t reach an agreement about the matter.4. 我惊讶地发现这两种相似的手势表达了
如此不同的意见。(similar; gesture; express)I am astonished at how the two similar
gestures expressed such different meanings.3. 他们很可能产生了误会, 而且在这个问题上也
不会达成一致。(likely to; misunderstand; agreement)5. 一般说来, 人们愿意坐火车而不坐飞机以
避过大的开销。( in general; avoid)In general, people would rather take a train
than take a plane to avoid spending so much
on travel.Homework Remember the new words and
expressions.
2. Finish the exercises on page 63.课件55张PPT。Unit 4
Body language基础知识自测一、单词拼写 根据读音、词性和词义写出下列单词。
1.__________v. 点头
2.__________adj. 相似的
3.__________vt.避免；消除
4.__________n＆ v.姿势； 做手势
5.__________n.一致；协议
6.__________adj. 地方的；当地的
7.__________n.胸膛
8.__________n.＆vt.接近；方法
9.___________n.＆adj.一般的； nodsimilaravoidgestureagreementlocal chestapproachgeneral10.__________adj. 好奇的
11.__________n.＆ adj. 成人的
12.__________n.喜剧
13.__________adj.较大的；主要的
14.__________vt.触摸；感动
15.__________n.陌生人
16.__________adj. 口头的
17.__________n. 面颊
18.__________n.行为；动作
19.__________vt. 惩罚
20._____________n. 表达；表情expressioncuriousadult comedymajortouch stranger spokencheek action punish二、单词运用 根据句子的结构和意义，在空格处填入一个恰当的单词，或者用括号中所给词的适当形式填空。
1.When travelling abroad, I’m always ________ about the customs and lifestyle of ______ people.
2.Our Olympic volunteers, who are ______________ Chinese people, will go all out to do a good job.
3.Is that Tom’s friend from USA? I’d like him to ___________ her to me.
4.At the meeting they discussed three different a_____________ to the study of maths.
5.He is so tall that his head nearly t__________ the ceiling.touches curious local representingintroduce approaches 6. I was practically __________ off（睡着）in that meeting.
7. She braked her car hard to avoid _________(bump) into a car turning suddenly out of a corner.
8. He raised his hands in a _________ of despair.
9. Children should see Three-D films with the company of __________.
10. Such wrong behavior should be stopped and even p___________.punished nodding bumpinggestureadults 三、词语派生 用括号中所给词的适当形式填空。
1. Read the following ____________ and decide whether they are true or false. (state)
2. He was a physics __________. That’s to say, he ____________ in physics. (major)
3. The tiger is a ________________ of the cat family. (represent)
4. The wonderful ______________ (introduce) of the book arose my _____________ (curious) to know more about the story.
5. As we all know, __________ speak louder than words. (act)statements majored majorrepresentative curiosity introductionactions 6. Something __________ (speak) hung in the air between them.
7. Her ________ (face) expression showed that she did not quite understand what was going on.
8. After a sic-day negotiation(谈判), the two sides finally came to an __________ (agree).
9. I told him I’d meet him here, but perhaps he ______________ (understand) and went straight to the pub.
10. He entered the room, ___________ (close) followed by the rest of the family.unspoken facial agreement misunderstood closely 四、词组互译 将下列词组或短语译成中文或英语。
1. 相反_________________________
2. 一般来说_____________________
3. 丢脸_________________________
4. 愿意_________________________
5. 背对，拒绝帮助______________________
6. 面部表情____________________________
7. 伸手________________________________
8.保护……以免受＿＿＿＿＿________＿＿＿ defend…. againston the contraryin generallose facebe willing to (do….)turn one’s back tofacial expressionreach out9. as well ________________
10. close to ________________
11. at ease ________________
12. nod at ________________
13. not… nor… ________________
14. be likely to do… ________________
15. be wrong about ________________
16. not all… / all… not ________________
并非全部也靠近；即将放松朝……点头既不……也不很可能误解五、词组运用
词组填空 根据句子提供的语境，从第四大题中选一个适当的词组并用其适用的形式填空。
1.Her husband ___________________ her without a word, which made her very angry.
2.At first we didn’t feel __________ before him for we had been told that he was a serious person.
3.She felt so cold that she stood __________ the fire.
4.____________, people prefer to take the train instead of the airplane to avoid spending so much on travel.
5.“I hear you are enjoying your new job.” “______________, I found it rather dull.”turned his back toat ease close toin generalon the contrary翻译填空 根据汉语意思，从上述短语中选一个恰当的词组完成句子。
6. 来自不同文化背景的人会经常误解对方。
People from different cultures can often __________________each other.
7. 他对绘画和作曲都有兴趣。
He is interested in painting and composing _________.be wrong aboutas well句子翻译 从上述短语中选择恰当的短语翻译下列句子。
8. 整整一个星期，他既没给她写信，也没给她打电话。
_______________________________________________
_____________________________________________
9. 并非所有人都喜欢吃辛辣的食物。
________________________________________________
_______________________________________________1.Not all people enjoy spicy food.
2.All people do not enjoy spicy food.For a whole week he did not write to her nor give
her a call.Language points for Reading I
Language points for Reading II
Language Data Bank1.major (1)adj. : more important; great(er) 较重要的 ，主要的 a major road 干路这辆车需要大修。The car needs mayor repairs.(2)vi.：specialize in a certain subject (at college or university)主修（大专院校的）科目。
黛茜是法语专业的。Daisy is majoring in French.(3)：army officer between a captain and lieutenant-colonel 陆军少校Language points for Reading I2. represent (vt.)
stand for or be a symbol or equivalent of (sb/sth); symbolize 代表，象征，等于（某人/某事物）；标志这个方程式中的Y代表什么？______________________in this equation?This design___________________________ in modern art.这种设计反映了现代艺术中一种主要的新趋势。2)be an example of (sth.) 是（某事物）的一个例子。What does Y representrepresents a major new trend3. introduce (v.): make sb known formally to sb else by giving the person’s name, or by giving each person’s name to the other 把某人介绍给另外的人；使相互认识；引见请允许我介绍一下，这是亚历山大先生。Please______________________ Mr.Alexander.allow me to introduce我想我们未曾彼此介绍过。I don’t think______________________.we’ve been introducedintroduction(n.)：formal presentation of one person to another, in which each is told the other’s name(正式的)介绍；引见。
姚明是一个不需要介绍的人（大家都知道的）。是大家相互介绍的时候了。Yao Ming is a person________________________.It is time to ____________________each other.make introductions towho needs no introduction5.avoid(vt.)
keep oneself away from(sb/sth)避开，躲避（某人/某事物）
avoid (driving in) the centre of town 避开 市中心（行驶）。
avoid + doing sth. 避免做某事我差点扎着猫。I just _______________ the cat.avoid running2)stop (sth)happening;prevent 防止（某事）发生；预防作为一个驾驶新手，林达尽力避免发生事故。As a new driver, Linda_____________________________avoidable(adj.): that can be avoided 可避免的tries her best to avoid accidents.6. nod
1)v. ~(to / at sb)
老师同意地点点头。
The teacher _______ _________ _______
她从我身边走过时向我点头致意。
She ______ _______ ________ as she passed.
2)vt. ~sth (to sb)
他对我点点头表示欢迎。
nodded in agreementnodded to meHe _____ ______ __________ to me.nodded a welcomen. act of nodding the head 点头
她走过时朝我点一下头。
She _____ me _____ _____ as she passed.gave a nod 7.curious
1)~(about sth/ to do sth)
约翰对人类的起源非常好奇。
John ____ _____ _____ the origin of mankind.
我真想知道她说了什么。
I ____ _____ ____ know what she said.
is curious aboutwas curious toCuriously adv.她一整天都在那里，然而奇怪的是，我却没有看见她。She was there all day . But, curiously, I didn’t see her.curiosity n.7. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they Comfortable touching strangers.
不是所有人都以同样方式寒暄。接触陌生人是，距离太近或太远都会使他们不舒服。They do not shake hands with women, ___________________kiss women publicly.not…nor… 既不……也不……nor are they likely to2)表示否定意义的nor 放在句首，该句子应用倒装的语序.即把be动词、助动词或情态动词放在主语前。Nobody can learn body language in one day,
________.没有人能在用一天就学会体态语，我 也不能。nor can I类似的用法还有：not, never, neither, hardly, seldom等。
Never has he been to Columbia.________________________at the party last night.他昨晚在晚会上一句话也没有说。Not a single word did he say他从来都没有去过哥伦比亚。8. likely, probable, possible
1）possible 常用于下列结构：it’s possible for sb. to do sht; It’s possible + that 从句
注意：possible 的主语不能是人2）probable 常用于这种结构：it’s probable + that 从句注意：probable 的主语不能是人；英语中几乎不说：“it’s probable to do sth.”3) likely 常用于如下结构：sb./sth. is likely to do sth; It’s likely that从句
注意：likely 的主语可以是人也可以是物；但几乎不说：“It’s likely to do sth.”
It’s possible, though not probable, that he will come tomorrow.
He’s very likely to be late for class.
It isn’t likely to rain.（此次的it表天气，并非形式主语。）1. Similar : adj. be similar to sb./ sth.我们在音乐方面爱好相似。We have similar tastes in music.金和黄铜的 颜色相似。Gold_____________________ brass.is similar in color tosimilarity n.Language points for Reading II2. respect 1) n. ~ for sb./ sth.我非常尊重你。I have ___________________ you.the greatest respect学生要尊重老师。Students should __________________ their teachers.show respect forin respect of sth. 就某方面而言；关于某事物这本书风格极佳。The book is admirable _____________________.in respect of style2) v. ~ sb./ sth.( for sth.)由于你为人正直，我对你十分敬重。I respect you for your honesty.~ oneself 自重，自尊如果你不自重，又怎能受到别人的尊重呢？If you don’t________________, how can you _________________________.respect yourselfexpect others to respect yourespectable adj. 体面的；有身份的；值得尊敬的a respectable married couple一对值得尊敬的夫妻respectful adj. 恭敬的，表示尊敬或尊重的~ to / towards sb. ; ~ of sth.必恭必敬地静听着listen in respectful silence尊重他人意见respectful of other people’s opinionsrespective adj. 各自的；各个的；分别的聚会之后我们回到各自的房间。After the party we all went off to_____________________.our respective rooms3. be willing to 愿意做某事你愿意承担责任吗？Are you will to accept responsibility?4. Punish v. 1)~ sb. (for sth.)(by/with sth.)处罚或惩罚某人他让孩子赔偿损失，惩罚他们粗心大意。He_________________________________by making them pay for the damage.punish the children for their careless2) ~sth. (by/with sth)以（过错）为由处罚某人重罪须处以长期监禁。Serious crime _________________________ by longer terms of imprisonment.must be punishedpunishment n.现在分词作定语，当分词单独做定语时，放在所修饰的名词前；如果是分词短语做定语放在名词后。
Eg.In the following years he worked even harder.
在后来的几年中，他学习更努力了。
The man speaking to the teacher is our monitor's father.
正与老师谈话的那个人是我们班长的父亲。
现在分词做定语Grammar ( 30m )现在分词作定语相当于一个定语从句的句法功能，如：in the following years也可用in the years that followed; the man speaking to the teacher可改为the man who is speaking to the teacher. Practice:
____ dogs seldom bite.
Bark B. To bark C. Barked D. Barking
(2) The wolf spoke in a _____ voice and Mr. Dongguo felt______.
frightening; frightened
B. frightened; frightened
C. frighten; frightening
D. frightening; frighteningDA(3) It’s pleasure to watch the face of a ____ baby.
asleep B. sleep C. sleeping D. slept
(4) The ____ buildings showed us that an earthquake was coming.
A. shaking B. shook C. shaken D. shake CA现在分词在语法功能上相当于动词、形容词和副词。现在分词通常和逻辑主语之间存在主动关系。但要注意它地各种形式变化：主动形式 被动形式
V-ing being V-ed
having V-ed having been V-ed 现在分词做状语一般式完成式Eg. Hearing the bell, the students began to enter the classroom. 听见铃声，学生们开始走进教室。（听见和进入两个动作同时发生）
The building being built now is our new library. 现在正在建造地 这栋楼房室我们地 新图书馆（being built为现在分词的被动形式，表示动作正在进行之中。）Having done the work, he went home. 完成了工作，他就回家了。现在分词作状语现在分词作状语往往和逻辑主语之间存在主动关系。现在分词作状语，常常用来表示原因、时间、方式、结果、条件、伴随状况等。现在分词一般不用作表目的地状语（通常用不定式表目的地状语）。
Walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.
(=When I was walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.)While waiting for the bus, he read a copy of China Daily.
(=While waiting for the bus,he read a copy of China Daily.)1）表时间状语2) 表原因状语
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
(=as he was ill, he didn’t go to school.)Being a student, you should study hard.
(=Since you are a student, you should study hard.）既然你是一个学生，你就应该努力学习。由于想到它或许在家，所以我就给他打了电话。Thinking he might be at home, I called him.
(As I thought he might be at home, I called him.) 3)表方式、伴随情况地状语 ：作伴随状语地分词表示的动作，必须是主语的一个 动作，或是与谓语所表示地动作（或状态）同时发生，或是对谓语表示地动词（或状态）作进一步地补充说明。Eg. He sat on the sofa, watching TV.
(=He sat on the sofa, and watched TV.)他们笑着谈着走进了教室。__________________ , they went into the classroom.他斜靠(lean)着墙站着。He stood leaning against the wall.(＝He stood and leaned against the wall.)Laughing and talking4) 表结果
Eg. Her mother died in 1990, leaving her with her younger brother.
(=Her mother died in 1990, and left her with her younger brother.)全国到处在传唱这首歌曲，使它成了一首最受欢迎地歌曲。The song is sung all over the country,__________________________________.making it the most popular song5)表条件Using your head, you will find a way.
(=If you use your head, you will find a way.)一直往前走，你就会看到一座白色地房子。______________, you will see a white house.Walking ahead(6)与逻辑主语构成独立主格：
　I waiting for the bus, a bird fell on my heard．
　我等汽车时，一只鸟落到我头上。
　All the tickets having been sold out, they went away disappointedly.
　所有的票已经卖光了，他们失望地离开了。
　Time permitting, we'll do another two exercises.
如果时间允许，我们将做另两个练习。
　有时也可用with (without) +名词（代词宾格）+分词形式
　With the lights burning, he fell asleep. 他点着灯睡着了。
(7)作独立成分：
　Judging from(by) his appearance, he must be an actor.
　从外表看，他一定是个演员。Practise:
They set out ____ for the ____ boy.
searching; losing B. searching; lost
C. to search; lost D. searched; losing
(2) The student sat there, ____ what to do.
doesn’t knowing B. didn’t knowing
C. not know D. not knowingBD(3)He sat there _____ , with his head on his hand.
and think B. thinking
C. thought D. being thought
(4) The ____ Prime Minister expressed his satisfaction with his talks, ___ that he had enjoyed his stay here.
visiting; add B. visited; adding
C. visiting; adding D. visited; addedBCThe secretary worked late into the night, _____a long speech for the president.(MET91)
To prepare B. preparing C. prepared D. was preparing
2.European foot ball is played in 80 countries, ______ it the most popular sport in the world.(NMET 98)
Making B. makes C. made D. to makeB现在分词表结果状语A 现在分词作伴随状语高考链接3. “Can’t you read?” Mary said _______ to the notice. (MET93)
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily point D. and angrily pointingA现在分词作伴随状语4. ____ a reply, he decided to write again.(MET92)
Not receiving B. Receiving not C. Not having received D. Having not received
5.______ his telephone number, she had some difficulty getting in touch with Bill.(上海91年题)
Not knowing B. knowing not
C. Not having known D. Having not knownCA现在分词作原因状语，分词结构种否定词通常放在现在分词前面。作原因状语课件110张PPT。课时分配Period 1&2 Warming
up and Reading IUnit 4 Body LanguagespeakingringingwritingtypingSpoken languageWritten languageBody languageWays of communicating gesturingWarming up – I ( 2m ) GuessGood!
Warming up – II ( 3m )GuessBad!
GuessCome here!
GuessGood luck!
GuessMe?
GuessI don’t know!
Work in group of four persons , trying to find out more body language with the meanings we haven’t talked about.ActivityWarming up – III ( 4m )Well-doneOk stopquietGesturesvictory!
What is body language? Pre-reading – I ( 5m )Definition for Body LanguageOne form of communication without using any wordsEye contactFacial expressionGesturePosture handshake Kiss hugshake nodbow kiss your hand to sb.Facial expression anger fear joy sorrow contempt
轻视 surprisedisgust
厌恶expressions of this feelingsI am worriedI ate too much!I am sorry that I did something wrong.I’m so happy.a smile and
a handshaketwisting hands together
or holding headpatting stomachsmilinghanding headYou are welcome.SummaryJust like verbal language(言辞), body language is part of culture. It plays an important role in daily communication. So, it is very important to understand and use it correctly. And for a foreign language learner, it is as necessary to learn the body language as to learn the verbal language.Warming up – II ( 2m )Reading Communication:
No problem?Find out the two mistakes the writer found in the airport:Mr. Garcia Julia SmithThe first mistakefromfrom(Columbia )(Britain)He approaches Ms Smith by _______ ______ _________ and _______ her on the ________.She ______ ________ appearing _________ and put up her ______.shouldertouchingherkissedcheekstepped backsurprisedhandsThe second mistakea JapaneseGeorge Cookfrom(Canada)He ________ ________ _______ ________ to the Japanese.He ________ to Mr. Cook and his nose _________ Mr. Cook’s _______ ________.bowedtouchedmovinghandreached his handout Read paragraph3-6, then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F) and correct the error.TFT FEnglishmen often stand close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
Most people around the world now greet each other by kissing .
Japanese will bow to others as greeting.
People from Jordan will move very close to you as you introduce yourself to them.
Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ body language are bad.FReading – III ( 3m )How do different international students behave when they greet people?Man from ColombiaKiss on the cheekJulia SmithWoman from BritaineveryoneAkira
NagatabowingeveryoneeveryoneShaking handsMan from CanadaAhmed
AzizMan from JordanShaking hands noddingWoman from FranceDarlene
CoulonPeople
she knowsRead the passage again and then answer the following questions:Reading – IV ( 5m )Answer the following questions:Is the author of this passage male or female?
How do you know?
What were the two mistakes that the author noticed?The author is male. Ahmed Aziz will not shake hands with women, but he shakes hands with the author.He noticed that the Colombian man kissed the British woman, but in her culture , a kiss from a stranger is not acceptable. He also noticed that the Japanese man bowed just as the Canadian man started to shake hands, so one man’s nose touched the other man’s handWho seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others? Who seemed to prefer closer physical distance?
The British woman, Julia, and probably the Canadian man, George, seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others. The Colombian man, Tony, and the Jordanian man, Ahmed, seemed to prefer closer physical distance.4.Did any students have similar greeting customs? If so, which ones?
Yes. Tony from Colombia and Darlene from France had a similar greeting custom---- a kiss. George from Canada and Ahmed from Jordan also had a similar greeting custom ---- a handshake, but Ahmed shakes hands only with men.5. “when in Rome, do as the Romans do.” what do you think this famous saying means?
6.Do you agree with the author’s statement that body language is not good or bad?This saying means that when we are in a certain place, we should follow the customs of the people who live in that place, not our own customs.Post-readingTask : discussionDo you think body language is important? Why? Homework:1. Recite the new words in the text. 2. Go over “Learning about language” 1, 2,And 3 on P27.
Language points for reading ITake a breakUnit 4 Body LanguagePeriod 3 Learning
about languageChecking answer – I (3m)Answer keys for Ex.1 on Page 28:defence, likely, Italy, canteen, represent, dash, approach, association, cheek, flightChecking answer – II (2m)Answer keys for Ex.2 on Page 28:Approached, Jordan, cheek, curiously, dashed,
Misunderstood, contraryAnswer key for Exercise 3:
Crossroads, adult, major, dormitory, greeted, representing, association,
Spoken, Colombia, curious, flight现在分词作定语，当分词单独做定语时，放在所修饰的名词前；如果是分词短语做定语放在名词后。
Eg.In the following years he worked even harder.
在后来的几年中，他学习更努力了。
The man speaking to the teacher is our monitor's father.
正与老师谈话的那个人是我们班长的父亲。
现在分词做定语Grammar ( 30m )现在分词作定语相当于一个定语从句的句法功能，如：in the following years也可用in the years that followed; the man speaking to the teacher可改为the man who is speaking to the teacher. 现在分词在语法功能上相当于动词、形容词和副词。现在分词通常和逻辑主语之间存在主动关系。但要注意它地各种形式变化：主动形式 被动形式
V-ing being V-ed
having V-ed having been V-ed 现在分词做状语一般式完成式E.g. Hearing the bell, the students began to enter the classroom. 听见铃声，学生们开始走进教室。（听见和进入两个动作同时发生）
The building being built now is our new library. 现在正在建造地 这栋楼房室我们地 新图书馆（being built为现在分词的被动形式，表示动作正在进行之中。）Having done the work, he went home. 完成了工作，他就回家了。现在分词作状语现在分词作状语往往和逻辑主语之间存在主动关系。现在分词作状语，常常用来表示原因、时间、方式、结果、条件、伴随状况等。现在分词一般不用作表目的地状语（通常用不定式表目的地状语）。
Walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.
(=When I was walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.)While waiting for the bus, he read a copy of China Daily.
(=While waiting for the bus,he read a copy of China Daily.)1）表时间状语2) 表原因状语
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
(=as he was ill, he didn’t go to school.)Being a student, you should study hard.
(=Since you are a student, you should study hard.）既然你是一个学生，你就应该努力学习。由于想到它或许在家，所以我就给他打了电话。Thinking he might be at home, I called him.
(As I thought he might be at home, I called him.) 3)表方式、伴随情况地状语 ：作伴随状语地分词表示的动作，必须是主语的一个 动作，或是与谓语所表示地动作（或状态）同时发生，或是对谓语表示地动词（或状态）作进一步地补充说明。Eg. He sat on the sofa, watching TV.
(=He sat on the sofa, and watched TV.)他们笑着谈着走进了教室。__________________ , they went into the classroom.他斜靠(lean)着墙站着。He stood leaning against the wall.
(＝He stood and leaned against the wall.)Laughing and talking4) 表结果
Eg. Her mother died in 1990, leaving her with her younger brother.
(=Her mother died in 1990, and left her with her younger brother.)全国到处在传唱这首歌曲，使它成了一首最受欢迎地歌曲。The song is sung all over the country,_____________________________.making it the most popular song5)表条件Using your head, you will find a way.
(=If you use your head, you will find a way.)一直往前走，你就会看到一座白色地房子。______________, you will see a white house.Walking ahead (6)与逻辑主语构成独立主格：
　I waiting for the bus, a bird fell on my heard．
　我等汽车时，一只鸟落到我头上。
　All the tickets having been sold out, they went away disappointedly.
　所有的票已经卖光了，他们失望地离开了。
　Time permitting, we'll do another two exercises.
如果时间允许，我们将做另两个练习。
　有时也可用with (without) +名词（代词宾格）+分词形式
　With the lights burning, he fell asleep.
他点着灯睡着了。
(7)作独立成分：
　Judging from(by) his appearance, he must be an actor.
　从外表看，他一定是个演员。The secretary worked late into the night, _____a long speech for the president.(MET91)
To prepare B. preparing C. prepared D. was preparing
2.European foot ball is played in 80 countries, ______ it the most popular sport in the world.(NMET 98)
Making B. makes C. made D. to makeB现在分词表结果状语A 现在分词作伴随状语高考链接3. “Can’t you read?” Mary said _______ to the notice. (MET93)
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily point D. and angrily pointingA现在分词作伴随状语4. ____ a reply, he decided to write again.(MET92)
Not receiving B. Receiving not C. Not having received D. Having not received
5.______ his telephone number, she had some difficulty getting in touch with Bill.(上海91年题)
Not knowing B. knowing not
C. Not having known D. Having not knownCA现在分词作原因状语，分词结构种否定词通常放在现在分词前面。作原因状语Homework:Finish the the ex. 3 on P29 and the exercise in Using structures in the workbook.Take a breakUnit 4 Body LanguagePeriod 4 Reading III am tired.I am full.I am hungry. press palms/rest
your head on it/
eyes closed move hand
in circle pat stomachUsually what gestures we will do ?Warming up ( 10 m ) show interest be rude or disrespectful money zero rudenessOK eye contact thumbs upCan you figure out the meanings of the following gestures in the following countries? the number one rude great / good jobWell-doneOk stopquietGesturesvictory!
Discussion :1.What is the fun_ction of body language?
2. What do think the role of body language in our daily life?
3. Are all the body language the same in the world? What do you know about them?First---reading Decide which of these statements are true and which are false. Tick the correct box. If the statement is false, explain why it is wrong.Reading -- I ( 7m )Body language is never as important as spoken language.
If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.
You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
If you stand with your arms across your body, you are always protecting yourself from being physically attacked.Fis often more important thanTFYou threaten a person by physical action.FYou may be protecting yourself from a conversation you do not want, or you may be showing that you do not agree with someone.5. If you sit looking away from a person, or with your back turned, you are saying you are not interested in that person.
6. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.
7. Body language is the same all over the world.
8. Most people can understand each other if they try.TTFsometimes the same, but it is sometimes quite different.TTry to find some of the body language which shows similar feelings or ideas and some which shows different feelings or ideas in different cultures.Second-readingReading -- II ( 10m )similar body language 1.frowning or turning one’s back to someoneto show anger2. closing one’s hand and shaking it at someoneto threaten that person3. nodding the head up and downto show agreementsimilar body language 4. shaking the head to show disagreement or refusal5. looking away from a person or yawning to show no interest to the person6. standing, holding your arms across your chestto protect yourself from an unwanted conversationsimilar body language 7. sitting, looking at and turning towards the person you are talking to8. rolling your eyes and turn your head awayto show you are interestedto show you do not believe what you hear or you do not like it1.children’s looking directly at an adult in Asia and South Americanot good behavior 2.children’s not looking directly at the teacher in North Americato get punishment from their teachers because they think the children are not telling the truth2. standing too close to your boss or teacher3.a hug to your boss or teachernot acceptable probably not a good idea to show respect1. a smile smileUniversal gesturesA smile does not always mean that one is happy.A smile can hide other feelings, such as anger, fear or worry.If someone “loses face” they may smile to hide it.A smile usually intends to put people at ease.Post –reading Discussion:How can we know other’s feelings, even if they do not speak to us?
Why should we be careful of our own body language ?
Why is it important to watch others as well as listen to them?
What are some jobs in which using body language is extremely important?Discussion ( 5m )Giving PerformancePlease act out according to the following situations(choose either one):Situation 1: You are meeting a British friend in the airport, and you are going to hug him. Imagine what will happen.
Situation 2: You are visiting in another country, and you want to cut hair, but you have difficulty in communicating. How can you communicate with the barber with body language?Language points for reading IIHomework:Read the passage in Reading Task on P66 and then finish the exercise on P67.Take a breakUnit 4 Body LanguagePeriod 5 Listening
and speakingHave a simple revision of the body language:How to express the following meanings: I don’t know
(2) My hand hurt.
(3) Come here.
(4) Good luck!Warming up ( 2m )1.Listen to the story on the cassette tape and write down the correct order.correct order:____ ____ ____ _____ ____ ___2 1 3 4 6 5Listening – I ( 7m )Listen again and then fill in the blanks in the dialogue. While listening, pay attention to the following aspects:What Lin Pu says and does;
What the cyclist says and does;
What the policeman says and does.Listening – II ( 10 m )
Lin Pu has just got his driver’s _______. He has a car too, but he isn’t too happy with it .It is an old car that he bought from his __________ , who smiled happily when Li Pu paid him.
He is driving for the _______time in the city, and is very _________. Taxis are going in every direction. The bicycle riders are not looking at him, and he is beginning to think that he_________ have bought the car.
licensebrother-in-lawfirstnervousshouldn’tSuddenly, the traffic light turns____. He can’t stop in time and turns his left to _____hitting the car in front of him. Crash! He hits a bicycle and ______ over a basket full of apples. And there is a policeman , walking toward him.
Cyclist: Look what you did! All my apples
are on the road! What am I going to ____in the
market? You must pay me for them!
Policeman: Well, what’s the matter here?
Don’t you know you can’t be in two places at
once? redavoidknockssellStay in your lane! Watch the traffic! Pay
attention to the lights, and stop when you are
apposed to! Where do you think you are going?
You’ll have pay a ______for this.
Lin Pu: I’m sorry. I didn’t see this man. I was
trying not to hit the car in front of me. I just
got my licence and I’m not used to ________in
the city.
Cyclist: I don’t care if you are used or not!
What are you going to do about my apples?
(to the policeman) Can’t you make him pay me?finedrivingPoliceman: I can make him pay a fine. I hope you didn’t pay much for this car. You would be able to buy a ________car with the money you will pay for your fine.
Lin Pu: I don’t have any money. I _______all my money on my car. What can I do?
Cyclist: You can pick up my apples.
Policeman : You can sell the car--- if you can find somebody to buy it. You have to pay this fine by the end of the month.
Lin Pu: Oh, dear! Why did I ever want a car?betterspentWork in groups of three and use some verb phrases or sentences to describe each picture. Be prepared to act it out using spoken language and body language.speakingbought a car from his brother-in-lawSpeaking ( 20m )drove nervously for the first timehit a bicycleA policeman walked towards them.knocked over a basket full of applesThe police made Li Pu pay the fine.Presentation: One of you will be Lin Pu, one will be the policeman and one will be the cyclist. Think carefully of the body language they would use. Use some of the following words: You may not… Always stay… Be careful when …
He must … You must… Never … Do not …
You should never …
Watch out …Homework:Give some examples of what you have observed in the body language of others.
Suggest some jobs in which body language is very important.
Write down five different kinds of body language used in our daily life.Take a breakUnit 4 Body LanguagePeriod 6 WritingIn pairs , discuss Lin Pei’s behaviour. Think about the problems she might have and write them down. Describe her “body language” or the behaviour that shows how she feels. Be ready to report to the class.Follow the following example:S1: I think that there is something wrong with Lin Pei. When I saw her today she turned away from me and would not speak.
S2: Yes, when I saw her in the class, she…Pre-writing ( 10 m )Your classmate left very quickly after class, so you want to write him/her a short letter to ask about what is wrong and whether you can help. Use the structure on the right to help you.You can follow the following form:Writing ( 20 m ) Dear______,



Yours truly,
signature(签名)
AssessmentLetterpatternconjsampleExpress your worry and the present situationLetter body (describe her body language and explain why it worries you.)Ending sentences(some advice and encouragement)Homework:Write a letter to an American pen friend, asking him to tell you more, besides what you have learnt in this unit, about body language used in his or her daily communication.Language points for Reading I
Language points for Reading II
Video dataLanguage Data Bank1. represent (vt.)
stand for or be a symbol or equivalent of (sb/sth); symbolize 代表，象征，等于（某人/某事物）；标志这个方程式中的Y代表什么？______________________in this equation?This design___________________________ in modern art.这种设计反映了现代艺术中一种主要的新趋势。2)be an example of (sth.) 是（某事物）的一个例子。What does Y representrepresents a major new trendLanguage points for Reading I2.curious
1)~(about sth/ to do sth)
约翰对人类的起源非常好奇。
John ____ _____ _____ the origin of mankind.
我真想知道她说了什么。
I ____ _____ ____ know what she said.
is curious aboutwas curious toCuriously adv.她一整天都在那里，然而奇怪的是，我却没有看见她。She was there all day . But, curiously, I didn’t see her.curiosity n.好奇心3. introduce (v.): make sb known formally to sb else by giving the person’s name, or by giving each person’s name to the other 把某人介绍给另外的人；使相互认识；引见请允许我介绍一下，这是亚历山大先生。Please______________________ Mr.Alexander.allow me to introduce我想我们未曾彼此介绍过。I don’t think______________________.we’ve been introduced introduction(n.)：formal presentation of one person to another, in which each is told the other’s name(正式的)介绍；引见。
姚明是一个不需要介绍的人（大家都知道的）。是大家相互介绍的时候了。Yao Ming is a person________________________.It is time to ____________________each other.make introductions towho needs no introduction4.Defence (n.): protection(=defense)防卫；防备； 防护。这个词分可数和不可数形式，其意义有所不同。不可数名词代表防卫的行为（action), 可数名词表示可以用来防卫的东西（something)。in sb’s/sth’s defence是词组，表示“在……的防备下”。
They were brave in defence.
They say that the two men were acting in self-defence.5. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they Comfortable in the same way with touching or distance between people.
不是所有人都以同样方式寒暄。接触陌生人是，距离太近或太远都会使他们不舒服。They do not shake hands with women, ___________________kiss women publicly.not…nor… 既不……也不……nor are they likely to2)表示否定意义的nor 放在句首，该句子应用倒装的语序.即把be动词、助动词或情态动词放在主语前。Nobody can learn body language in one day,
________.没有人能在用一天就学会体态语，我 也不能。nor can I类似的用法还有：not, never, neither, hardly, seldom等。Never has he been to Columbia.________________________at the party last night.他昨晚在晚会上一句话也没有说。Not a single word did he say他从来都没有去过哥伦比亚。6.In general: usually or in most situations: used when talking about the whole of a situation, group, or thing, rather than specific parts of it.”.
In general, your plan is good.
你们的方案总的来看是好的。
　People in general like her.
大多数人都喜欢她。7.avoid:
1)Keep oneself away from (sb/sth) 避开，躲避
　avoid (driving in )the centre of town
2)Stop (sth.) happening; prevent 防止（某事）发生； 预防
As a new driver, Belin tries her best to avoid accidents.1. nod
1)v. ~(to / at sb)
老师同意地点点头。
The teacher _______ _________ _______
她从我身边走过时向我点头致意。
She ______ _______ ________ as she passed.
2)vt. ~sth (to sb)
他对我点点头表示欢迎。nodded in agreementnodded to meHe _____ ______ __________ to me.nodded a welcomeLanguage points for Reading IIn. act of nodding the head 点头
她走过时朝我点一下头。
She _____ me _____ _____ as she passed.gave a nod 2. ease(n.): 安逸； 安心； 没有痛苦、烦恼或愤怒
At ease : feeling relaxed, especially in a situation in which people might feel a little nervous,常与with连用。
a smile that put us at ease.
使我们感到无拘无束的微笑。The End课件138张PPT。 Unit 4
Body language Teaching planPeriod 1&2: Warming up & Reading
Period 3: Language & Structure
Period 4: Using Language
Period 5: Listening & Speaking
& Writing
Period 6: Workbook reading and
practiceTeaching aimGet to know what is body language
Cultural differences & intercultural communicationCan you guess
what is in
Yao Ming's mind? Warming upinspired/disappointedregretful/excitedconfident/confusedYou’re great!Come and join us!I’m listening carefully!What are they trying to tell us?How are they expressing themselves?Please stop!Nice to meet you!I’m sorry!Give me a little time!I’m thinking!It’s important.I give up.OK!Let’s enjoy a short film
What is he eating?
Does he enjoy it?1. Who is the funny man in the film?2. Do the actors say anything in the show?3. How do they express themselves?4. What do you call that?Charlie Chaplin.No, nothing.By what they do and their facial expressions.Body language.Body Language is a form of non-verbal communication.
It uses movements or positions of our body to show other people what we are thinking or feeling.
It includes body movements, facial expressions, gestures, posture , speaking distance and other non-verbal signals.What is body language?Game: Choose a student to the front of the blackboard and bring out the meaning of some words by some postures.1. I am worried.
2.I ate too much.
3.I am sorry I did something wrong.Twisting hands together or holding headPatting or rubbing stomach.Hanging head.Smiling, arms open and head back.Frown and turn your back to someoneClose your hand and shake it at someone.smileNod the head up and down or shake the headLook away from a person or yawnTurn toward the person you are talking to.Roll your eyes and turn your head away.Communication : No problem?Reading passage:ReadingFirst reading :After your listening, decide how many parts the passage can be divided into, and find out the main idea of each part._______________ People from different countries express greetings in different ways.
____________ Meet the visitors at the airport
____________ the reason why body languages are differentPart 2(para2345)Part 1(para1)Part 3(para6) Second reading Part 1people presentpurpose businessmen from foreign countries
local businessmenpeople representing the Chinese governmentinterested1 . Who will be present at the meeting?
2 . Why are people visiting China?meetMr Garcia (Columbia)
Julia Smith (Britain)
Visitor (Japan)
George Cook (Canada)
Madame Coulon (France)Matching the people and their different ways of greeting (para2&5)shakes hands and kisses others twice on each cheek
bows
shakes hands
approaches others closely and touches their shoulder and kisses them on the cheek
does not stand very close to others or touch strangers Part 2How do they behave when they meet people they know?(p.27)Shake hands. Do not stand very close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.Shake hands.Bow.Approach others closely and are more likely to touch them.Shake hands and kiss each other twice on each cheek.Shake hands and stand quite close to other men. Nods to women and do not shake hands with them.Part3 How can we understand “None of these actions is either good or bad”?When in Rome, do as the Romans do.Comprehending(p.26): 1. Answers to the Qs
They are visiting China because they are interested in the development of business in China.
Africa, Australia and Central America are not represented.
Julia Smith is surprised because Mr Garcia approaches her, touches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheek.
You move back because Ahmed Aziz is standing very close to you.developing businessstated5. French people will often shake hands and kiss people they know on each other’s cheeks.
6. No, we can’t. Because not all cultures greet each other the same way / Because cultures have developed in different ways.
7. So that we do not misunderstand each other./so that we can understand other cultures/so that we do not make enemies.
8. The main character is male. Ahmed Aziz shakes hands with him, but does not shake hands with the women.Question timeDo you have any difficulty?1.They will be meeting at a major hotel with local business people and people who represent the Chinese government.
他们将在一家大饭店同当地的商务人员和中国政府官员会晤。
2.Four people enter looking around in a curios way.
有四个人走了进来，好奇的四处张望。
3.You do not want to disappoint your boss, and this is an exciting experience for you,…
你不想让你的老板失望，况且这对你来说是一个令人兴奋的经历，于是你站在一旁，观看着、倾听着。
4.You see her step back appearing surprised, and take a few steps away from Mr Garcia.
你看到她吃惊的往后退，离开加西亚先生几步远。
5. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching strangers or being too close or too far away.
各种文化背景下的人相互问候的方式不尽相同，触摸陌生人、彼此靠得太近或距离太远，都会使他们不舒服。 Sum up or draw a conclusion of the text. The questions below may give you some hints.Can we expect people everywhere to act the same? Why? Why do you think we need to study body language? People in different parts of the world don’t act the same. Their body languages vary from culture to culture and may be different because of social background.
Learning a foreign language is more than learning the knowledge of the language itself.
It is important for us to be aware of the culture difference because it is crucial and indispensable for successful communication.Summary :Body language varies from culture to culture. Not all members of all cultures behave the same way. We should try to grasp and respect each other’s culture in order to make good communication.Fill in the blanks The first person who arrives is Mr. Garcia from Columbia, closely _________ by Julia Smith from Britain. When they are introduced to each other, Mr.Garcia approaches Ms Smith, _______ her shoulder and _______ her on the cheek . Ms Smith steps back appearing surprised. The visitor
from Japan comes in smiling at the same time as George Cook from Canada. As they are introduced, Mr. Cook _______ his hand out to the Japanese who ______ . His nose touches Mr. Cook’s moving hand, and they both _________. followedtoucheskissesreachesbowsapologize These are examples of learned or cultural “body language”. Not all cultures ________ each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching _________ or being too close or too far away. In the same way that people __________ with spoken language, they also __________ their feelings using unspoken “language” through keeping physical distance, actions or _________.
expresscommunicatestrangersgreetposture Body language is used by people for sending messages to one another. In many countries in the world, men k____ each other when they meet. In Britain, people usually s_____ hands when they meet someone for the first time. They are not comfortable touching s_______. French people kiss each other hello and g______ on the c_____ more often than the British people. People from the USA or Arabian countries stand c_____ than people from Britain when they are talking. They might move very close to you as you i________ yourself to them. Body language is very g______ and not all members of all cultures b______ the same way. Using body language in a correct way will help you to better c___________ with other people.isshaketrangersoodbyeheekloserntroduce eneralehaveommunicateFill in the blanksLanguage points
1. They will be meeting at a major hotel with local business people and people who represent the Chinese government.
他们江会在大酒店与当地商人和代表中国政府的人们会面。
1) will be meeting 将要见面
will/shall be doing 表示“预料将要发生的动作”，在现代英语口语中用得很多，口气往往比较婉转、随便。
When will they be visiting us again?
你什么时候再来看望我们？
I shall shortly be attending an international conference. 不久，我就要去参加一个国际会议了。 major adj. 较大的，主要的
The car needs major repairs. 这辆车需要大修。
n. 专业
Her major is linguistics. 她的专业是语言学。
vi. 主修，专攻
I major in biology. 我主修生物。
3) local adj. 本地的，地方的，地区的
Last Thursday he received a letter from the local police.
上星期二他接到了当地警察局的一封信。
be located in 坐落于… …4) represent v. 代表(stand for)，象征，标志；作为示范；作 为… …的例子
These stones represent armies.
那些石头代表部队。
represent oneself as/to be 自称是
represent … as 把 … …描绘成（看作）… …
represent … to sb 向某人表示 … …
representative n. 代理人，代表 adj. 典型的，有代表性的
representation n. 表现，描写；代表，代理2 Four people enter looking around in a curious way. 有四个人走了进来，好奇地四处张望。
1) looking around in a curious way 用作状语，表示enter的伴随状态。
She sat at the desk reading a newspaper.
她坐在桌子旁看报纸。
Tom went to school, taking a train.
Tom 坐火车去上学。
While reading the news paper, he nodded from time to time. 看报纸时，他不断地点头。
Not having received a reply, we wrote again.
没有受到回信，我们又写了一封。 2) curious adj. 富有好奇心的；有求知欲的；感兴趣的
Don’t be too curious about things you are not supposed to know.
不要对那些你不应该知道的事情太过于好奇。
The tourists were surrounded by the curious children. 游客被好奇的孩子们围起来了。
be curious about 对… …感到好奇
be curious to do 急于做/极想做
It is curious that … …很奇怪。
out of curiosity 出于好奇
in/with curiosity 好奇地3. The first person who arrives is Mr Garcia form Columbia, closely followed by Julia Smith from Britain. 第一个到达的是来自Columbia的Mr Garcia, 来自Britain 的Julia Smith紧随其后。
closely adv. 接近地，紧紧地
He entered the room, closely followed by the rest of the family. 他走进房间，后面紧跟着他的家人。
closely 与close的区别
close adv. 紧紧地，接近地。强调空间距离近，相当于near; closely也有此意，但语气较强，相当于very near.
closely adv.常用来说明动作以怎样的方式进行。有比喻的用法。意为“亲密地，紧紧地，仔细地，严密地” close to ＋n. 靠近，接近；将近
stand/sit/live close to +sb./sth 和某人/某物站得/坐得/住得近
4. You introduce them to each other, and are surprised by what you see.
你介绍他们彼此认识，却对你所看到的情景感到吃惊。
introduce sb./sth to sb. 向某人介绍某人/某物
introduce sth into/in spl. 把某物传人或引进某地方
introduction n. 介绍；介绍的内容；导言；引论
make an introduction/introductions to sb. 向某人介绍… …I will introduce my best friend Tom to you.
我要把我最好的朋友Tom介绍给你。
Buddhism was introduced into China in about A.D. 67. 佛教大约在公元67年传人中国。
5. Mr Garcia approaches Ms Smith, touches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheek.
加西亚先生走近史密斯女士，摸了摸她的肩，亲了亲她的脸。
1)approach v. 走近；接近；临近
n.走近；临近；对待、处理的方式
Few actors approaches him in ability.
With the approach of Christmas the wather turned colder.approach sb. on sth. 为某事与某人打交道
approach a problem from different angles 从不同的观点研究问题
at the approach of 在快到… …的时候
approach sb about/for sth 向某人要求某物
2) kiss sb. on the cheek 亲吻某人的面颊
The mother kissed her child on the cheek and said good-night.
母亲亲吻了孩子的脸颊，然后道了声晚安。
vt.+sb. in/on/by +the +身体部位
take/pull/grasp/seize/catch/hold/lead sb. by the ear/nose/ hand/arm/sleeve
hit/strike/touch/pat sb. in the face/eye/ stomach/ side/chest/
hit/strike/touch/pat sb. On the head/ shoulder/ nose/ neck/ back6. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching strangers or being too close or too far away.
不是所有人都是以相同的方式来互知致问候的。触摸陌生人、距离太近或者太远并不都会使人感到舒服。
not 与all, both, every, each 及含every 的合成词连用时，无论not位于这些词的前面还是后面，都构成部分否定，意为“并非所有的… …都… …”
表示全部否定，要用none, neither, no one, nothing或no等来表示或借用never, not…at all来进行全部否定。
I agree with most of what you said, but I don’t agree with everything.2) not …nor…既不… …也不… …
They do not shake hands with women, nor are they likely to kiss women publicly.
他们既不与妇女握手，也不在公共场合亲吻他们。
3）nor 放在句首，该句子应用部分倒装语序，即把be动词、助动词或情态动词放在主语前面。
Not a single word did he say at the meeting last night.
昨天在会上他一句话也没说。
Never has he been to China.
他从来没有来过中国。注：① 含有否定意义的副词置于句首。如:not, never, seldom, hardly, rarely, little等。
② 含有否定意义的连词置于句首。如：not only…but also, neither…nor…, no sooner…than…, hardly…when, scarcely…when…等。
③含有否定意义的介词短语置于句首。如：by no means, in no time, in no case, on no account, under no circumstances等。
④ neither, nor（表示否定）；so（表示肯定）置于句首，表示后面所说的情况与前面所说的情况相同。7. People from places like Spain, Italy or South American countries approach others closely and are more likely to touch them.
从西班牙、意大利或南美洲国家来的人近距离地接近对方，而且可能会（用身体）接触对方。
sb/sth is likely to do sth.
It’s likely that 从句
He’s very likely to be late for class.
他很有可能会迟到上课。
It is likely to rain tonight.
今晚可能要下雨。 likely/probable/possible 的区别
三者都可以表示“可能”
possible强调客观上有可能性，但也常常暗示“实际上希望很少”。It is possible for sb. to do sth.或 It is possible +that 从句。作表语时不能用人作主语。
probable主要用来指有根据、合情理、值得相信的事情，带有“大概，很可能”的意味，语气较possible强。It is probable +that从句。作表语时不用人或不定式作主语。
likely侧重从表面看，某物很有可能发生，与probable意思相近。即可用人也可用物作主语。It is likely +that从句. 或sb./sth be likely to do sth.不能说 It is likely for sb to do sth. 8. Most people around the world now greet each other by shaking hands, but some cultures use other greetings as well.
现在世界上多数人见面要握手互相问候，但是有些文化（背景下的人）会采取另外一些寒暄方式。
as well 同样，也，还
I am interested in painting and dancing as well.
我对绘画和跳舞都感兴趣。
It’s a big surprise for him as well as for her.
这对于他和她都是一个惊喜。8. But Ahmed Aziz simply nods at the two women.
但艾哈迈迪·阿齐兹却只是向两位女士点头。
1) v. nod (to / at sb)
老师同意地点点头。
The teacher _______ _________ _______
她从我身边走过时向我点头致意。
She ______ _______ ________ as she passed.
2) vt. nod sth (to sb)
他对我点点头表示欢迎。
He _____ ______ __________ to me.nodded in agreementnodded to menodded a welcome 3) n. act of nodding the head 点头
她走过时朝我点一下头。
She _____ me _____ _____ as she passed.
nod to do sth. 点头同意做某事
nod in agreement 点头表示同意
with a nod 点一下头gave a nod 9. It is an interesting study and can help you avoid difficulty in communication.
这个研究很有趣，它能帮你避免交际中（可能出现）的困难。
avoid v. 逃避；避免；回避 avoidable adj.
avoid n./doing sth
I realized that we were all trying to avoid the topic.
我意识到我们都在尽力地避免这个话题。
类似avoid的及物动词有：advise, suggest, finish, practice, dislike, enjoy, consider, appreciate, imagine, excuse, miss, forbid, allow, permit, mind, escape等Homework ●●Have a dictationRecite P1 and P2Language & structurePeriod 3
Studying the –ing form as
the attribute and the adverbialTeaching aimsget the students to use the-ing form as the adverbial and the attribute. get the students to master the useful words and expressions learnt in the reading. check the homework: Look at the reading passage again to find words and expressions that mean the same.
local arearepresentapproachmajorexpresscuriousgeneral likely toavoidComplete the following sentences with some of the words and expressions from the reading.
It is a _______ problem parking your car in Beijing.
Is that Wang LI’s friend from Wuxi? I’d like him to _________ her to me.
As my English vocabulary is very limited, very often I express my meaning with the help of ________________.
In ________, it is better not to kiss somebody you don’t know as you may surprise them.
My leader wants me to ____________ her at the meeting.majorintroduce body languagegeneralrepresent6. There is a saying that _______ speak louder than words.
7. Blind people have to understand people’s feelings through ______ language.
8. Although blind people are not __________ understand your body language, they can still use body language to _______ their own ideas.
9. When you ___________ blind people, they cannot tell if they know you until you begin to speak.actionsspoken likely to expressapproach10. I am always ______ about how he ________ bumping into others or falling sown while walking on the street.
11. The ________ opinion is that the _____ government should take action to help the blind peoplecuriousavoidsgenerallocalAnswer keys for Ex.3 on Page 28:verbnounactionnounadjectivecuriousnounnounnounnounintroducerepresentlocalavoidverbverbadjectiveverb现在分词作定语，当分词单独做定语时，放在所修饰的名词前,说明其修饰名词的性质或特征,表示供作...之用”和...的”.
现在分词作定语a walking stick(a stick used for walking)drinking waterwater for drinking a waiting rooma room for waiting working peoplethe rising sun动词 -ing 形式是短语，应放在所修饰的名词后，相当于
一个定语从句。They are visitors coming from several countries.who come from several countries.Three days later I received a letter offering me the job.which offered me the job.The girl standing there __________________
is my classmate.who stands therePractice:
____ dogs seldom bite.
Bark B. To bark C. Barked D. Barking
(2) The wolf spoke in a _____ voice and Mr. Dongguo felt______.
frightening; frightened
B. frightened; frightened
C. frighten; frightening
D. frightening; frighteningDA(3) It’s pleasure to watch the face of a ____ baby.
asleep B. sleep C. sleeping D. slept
(4) The ____ buildings showed us that an earthquake was coming.
A. shaking B. shook C. shaken D. shake CA5. When the first settlers arrived in the New World, the
Indians __________ jewellerly made of animal bones
greeted them warmly.
A. wearing B. to wear C. worn D. having worn
6.The hotel ___________ now beside the park was designed
by a group of young men.
A. to be built B .being built C .built D. building7.Do you know the boy _______there talking to your sister?
A. to be standing B. stood C. being standing D. standing现在分词作状语 现在分词作状语时，分词的逻辑主语必须是
句子的主语，分词必须和句中的主语含有逻辑上
的主谓关系，否则不能用现在分词作状语。
但要注意它地各种形式变化：
主动形式 被动形式
V-ing being V-ed
having V-ed having been V-ed 一般式完成式Eg. Hearing the bell, the students began to enter the classroom. 听见铃声，学生们开始走进教室。（听见和进入两个动作同时发生）
The building being built now is our new library. 现在正在建造地 这栋楼房室我们地 新图书馆（being built为现在分词的被动形式，表示动作正在进行之中。）Having done the work, he went home. 完成了工作，他就回家了。现在分词作状语现在分词在句中作状语，修饰谓语动词或整个句子，表示动作发生的原因、时间、方式、结果、条件、伴随状况等。现在分词一般不用作表目的地状语（通常用不定式表目的地状语）。
Walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.
(=When I was walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.)While waiting for the bus, he read a copy of China Daily.
(=While waiting for the bus,he read a copy of China Daily.)1）表时间状语2) 表原因状语
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
(=as he was ill, he didn’t go to school.)Being a student, you should study hard.
(=Since you are a student, you should study hard.）既然你是一个学生，你就应该努力学习。由于想到它或许在家，所以我就给他打了电话。Thinking he might be at home, I called him.
(As I thought he might be at home, I called him.) 3)表方式、伴随情况的状语 ：作伴随状语的分词表示的动作，必须是主语的一个 动作，或是与谓语所表示地动作（或状态）同时发生，或是对谓语表示的动词（或状态）作进一步地补充说明。Eg. He sat on the sofa, watching TV.
(=He sat on the sofa, and watched TV.)他们笑着谈着走进了教室。__________________ , they went into the classroom.他斜靠(lean)着墙站着。He stood leaning against the wall.(＝He stood and leaned against the wall.)Laughing and talking4) 表结果
Eg. Her mother died in 1990, leaving her with her younger brother.
(=Her mother died in 1990, and left her with her younger brother.)全国到处在传唱这首歌曲，使它成了一首最受欢迎地歌曲。The song is sung all over the country,__________________________________.making it the most popular song5)表条件Using your head, you will find a way.
(=If you use your head, you will find a way.)一直往前走，你就会看到一座白色地房子。______________, you will see a white house.Walking ahead(6)与逻辑主语构成独立主格：
　I waiting for the bus, a bird fell on my heard．
　我等汽车时，一只鸟落到我头上。
　All the tickets having been sold out, they went away disappointedly.
　所有的票已经卖光了，他们失望地离开了。
　Time permitting, we'll do another two exercises.
如果时间允许，我们将做另两个练习。
　有时也可用with (without) +名词（代词宾格）+分词形式
　With the lights burning, he fell asleep. 他点着灯睡着了。
(7)作独立成分：
　Judging from(by) his appearance, he must be an actor.
　从外表看，他一定是个演员。Practise:
They set out ____ for the ____ boy.
searching; losing B. searching; lost
C. to search; lost D. searched; losing
(2) The student sat there, ____ what to do.
doesn’t knowing B. didn’t knowing
C. not know D. not knowingBD现在分词的否定式是在一般式和完成式的前面加not (never)(3)He sat there _____ , with his head on his hand.
and think B. thinking
C. thought D. being thought
(4) The ____ Prime Minister expressed his satisfaction with his talks, ___ that he had enjoyed his stay here.
visiting; add B. visited; adding
C. visiting; adding D. visited; addedBC5.In winter steam can be seen ______from wet clothes ______
near a fire.
A. rising, hanging B. rising , to hang
C. rise, hanging D. to rise, to hang
6.I couldn’t do my homework with all that noise ________.
A. going on B. goes on C. went on D. to go on
7.Yesterday Professor Li received a letter from one of his friends,
_________ him to write an article, and he accepted.
A. having invited B. invited C. to be invited D. inviting
8. Finding her car stolen, ____________________________.
A. a policeman was asked to help
B. the area was searched thoroughly
C. it was looked for everywhere
D. she hurried to a policeman for help
9._____________, the boy couldn’t enter his house.
A. Since the key has lost B. The key been lost
C. Lost the key D. Having lost the key
AADDD1.The secretary worked late into the night, _____a long speech for the president.(MET91)
To prepare B. preparing C. prepared D. was preparing
2.European foot ball is played in 80 countries, ______ it the most popular sport in the world.(NMET 98)
Making B. makes C. made D. to makeB现在分词表结果状语A 现在分词作伴随状语高考链接3. “Can’t you read?” Mary said _______ to the notice. (MET93)
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily point D. and angrily pointingA现在分词作伴随状语4. ____ a reply, he decided to write again.(MET92)
Not receiving B. Receiving not C. Not having received D. Having not received
5.______ his telephone number, she had some difficulty getting in touch with Bill.(上海91年题)
Not knowing B. knowing not
C. Not having known D. Having not knownCA现在分词作原因状语，分词结构中否定词通常放在现在分词前面。作原因状语6.While watching television, ___________. (NMET 2005)
A. the doorbell rang B. the doorbell rings
C. we heard the doorbell ring D. we heard the doorbell rings
7. _______ the programme, they have to stay there for
another two weeks.(2004.广东）
A. Not completing B. Not completed
C. Not having completed D. Having not completed
8. “You can’t catch me!” Janet shouted, ____ away. (NEMT 2005)
A. run B. running C. to run D. ran
9. “We can’t go out in this weather,” said Bob, _______out of
the window. (NMET 2004)
A. looking B. to look C. looked D. having been looked
10. The storm left, ____a lot of damage to this area. (NEMT 2005)
A. caused B. to have caused C. to cause D. having caused
DCBADHomework:Finish the Ex. 3 and the exercises in Using structures.Unit 4 Body LanguagePeriod 4Showing our feelingsTeaching aimsGet to know the use of body language as the expression of personal emotion and reactions.Get to know the use of some words &expressions &V-ing formI am tired.I am full.I am hungry. press palms/rest
your head on it/
eyes closed move hand
in circle pat stomachUsually what gestures we will do ?Warming up ( 10 m ) show interest be rude or disrespectful money zero rudenessOK eye contact thumbs upCan you figure out the meanings of the following gestures in the following countries? the number one rude great / good jobWell-doneOk stopquietGesturesvictory!
Leading-in In what kind of ways can we show our feelings such as excitement? Two ways :
Spoken language----

Unspoken language----
I am so excited !!body languageSkimmingDivide the text into three parts and match the main idea with each part.Part 1
(Para 1)
Part 2
(Para 2-Para6)
Part 3
(Para 7-Para8)
Body language is sometimes more important than spoken language. examples of some body language. There are differences in body language, and it’s important for us to know them.Body language is never as important as spoken language.
If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.
You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
If you stand with your arms across your body, you are always protecting yourself from being physically attacked.Fis often more important thanTFYou threaten a person by physical action.FYou may be protecting yourself from a conversation you do not want, or you may be showing that you do not agree with someone.Listening5. If you sit looking away from a person, or with your back turned, you are saying you are not interested in that person.
6. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.
7. Body language is the same all over the world.
8. Most people can understand each other if they try.TTFsometimes the same, but it is sometimes quite different.Tsimilar body language 1.frowning or turning one’s back to someoneto show anger2. closing one’s hand and shaking it at someoneto threaten that person3. nodding the head up and downto show agreementCareful
readingsimilar body language 4. shaking the head to show disagreement or refusal5. looking away from a person or yawning to show no interest to the person6. standing, holding your arms across your chestto protect yourself from an unwanted conversationsimilar body language 7. sitting, looking at and turning towards the person you are talking to8. rolling your eyes and turn your head awayto show you are interestedto show you do not believe what you hear or you do not like it1.children’s looking directly at an adult in Asia and South Americanot good behavior 2.children’s not looking directly at the teacher in North Americato get punishment from their teachers because they think the children are not telling the truth2. standing too close to your boss or teacher3.a hug to your boss or teachernot acceptable probably not a good idea to show respect1. a smile smileUniversal gesturesA smile does not always mean that one is happy.A smile can hide other feelings, such as anger, fear or worry.If someone “loses face” they may smile to hide it.A smile usually intends to put people at ease.I. Answer the Following QuestionsTell us what’s the fun_ction of Body language?
How do you understand “smile”?
Cultures are different in different parts of the world. So find out an example in the passage.Tell us what’s the fun_ction of Body language?2) How do you understand “smile”?3)Cultures are different in different parts of the world. So find out an example in the passage.Showing all kinds of feelings, wishes and attitudes.Facial expression, happy , hiding other feelings, like anger, fear or worryLook at somebody directly or not There are many phrases about “Body language”. Find them out and give the correct explanation in English , then try your best to act them out.Question 4
生某人的气
威胁某人
以笑掩饰“丢脸”
对某人不感兴趣
保护自己或躲开谈话
不相信听到的话或不喜欢听到的事情Think over the questions below and discuss it with your partners. Make notes during your discussion.How can we know others’ feelings, even if they don’t speak?
Give us an example of a person whose “Body language” is very important in your mind. Tell us your reasons.DiscussionLanguage points similar adj. 类似的， 相似的
similarity n. 相似，类似 similarly adv. 相似地
* be similar to… 与……相似，类似于Eg: We have similar taste in music. 我们在音乐方面的爱好相近。 My opinion is similar to yours. 我的想法与你的类似。2. intend （plan, mean to do） 打算， 想要， 企图(1)I __________ use the facial expression to show my satisfaction. 一般人作主语
(2) The facial expression ___________ show my satisfaction. 一般物作主语
(3). The book ____________ teachers.
这种书是给老师（设计的）
(4).They ___________ the plan should be put into practice within the year.
他们打算在本年内实行该计划。 intend to is intended to is intended forintend that3. You should not stand too close to him or her and should stand with your hands a little open to show that you are willing to listen.他习惯于开着门睡觉。 He is used to sleeping with the door open.我不能去度假，因为有很多东西等着我处理。With so many things to deal with, I can’t go on holiday.他没有关灯就离开教室啦。He left the classroom with the light on. 4. We can often be wrong about each other, so it is an amazing thing that we understand each other as well as we do.事实证明我们都误解他啦。The fact proves that we were all wrong about him. It was natural that he should think so.It is a/an amazing/surprising/exciting thing that sb (should) do 后经常跟虚拟语气It is really a surprising thing that the girl marry so early. 他如果那样想，就很正常啦。如果女孩这么早结婚会令人很吃惊的。II.Explain the following phrases.spoken language
facial expression
be intended to
be wrong about sb
turn toward sb
look away from口头语言
面部表情
有意干……
误解某人
转向某人
不看，不注视 Period 5Listening,Speaking&WritingCurriculum Focus Language skill
listening, speaking and writingCharacter building
To get to learn that their own emotional states can be understood through their body languageThumbs up!Thumbs down!Bite your nails!Cup your ear!Make a face!Keeping your fingers crossed!Touching your stomach! Holding up your head!A smile and a handshake!let's doPre-listening (3m)What do these facial expressions suggest?Have you ever experienced such kind of situation where you are embarrassed?embarrassmentTo Drive Or Not To DrivePlease guess what happened to Lin Pu from their body language in the picture.Look at the pictures of the story and arrange them by numbers in the correct order to tell the story.correct order:___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___2Listening – I ( 5m )13465Listen again and then fill in the blanks in the dialogue. What Lin Pu says and does;Listening – II ( 10 m )AttentionWhat the cyclist says and does;What the policeman says and does. Lin Pu has just got his driver’s _______. He has a car too, but he isn’t too happy with it. It is an old car that he bought from his __________ , who smiled happily when Lin Pu paid him.
He is driving for the ____time in the city, and is very _______. Taxis are going in every direction. The bicycle riders are not looking at him, and he is beginning to think that he________ have bought the car. licencebrother-in-lawfirstnervousshouldn’tSuddenly, the traffic light turns____. He can’t stop in time and turns his left to _____ hitting the car in front of him. Crash! He hits a bicycle and _____ over a basket full of apples. And there is a policeman, walking toward him.
C – Cyclist P– Policeman L– Lin Pu
Cyclist: Look what you did! All my apples
are on the road! What am I going to ____in the market? You must ___ me for them!
Policeman: Well, what’s the matter here?
Don’t you know you can’t be in two places at
once? Stay in your lane! Watch the______! redavoidknockssellpaytrafficPay attention to the lights, and stop when you are apposed to! Where do you think you are going? You’ll have pay a ______ for this.
Lin Pu: I’m sorry. I didn’t see this man. I was trying not to hit the car in front of me. I just got my licence and I’m not used to ________in the city.
Cyclist: I don’t care if you are used or not! What are you going to do about my apples? (to the policeman) Can’t you make him pay me?finedriving Policeman: I can make him pay a fine. I hope you didn’t pay much for this car. You would be able to buy a ______car with the money you will pay for your fine.
Lin Pu: I don’t have any money. I _____ all my money on my car. What can I do?
Cyclist: You can ____ __ my apples.
Policeman : You can sell the car--- if you can find somebody to buy it. You have to pay this fine by the end of the month.
Lin Pu: Oh, dear! Why did I ever want a car?betterspentpick upYou may not…
Always stay…
He must …
Be careful when …Speaking ( 13m )Work in groups of three and use some verb phrases or sentences to describe each picture. Be prepared to act it out using spoken language as well as body language. The following words may help you.You must…
Never… / Do not …
Watch out …
You should never … the brother in law smiling very happily and rubbing his hands with joy.bought a car from his brother-in-lawLin Pu and his brother-in-lawMoney changing hands,smiling faces,shaking hands,Scene 1driving nervously for the first timereacting to crash.Lin PuNervously looking around,reacting to traffic,sudden left turn,Scene 2Lin Pu hit a bicycleLin Pu knocked over a basket full of applesLin Pu and a cyclistThe cyclistMy hand hurt.Come here.Scene 3shaking his fist (closed hand ) at Lin Pu ,Lin Pu ,the cyclist and a policemanL and the cyclist quarreled, and a policeman walked towards them.angry, shoutingpointing at bicycle, pointing at apples on road,Scene 4The police made Li Pu pay the fine.Lin Pu ,the cyclist and the policemanWalking slowly and frowning,Taking out paper to write on, Shaking finger at Lin Pu, Pointing at red light, Pointing at traffic lanes,Shaking his head Scene 5Positive
Body LanguageMake a list of body language expressions showing both positive and negative feelings.SmilingNoddingLooking toward
someonePre-writing: pair work(4 m ) Negative
Body LanguageClosing your hand and shaking it at someoneRolling your eyes and turning your head awayHolding your arms across your chestDiscuss Lin Pei’s behavior. Think about the problems she might have and write them down. Describe her “body language” or the behavior that shows how she feels. While-writing: pair work(5 m ) 1. What’s wrong with Lin Pei? 2. What are her strange behaviors?3. Why her behaviors worry you? 4. Why did she act in that way?5. Why is body language important?6. What is your advice for her?Express your worry and the present situationLetter body (describe her body language and explain why it worries you.)Ending sentences(some advice and encouragement)Dear______,Yours truly,A purpose
Some ideas
Some structures
High-level sentences
Clear steps
Some conjunctions
A summary
Good handwritingWhat makes a good writing?Homework:Finish the writing.
Write down five different kinds of body language used in our daily life.

Reading Task in workbook(P66)
The Open Hand-
A Universal Sign Look at the pictures below and think:
In what situation do they shake hands? This information was found in the notes left by an anthropologist. Arrange and organize it so that it can be used to write a summary.Possible answers:It can be dangerous for you to meet
people you do not know.
2 Many Asian people do not usually physically
touch strangers.
3. If we show an open hand, it means that
we are not holding anything dangerous.4. The right hand is usually used because it is almost always the stronger.
5. People shake their hands when meeting people to show that they can be trusted.
6. To show respect Muslim people will touch their heart and mouth when greeting someone.Discussion:
You are meeting a British friend
at the airport, and you are going
to hug him.
Imagine what will
happen ?Translate the following sentences:
a.如果他们不来，怎么办呢？
b.倘使我们不能按时到达，将会这样？
c.如果我们在不熟悉的地方碰到陌生人，那该怎么办？
Difficult points:What if we don’t know who the new person is?
What if … 倘使…将会怎样？What if we are meeting a stranger in an
unfamiliar place?
What if we can’t get there on time?
What if they do not come?Check the translation: Ex 3 WB.1.当你走近一个人的时候，你的面部表情会表现出你是否友好。（approach;facial;expression)When you approach someone,your facial expression show if you are friendly.2.我对他们在舞台上怎样演出喜剧感到非常好奇。
(curious;comedy;represent)I am very curious about how they represent the comedy on the stage.They are likely to misunderstand each other, and can’t reach an agreement about the matter.4.我惊讶地发现这两种相似的手势表达了如此不同的意见。（similar;gesture;express)I am astonished at how the two similar gestures expressed such different meanings.5. 一般说来，人们愿意坐火车而不坐飞机以避过大的开销。（ in general; avoid)In general,people would rather take a train than take a plane to avoid spending so much on travel.3.他们很可能产生了误会，而且在这个问题上也不会达成一致。（likely to; misunderstand; agreement)课件37张PPT。Body LanguagespeakingringingwritingtypingSpoken
languageWritten
languageBody
languageWays of communicatation gesturefacial expression actionListening and performingIf you are happyListen to the song and pay attention to the three kinds of body language mentioned.Do them together.
If you’re happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it never be afraid to show it
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it Never be afraid to show it
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it __________________
If you're happy and you know it never be afraid to show it
If you're happy and you know it __________________clap your handsclap your handsclap your handsstomp your feetstomp your feetstomp your feetwink your eyewink your eyewink your eyeWhat is body language? Body language is one form of nonverbal communication (非言辞交际) without using words. Eye contact or gaze, facial expression, gesture, and posture (姿势), or the way you stand, are different kinds of body language.sadconfused“I have lost my wallet！”“I can’t believe what she said. That’s so unfair！”“I got an A in maths！”“I don’t know what to do.”happyangryFacial expressionsdisappointed shy Facial expressionsastonished look down upon sb brainstorminghappysadsurprisedEye contact ( touch) I love you ! Oh, I give up I am so happy hold up one’s headA. I’m proud.
B. I’m sad.
C. I’m angry.roll one’s eyesA. I’m interested in it.
B. I don’t believe it.
C. I know it.
Good!Bad!
Come here!I don’t know!Please call me!I love you!JapanB) angryD) evil (邪恶)C) I hate youA) happyFranceA) I don’t believe you.C) I am joking.B) I don’t like you.D) You foolA) I don’t believe you.You’re great!Come and join us!I’m listening carefully!What are they trying to tell us?How are they expressing themselves?Please stop!Nice to meet you!I’m sorry!Give me a little time!I’m thinking!It’s important.I give up.OK! Match the two columnsIt's your turn. Now imagine that you are
having a stomachache.
How can let us know
that without speaking ?performingHow to express these feelings
with body language?I eat too much!I am sorry that I did something wrong.I’m so happy.out of breathDo people all over the world act the same?make a circle with one’s thumb and index fingergesture forOK3minJapan
in France
in Brazil and
Germany
Different ways to meet or parthandshakea loving huga kiss on the cheeknose- kisstwo palms togetherbowingDifferent countries have different body languages.
Different body languages has
the the same meaning.
Same body language has the
different meanings.
Just like verbal language(言辞), body language is part of culture. It plays an important role in daily communication. So, it is very important to understand and use it correctly. And for a foreign language learner, it is as necessary to learn the body language as to learn the verbal language.Homework: preview the text. 课件30张PPT。GrammarAnswer key for Exercise 1.defence, likely, Italy, canteen, represent,
dash, approach, association, cheek, flightDiscovering useful words and expressionsAnswer key for Exercise 2.approached, Jordan, cheek, curiously,
dashed, misunderstood, contraryAnswer key for Exercise 3.crossroads, adult, major, dormitory,
greeted, representing, association,
spoken, Colombia, curious, flight 一: V-ing 形式由 “do＋ing” 构成, 其否定形式是 “not doing”, V-ing 可以带宾语或状语构成 V-ing 短语, 没有人称和数的变化, 但有时态和语态的变化。GrammarV-ing 形式(not) doing(not) being done(not)
having done(not)
having been done V-ing 形式在句中作定语和状语是本单元的学习重点。1. 作定语
V-ing 形式可以单独充当名词的前置修饰语, 这时有两种情况。
-ing形式表示 “供作......之用”的意思, 这类作定语的-ing形式过去叫动名词。
A swimming pool
= a pool for swimmingA sleeping car= a car for sleeping2) -ing形式表示 “......的” 意思, 过去叫现在分词
A sleeping child
working people
the rising sun -ing形式短语作定语时一般放在它所修饰的名词之后, 相当于一个定语从句。如:
They are visitors coming from several countries.
The boy standing there is a classmate of mine.2. 作状语
可以表示时间, 原因, 结果,条件, 行为方式或伴随动作等。 Using your head, you’ll find a good way.条件 1) Four people entered the room looking around in a curious way.
= Four people enter the room and looked around in a curious way.
( 伴随动作)
2) Being poor, he couldn’t afford a TV set. (原因)3) Working hard, you’ll surely succeed.条件4) The boy sat in front of the farm-house, cutting the branch.伴随5) He came running back to tell me the news. 方式6) (When) Hearing the news, he got frightened.
= When he heard the news, he got frightened.
(时间, 可以在分词前保留when ) 7) The child slipped and fell, hitting his head against the door. 结果Attention Please -ing形式作状语时, 它的逻辑主语必须与主句的主语是一致的。Time permitting, I will pay a visit to the whole city.
　(分词的逻辑主语是time , 而句子的主语是I , 两者不构成主谓关系, 所以只能用独立主格结构, 也就是给现在分词补充一个主语。)the British ladythe Columbianthe Japanesethe Canadian You see her step back appearing surprised.His nose touches Mr. Cook’s moving hand. You see her step back appearing surprised.
= You see her step back and she appears surprised.They also express their feelings using unspoken language.=They also express their feelings by the way of using unspoken language. His nose touched Mr. Cook’s moving hand.
=His nose touched Mr. Cook’s hand which is moving.= They are visitors who come from several countries.They are visitors coming from several countries.= This is an experience which is exciting.This is an exciting experience. 1. When he approached Ms Smith, he touched her shoulder and kissed her.
______ ___________ Ms Smith, he touched her shoulder and kissed her. Rewrite the following sentences.Whenapproaching2. The person who is translating the songs can speak seven languages.
The person _________ ___ ______can speak seven languages.translatingthesongs3. The boy standing there is reading a book about body language.
The boy ____ __ ________ there is reading a book about body language.whois standing4. Because he comes from Jordan, he moves close to ask you a question.
_______ _____ Jordan, he moves close to ask you a question.Coming from5. She sat at the desk and did her homework.
She sat at the desk ______ ____ __________.doing herhomework Grammar work 语法专练
用所给动词的适当形式填空。
1. Not ________(know) his address, I couldn’t go to see him yesterday.
2. Look out for cars when _______(cross) the street.
3. Not _________________ (invite) to the party, Mary was greatly hurt.knowingcrossinghaving been invited4. He dived into the water, ______ (leave) only his face exposed.
5. When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door, _______ (read)
“Sorry to miss you; I will call later.”
6. _______ (take) a deep breath, they dived into the water.
7. ____________ (close) the windows and the door, the students left the room.leavingreadingTakingHaving closed Grammar quiz 语法小测
1. When _____ different cultures, we often pay attention only to the
differences without noticing many similarities.
A. compared B. being compared C. comparing D. having comparedC2. Whenever he was asked why he was late for class, he would answer carelessly, always ______ the same thing.
A. saying B. said C. to say D. having said A3. There are hundreds of visitors _____ in front of the Art Gallery to have a look at Van Gogh’s paintings.
A. waited B. to wait C. waiting D. wait C4. ______ , the more expensive the camera, the better its quality.
A. General speaking B. Speaking general
C. Generally speaking D. Speaking generallyC5. “You can’t catch me!” Janet shouted, _______ away.
A. run B. running C. to run D. ran B 1. Having not seen the film, I can’t tell you what I think of it.
2. The men worked for extra hours got an extra pay.
3. Seen from the top of the hill, we find the city more beautiful.
4. Generally speak, facial expressions are helpful communications, too.Not havingworkingSeeingspeaking单句改错5. “ Can’t you read?” the man said, angrily pointed to the notice on the wall.
6. Knocking at the door before entering, please.
7. European football is played in 80 countries, made it the most popular sport in the world.pointingKnockmaking课件17张PPT。Unit4 Body Language-language points-
Para1 represent, student association, meet international students, student canteen, curiously
Para2 introduce …to, approach, touch her shoulder, kiss her on the cheek, step back, in defence, a major misunderstanding, reach his hand out
Para3 move close to, shake hands, on the contrary, nod at
Para4 Not all…， nor, be likely to
Para5 in general, avoid difficultiesFind these words and expressions in your text.1.speak or act for another person or group
2.wanting to know about something
3.move nearer to someone
4.probably do something
5.not limited to one part
6. protect against attack
7.prevent something bad from happeningrepresentapproachcuriousgeneralbe likely toavoiddefendWord guessingHow international students greet each otherTony走近Julia，摸了摸她肩膀，并亲了亲她的脸。
Julia后退了几步，看上去有点吃惊，并举起了手，
好像在自卫。
3. George把手伸向Akira Nagata，此时Akira Nagata
正在鞠躬，他的鼻子碰到了George的手。
4. 当我向Ahmed Aziz作自我介绍时，他靠我很近，
并跟我握手。
5.Darlene Coulon和Tony握手，并且在对方脸颊上吻了
两下。
1. represent1) v. 代表2) representation n.代表 ，表现3) representative adj. 有代表性的，典型的n. 代表 1. The Purple Butterfly, China film, will show on the Cannes Film Festival.2. No taxation without .3. Are your opinions of those of the other students?4. from all over the world were present at the Earth Summit.没有代表权就不交税representingrepresentationrepresentativeRepresentatives2. curiously1) adv. 好奇地
2) curious adj.好奇的
3) curiosity n. 好奇心1. , I had met John’s new friend before.2. I am about what has happened.3. We were to know when we could conquer the swine flu.4. She has burning to know what’s going on.Curiouslycuriouscuriouscuriositybe curious about 对…感到好奇be curious to do 渴望做某事3. approachRemember to slow down as you approach the bridge.We must take a scientific approach to the problem.1) v. 接近，靠近2) n. 方法，途径3) at the approach of 在…快到的时候Squirrels store quantities of food at the approach of winter.Exx
The time for final examination is .
The to the house was a narrow path.approachingapproach4. be likely to dolikely adj. 可能的
He is the likely winner of the election.2) be likely to do
He’s likely to arrive a bit late.It’s likely that they will lose the election.Translation
他很可能会迟到。He is likely to be late.It is likely that he will be late.= It is likely that3) possible, likely, probable可能性： possible ＜ likely ＜ probableIt is possible/probable/likely that…Sb be likely to doExx
New drivers are far more to have accidents than experienced drivers.
2. Don’t worry. He is to get in touch with you.
3. Could you open that window for me?
(表示委婉请求)likelylikelypossibly5. general1) adj. 普遍的，一般的The school gives a good general education.2) in general / generally speaking 一般来说，总的来说In general, women live longer than men. Generally speaking, men are taller than women.Exx
1.我对这个地方的总体印象很不错。
My of the place .
2. 一般来说，人们不喜欢被捉弄。
, People don’t like to .general impressionis goodIn generalbe made fun of6. defend1) We should defend the island against invasion. 2) He tried to defend his reputation. 保护保卫…以免受3) defence n.in one’s/self defence 在……的防备下The two men were acting in self-defence.Exx 1. She had to the guard dog(防备看门狗咬她).
2. They were brave in . defend herself againstdefence7. avoid1)To avoid confusion, the teams wore different colors.2)I crossed the street to avoid meeting him.v.避开，避免avoid sth/ doing sthTranslation
1. 我尽量不在周六去购物。I try to on Saturdays.2. 这架飞机差点出事。The plane narrowly .avoid going shoppingavoided disaster Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they Comfortable in the same way with touching or distance between people.1) not all 部分否定=all … notNot all the children are naughty. =All the children are not naughty拓展 every … not = not every并非每个
both … not = not both 并非两个都8. norThey do not shake hands with women, ________________ (他们也不可能)kiss women publicly.2) Nor 连词，“也不”，连接否定的并列成分。nor are they likely toI have no brothers, nor any sisters.
Neither my mother nor my father went to university.3)nor 放在句首，该句子用倒装的语序.(be动词、助动词或情态动词放在主语前)Nobody can learn body language in one day, ________.nor can I身势语 2.与…交流
3. 很可能 4.向 …介绍
5.向…点头 6. 与…握手
7. 相反地 8. 站得很近
9.伸出手
10.避免交际中的困难
body languagecommunicate withbe likely tointroduce … tonod at…shake hands withreach one’s hand outon the contrarystand very close toavoid difficulties in communicationPhrases Yesterday, another students and I, our university’s , went to the Capital International Airport to meet this year’s international students.
I saw several young people enter the waiting area .
Tony Julia, her shoulder and kissed her on the cheek.
She stepped back and put up her hands, as if . representingstudents associationlooking around curiouslyapproachedtouchedappearing surprisedin defenceSentences all cultures greet each other the same way, they comfortable in the same way with or distances between people.
However, people from places like , or South American countries approach others closely and more touch them.
, though, studying international customs can certainly help in today’s world of cultural .Not nor areSpain Italy are likely toIn general avoid difficultiescrossroads课件23张PPT。1. I saw several young people enter the waiting area looking around curiously.curious adj.
= eager to learn or know be curious about sth. 对……好奇
be curious to do sth. 急于……
out of curiosity 出于好奇Language points As a little girl, she was curious about the origin of human beings.
The tourists were surrounded by the curious children.2. …closely followed by Julia Smith from Britain.
=…, Julia Smith from Britain closely following.3. Tony approached Julia, touched her shoulder and kissed her on the cheek.(1) approach 名词 n. 靠近；临近；接近
going near or nearer to a place
The enemy ran away at our approach.
在我们接近时, 敌人跑了。 verb + sb. in/ on/ by +the 身体部位 We heard the approach of the train.
我们听见火车开过来了。
n. 方法；步骤；通路；通道
The approach to the house was a narrow path.
通往这房子的路是一条狭窄的小径。 The best approach to learn a foreign language is the study of the spoken language.
学习外语的最好的途径是学口语。at the approach of winter 冬季将临的时候
be easy of approach 容易到达; 容易接近
on the approach of death 临死的时候v. 走近；靠近；接近 come near or nearer to someone or something You must approach the bird very quietly or it will fly away.
你必须悄悄地走近那只鸟, 否则它会飞走的。 The summer is approaching.
夏季即将来临。approach sb. about sth.
为某事同某人打交道
approach sb. for information
向某人了解情况
approach sb. with a suggestion
向某人建议 (2) touch vt.
a. 触摸, 接触, 触及, 轻触
I told you not to touch my things.
b. touch sb./ sth. (with sth.)
感动(某人)触动某人(某人的感情)
Her miserable experience touched us all deeply / touched our hearts with sorrow. 她经历很不幸，我们深受感动 / 我们都很伤心。c. 接触，联系 n.
get / keep in touch with sb.
与~取得/保持联系
be in/ out of ~ （with sb.)
与--有/无联系
We’ve been out of touch for years.4. introduce sb. to sb.
把某人介绍给某人
introduce sth. into…
采用；引进 Please allow me to introduce Mr Smith.
Potatoes were first introduced into Europe from South America.introduction n. 　
a letter of ~　介绍信
make a self-introduction 作自我介绍
make ~ to each other 互相介绍
Yao Ming is a person needs no ~. 5. apologize v.
apology n.
apologize to sb. for sth. / doing sth.
make an apology to sb. for (doing) sth.
accept / refuse an apologynot … nor 即不……又不……
not all 连用形成部分否定6. Not all cultures greet each other the
same way, nor are they comfortable
in the same way with touching or distance between people.nor / neither 否定副词, 常置于句首, 此时句子要倒装, 即助动词/系动词/情态动词放在主语之前
I don’t like her, nor/neither does Lily.
I am not a nurse, nor/ neither is Lily.
nor = and also not / neither
方式状语
= while they are touching…or being…7. In the same way that people communicate with spoken language, they also express their feelings using unspoken “language” through keeping physical distance,actions or posture.(1) that引导的是方式定语从句。
The way that/ in which/或不用关联词。(2) using引导的是状语, v-ing做状语。 express vt.
(用语言，神色，动作等）表达，表示 （感情，意见）
express sth. ( to sb.)
The guests ~ their thanks before leaving.
你对我的帮助，我感激不尽。
I can’t ~ to you how grateful I am for
your help.express oneself （清楚地）
表达自己的意思
他仍然不能用英语表达自己的意思。
He is still unable to express himself in English
n. 快车（=express train)
The 8 am express to Beijing.(邮局, 铁路, 公路等部门提供的) 速递, 速运
send goods by express 特快货运
n. expression 表达，表情
a happy ~ 愉快的神情spoken English
written English
English-speaking countries1. I don’t do well in __English.
A. speaks B. to speak
C. spoken D. speak
2. We must practise __English every day.
A. to speak B. speak
C. in speaking D. speaking8. likely 常用于
sb. /sth. is likely to do sth.
It is likely that…英语几乎不能说: it’s likely to do sth.It is likely to rain.
(句子中的it是天气, 并不是形式主语。)主语既可以是人也可是物区别: likely, probable, possiblepossible 常常用于下列结构:
It is possible for sb. to do sth.
It is possible that 从句主语不能是人2. probable: 常用于it is probable +that 主语不能是人, 几乎不能说it is probable to do sth.9. general
1). adj. 普遍的，全面的
A matter of ~ concern/ interest
普遍（公众）关心/感兴趣的事情
Air-conditioner is in general use now.
2).总的，整体的
general idea of the passage
In general 大体上, 通常, 总的来讲
In general, he is a good guy.generally speaking
frankly speaking
honestly speakingavoid vt. 避开，避免
avoid (sth / doing)
I think she is avoiding me.
I avoid meeting him.
avoidable adj.课件24张PPT。Well-doneOk stopquietGesturesvictory!
Facial Expressions anger fear happy sorrow contempt
轻视 surprisedisgust
厌恶Hello! Hi!Please keep quiet!Well done!I’m tired and sleepy.I can’t hear you.Come here!Victory, success!I’m full.You are great.Nice to meet you!Drink water.I’m sorry.Run.Good luck!Money.I don’t know. Stop.Bow.SmileHandshake.To Drive Or Not To DrivePlease guess what happened to Lin Pu from their body language in the picture and make the order.Listen for the first time and arrange them by numbers in the correct ordercorrect order:___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___2Listening – I13465Listen again and then answer these questions. From whom did LinPu buy the car?Listening – IIAttentionWhat did the cyclist tell LinPu to do?What did the policeman tell LinPu to do?From his brother-in- lawTo pay for his applesTo pay a fineYou may not…
Always stay…
He must …
Be careful when …SpeakingWork in groups of three and use some verb phrases or sentences to describe each picture. Be prepared to act it out using spoken language as well as body language. The following words may help you.You must…
Never… / Do not …
Watch out …
You should never … the brother- in- law smiling very happily and rubbing his hands with joy.bought a car from his brother-in-lawLin Pu and his brother-in-lawMoney changing hands,smiling faces,shaking hands,Scene 1Tell us the storyPresentation: One of you will be Lin Pu, one will be the policeman and one will be the cyclist. Think carefully of the body language they would use. Use some of the following words: You may not… Always stay… Be careful when … He must … You must… Never … Do not … You should never … Watch out …Homework:Finish the writing.
Write down five different kinds of body language used in our daily life.driving nervously for the first timereacting to crash.Lin PuNervously looking around,reacting to traffic,sudden left turn,Scene 2Lin Pu hit a bicycleLin Pu knocked over a basket full of applesLin Pu and a cyclistThe cyclistMy hand hurt.Come here.Scene 3shaking his fist (closed hand ) at Lin Pu ,Lin Pu ,the cyclist and a policemanL and the cyclist quarreled, and a policeman walked towards them.angry, shoutingpointing at bicycle, pointing at apples on road,Scene 4The police made Li Pu pay the fine.Lin Pu ,the cyclist and the policemanWalking slowly and frowning,Taking out paper to write on, Shaking finger at Lin Pu, Pointing at red light, Pointing at traffic lanes,Shaking his head Scene 5Work in groups of three and use some verb phrases or sentences to describe each picture. Be prepared to act it out using spoken language and body language.speakingbought a car from his brother-in-lawSpeaking ( 20m )drove nervously for the first timehit a bicycleA policeman walked towards them.knocked over a basket full of applesThe police made Li Pu pay the fine.课件30张PPT。Listening Can you guess the correct order of the pictures below? Write your guesses. Then listen to the tape and write down the correct order.Listening on P312 1 3 4 6 5Arrange them by numbers
in the correct order.2. Act out the actions in the listening passage.Use the expressions below to help you.You may not... Always stay...
Keep away from... Do not...
You should never... Look out!
You must... Watch out...
You will need to ... Be careful when…
You’ll have to… You’ll be fined200yuanTO DRIVE OR NOT TO DRIVE C=CYCLIST P= POLICEMAN
Lin Pu is excited , but very nervous. He just got his driver’s license last week and yesterday bought his brother-in-law’s old car. Today, he is driving in the city for the first time. Taxis are going in every direction. LISTENING TEXTPeople are crossing the street without paying attention to the cars , and the people riding bikes never look before they turn.
Just then, the traffic light in front of him turns red and the car in front of him stops suddenly . Lin Pu quickly turns to the right to avoid hitting the car in front of him. Crash! He hits a bicycle and knocks over a
basket full of apples. Then he sees a
policeman, walking toward him.
C: Look what you did! All my apples are on the road ! You must pay for them!
P: Driver , what were you thinking? You didn’t stay in your lane! You’ll have to pay a fine for this .L: I’m sorry! I was just trying not to hit that car in front of me . I’ve just got my licence and I’m not used to driving in the city .
C: I don’t care if he is used to it or not ! Shouldn’t he have to pay for my apples, sir?P: Well, he’ll certainly need to pay a fine for breaking this traffic rule .You two will need to discuss what to do about the apples .
L: I don’t have any money. I spent it all on this car!
C: Well, then at least you can pick up my apples!P: You can sell that car or something else, but you must pay this fine by the end of the mouth .
L: Oh, dear! Why did I ever buy a car?Listening on page 62What do you suppose the listening will be about? Exercise 1 Listen to the tape and decide whether they are true or false.1 Chimps and humans have the same body language.
2 Jane says that smiling makes chimps look more friendly.
3 Humans always shout when they feel angry.
4 Both chimps and humans want to feel safe and protected.
5 We often show affection when we like someone.F TF TT Why do both humans and chimps smile when they are nervous?
Because they hope an enemy will not hurt them.Exercise 2:2. What things do both humans and chimps do to make themselves look dangerous and frightening?
Both humans and chimps stand up, and try to make themselves look bigger and more frightening by waving their arms around or standing over the others.3. What do both humans and chimps do to make their babies feel safe?
Both humans and chimps hold their babies and hug and kiss them to make them feel safe.4. How do bigger chimps make the small ones feel safe? Do humans do things like this?
Bigger chimps make the small ones feel safe by touching them or kissing and hugging them. Yes, humans will do things like this if they want to make their children feel safe. Do you remember Jane Goodall and her study of chimps? One of the things she reported on was how similar chimp body language is to human body language. HUMANS AND CHIMPS Listening text When we humans are worried or frightened, we sometimes smile in a nervous way. Chimps also look as though they are smiling when they are nervous, perhaps to make them look friendly so an enemy will not hurt them.
When we are angry, we often stand up, take a deep breath and put our hands on our sides to look bigger and stronger.We sometimes move close to another person and stand over them to make them feel smaller. We might shout loudly to frighten someone. When chimps are angry they also stand up and wave their arms around. They often walk quickly , throw things about and make noise. They are trying to make themselves seem bigger and more frightening. Chimps and humans want to feel safe and protected, so both chimp and human mothers hold their babies and hug and kiss them. Young chimps and children also love to play and enjoy each other’s company.
A similar thing is true for adults. We humans hug and kiss each other to show that we accept and love someone.When a powerful chimp frightens others, the smaller chimps will bend down or hold their heads low. They will hold out their hands as if they want to be friends.The bigger one will touch them or kiss them and hug them to make them feel safe.
So what do you think? Are we like chimps or are chimps like us?1. Look at the pictures and try to guess what they are communicating from the body language you see.2. Listen to the tape and number the pictures. Listening task on P65click hereShen Lei is meeting Julie, his Canadian
friend, at a restaurant.
SL=SHEN LEI J= JULIE
SL: Hello, Julie! Sorry, I’m late. The traffic was terrible .
J: That’s OK. I just arrived. Be careful – the steps are wet. Don’t slip! LUNCH WITH A FRIEND Listening text SL: Thanks. Let’s go in –it’s raining .
J: Oh , look at the beautiful decorations and flowers . Is it a special holiday ?
SL: No ,but it’s a new restaurant, so the flowers are here to give congratulations to the owners and for good luck .J: What do you mean when you say “good luck”? Do you mean good luck to make money or good luck for other things?
SL: It’s for good business in the restaurant. Now please come over here .
J: Do you want me to sit down here? Oh, come and look at the fish .SL: We could have some, if you like .
J: How much is the Mandarin fish? It looks very fancy.
SL: It’s a little expensive, but it’s excellent . I think it’s about thirty-eight yuan .
J: What does that mean? It looks like you are pointing a gun at the waitress.SL: We use our fingers to show numbers. Don’t you ?
J: Yes, but not like that .We use our fingers for numbers one to nine, but nothing bigger .We wouldn’t use our fingers to say “thirty-eight ”.The two friends have a big lunch ,and when they are finished ,they are full. They have eaten too much .J: What’s the matter? Do you have a stomachache?
SL: No, I just ate too much .
J: I’m full too. I always eat too much in Chinese restaurants .
SL: Yes, It was a really good meal!课件43张PPT。Warming upWhat is the purpose of language?
Language is used to communicate or tell people thoughts, feelings reactions. What is body language? Body language is one form of nonverbal communication (非言辞交际) without using words. Eye contact or gaze, facial expression, gesture, and posture (姿势), or the way you stand, are different kinds of body language.Spoken
languageWritten
languageBody
languageWays of communicating gesturingsilentI love you.stopvictory Body language varies from culture to culture.show interestrude or
disrespectfulcrazyYou have a
phone call.zerorudemoneyOKNo1rudegreat / good jobNoYesGreet
friendsFranceRussiaOther countriesComparisonOpen one’s eye or mouth wide. Rubbing the thumb
and forefinger togetherMoving one’s hand up and down with the palm facing down. Can you guess what the following
gesture from Japan means ?angry Can you guess what the following
gesture from France means ?I don’t believe you.What do people usually do when meeting?China, Britain
Russia, France, Arab
Some western countries
Japan, Korea
Maori in New Zealandshake hands
kiss
embrace
bow
touch nosesWhat are these people
communicating?The mother is trying to quiet her crying child. Someone is thinking deeply. Someone is feeling ill/having a stomachache. The policeman is directing traffic/telling cars to go. ReadingCommunication:
No problem?Predict what you think the topic will be? Tony Garcia (Columbia)Julia Smith (Britain)
George Cook (Canada)Japanese- Akira NagataReading comprehension While reading, please try to divide the whole passage into several parts and find out the main idea.Part 1. (para. 1) You are sent to Capital International Airport to meet this year’s international students.Part 2 (para. 2 and 3 ) Examples of learned or cultural “body language”.Part 3. (para. 4 ) Different peoples have different body languages.Part 4. (para. 5) Summary of body language. Englishmen often stand close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
Most people around the world now greet each other by kissing . Read the text carefully, then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F). FF Japanese will bow to others as greeting.
People from Jordan will move very close to you as you introduce yourself to them.
Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ body language are bad.TT F1. How do different international students behave when they greet people? Complete the chart with information from the passage .Post readingman from Colombiakiss on the cheekJulia Smithwoman from BritaineveryoneAkira Nagatabowing everyoneman from Canada shaking handseveryoneAhmed Aziz man from Jordanshaking hands noddingDarlene Coulonwoman from Francepeople she knows 1. Is the author of this passage male or female? How do you know ?
The author is male. Ahmed Aziz will not shake hands with women, but he shakes hands with the author.Answer questions2.What were the two mistakes that the author noticed?
He noticed that the Colombian man kissed the British woman, but in her culture, a kiss from a stranger is not acceptable. He also noticed that the Japanese man bowed just as the Canadian man started to shake hands, so one man’s nose touched the other man’s hand. 3. Who seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others? Who seemed to prefer closer physical distance ?
The British woman, Julia, and probably the Canadian man, George, seemed to prefer to keep more physical distance from others. The Colombian man, Tony, and the Jordanian man, Ahmed, seemed to prefer closer physical distance . 4. Did any students have similar greeting customs? If so, which ones?
Yes. Tony from Colombia and Darlene from France had a similar greeting custom-a kiss. George from Canada and Ahmed from Jordan also had a similar greeting custom-a handshake, but Ahmed shakes hands only with men.5. “ When in Rome, do as the Romans do.” What do you think this famous saying means?
This saying means that when we are in a certain place, we should follow the customs of the people who live in that place, not our own customs.6. Do you agree with the author’s statement that body language is not good or bad? Why or why not?
1. What is the main idea of the text?
A. There are different customs in
different countries.
B. Foreigners should follow the
customs of the country where they
are visiting.
C. People use body movements to send
messages and different body
movements have different meanings.
D. The importance of knowing customs. Choose the correct one.2. If two men stand close to each other while talking, they cannot be from _____.
A. an Arab country B. USA
C. Britain D. Russia3. What should a Chinese young man do when he meets his Russian friend in Moscow?
A. Kiss him.
B. Nod his head to his friend.
C. Shake hands with him.
D. Smile at him. 4. If you go to some Asian countries, which of the following can you do?
A. Touch the head of a boy.
B. Nod your head to others.
C. Sit with your feet pointing at
another person.
D. Kiss each other.5. “Foreigners should follow these customs when they are visiting these countries.”
The underlined word here means ___.
A. habits B. fault
C. words D. performance课件40张PPT。Unit 4 Body Language 感恩的心
我来自偶然 像一颗尘土 有谁看出我的脆弱 我来自何方 我情归何处 谁在下一刻呼唤我 天地虽宽 这条路却难走 我看遍这人间坎坷辛苦 我还有多少爱 我还有多少泪 要苍天知道 我不认输 感恩的心 感谢有你 伴我一生 让我有勇气作我自己 感恩的心 感谢命运 花开花落 我一样会珍惜 手语歌曲index fingerPointing…Bending …toward
you…Tapping …to your head…scold someoneCome here/ followThink carefullyDiscuss these questions with your partner first.
What is the purpose of language?
How can you tell someone’s feelings even if they do not speak?
What would you do if you need the other’s help urgently while you two speak different languages?
What do you think “body language” means?2.How can you tell someone’s feelings even if they do not speak?
By looking at their facial expressions.
1.What is the purpose of language?
The purpose of language is to be used as a tool of communication. That is, to exchange with others’ ideas, feelings, information, and so on. anger fear joy sorrow
/sadnesspride surprisedisgust
厌恶3.What would you do if you need the other’s help urgently while you two speak different languages? I will try to use my body language to tell the other what I need urgently. I’ll do it by miming , by any proper posture, or gestures, even by drawing pictures.4.What do you think “body language” means? Body language is the use of actions, gestures, posture and expressions to convey emotions. Match some important words with their meaningslocal (area)representapproachmajorexpresscuriousgenerallikely to doavoidnot limited to one partmove nearer to someonetell what you thinkwanting to know about sth.a particular area in which you liveprevent sth. bad from happeningprobably do sth.speak or act for another person or groupvery large or importantTry to divide the whole passage into several parts and find out the main idea of each part.Part1: ______
____________________________
Part2: ______
____________________________
Part3: ______
____________________________
Part4: ______
____________________________Para1Para2-3Para4-5Para6You are sent to Pudong Airport to meet business people.Examples of learned or cultural “body language”.Different people have different body languages.Summary of body language.AmericaOKJapanmoneyFrancezeroBrazilGermanyrude“great”or “good job”USANigeriarudeGermanyJapanoneCome here!Choose the right gesture for a Chinese
or an American.I’m full.It tells us about the importance and necessity of body language and its differences between different cultures.The main idea of the whole text:Answer the questions after scanning the text.
1. Why are the people visiting China?
2. What parts of the world are not represented by the visitors?
3. Why is Julia Smith surprised?
Because they are interested in the development of business in China.She is surprised because Mr. Garcia approaches her so close and touches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheek.Australia, Africa and Central America.4. Why do you move back from Ahmed Aziz?Because he is standing too close to you as you introduce yourself to him. (As a Chinese, people are not accustomed to standing too close to strangers.)5. What do French people often do when they meet people they know?They shake hands and kiss each other twice on each cheek.6. Can we expect people everywhere to act the same? Why?
7. Why do you think we need to study body language?
8. Is the main character male or female? No. Because people from different culture or countries act quite differently sometimes.It is quite necessary for us to study body language if we don’t want to cause any misunderstanding in communication /so that we don’t misunderstand each other.Male.*same as for a womantouches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheeknot to close, shake hands*shake hands, will get closebows*bowsshake hands*shake hands or kisses on both cheeks if knownshake hands, kisses twice on the cheeksame to someone she knowscomes close, shakes handsnodsFill in the chart:ChinaColumbiaBritainCanadaJapanJordanFranceStand watching and listening first, then introduce guests to each others; when introducing yourself to Ahmed Aziz, you move back a bit when the other is very close to you.Approach Ms Smith, touches her shoulder and kiss her on the cheek.Surprised at Mr. Garcia’s action and takes a few steps away from him.Reaches his hand out to the Japanese.Bows to Mr. Cook.Both apologize when Mr. Cook’s moving hand touches the Japanese’s nose.to ask you questions, nods at women. Moves very close to you when introduced, comes closer Shakes hands and kisses each other twice on each cheek.Homework Assignment1.Fill in the chart above and then be prepared to act out the situations in the text in pairs.
2.Discuss the importance of the body language.
3.Find out the –ing form of verb in the passage.Unit 4 Body Language 感恩的心
我来自偶然 像一颗尘土 有谁看出我的脆弱 我来自何方 我情归何处 谁在下一刻呼唤我 天地虽宽 这条路却难走 我看遍这人间坎坷辛苦 我还有多少爱 我还有多少泪 要苍天知道 我不认输 感恩的心 感谢有你 伴我一生 让我有勇气作我自己 感恩的心 感谢命运 花开花落 我一样会珍惜 手语歌曲index fingerPointing…Bending …toward
you…Tapping …to your head…scold someoneCome here/ followThink carefullyDiscuss these questions with your partner first.
What is the purpose of language?
How can you tell someone’s feelings even if they do not speak?
What would you do if you need the other’s help urgently while you two speak different languages?
What do you think “body language” means?2.How can you tell someone’s feelings even if they do not speak?
By looking at their facial expressions.
1.What is the purpose of language?
The purpose of language is to be used as a tool of communication. That is, to exchange with others’ ideas, feelings, information, and so on. anger fear joy sorrow
/sadnesspride surprisedisgust
厌恶3.What would you do if you need the other’s help urgently while you two speak different languages? I will try to use my body language to tell the other what I need urgently. I’ll do it by miming , by any proper posture, or gestures, even by drawing pictures.4.What do you think “body language” means? Body language is the use of actions, gestures, posture and expressions to convey emotions. Match some important words with their meaningslocal (area)representapproachmajorexpresscuriousgenerallikely to doavoidnot limited to one partmove nearer to someonetell what you thinkwanting to know about sth.a particular area in which you liveprevent sth. bad from happeningprobably do sth.speak or act for another person or groupvery large or importantTry to divide the whole passage into several parts and find out the main idea of each part.Part1: ______
____________________________
Part2: ______
____________________________
Part3: ______
____________________________
Part4: ______
____________________________Para1Para2-3Para4-5Para6You are sent to Pudong Airport to meet business people.Examples of learned or cultural “body language”.Different people have different body languages.Summary of body language.AmericaOKJapanmoneyFrancezeroBrazilGermanyrude“great”or “good job”USANigeriarudeGermanyJapanoneCome here!Choose the right gesture for a Chinese
or an American.I’m full.It tells us about the importance and necessity of body language and its differences between different cultures.The main idea of the whole text:Answer the questions after scanning the text.
1. Why are the people visiting China?
2. What parts of the world are not represented by the visitors?
3. Why is Julia Smith surprised?
Because they are interested in the development of business in China.She is surprised because Mr. Garcia approaches her so close and touches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheek.Australia, Africa and Central America.4. Why do you move back from Ahmed Aziz?Because he is standing too close to you as you introduce yourself to him. (As a Chinese, people are not accustomed to standing too close to strangers.)5. What do French people often do when they meet people they know?They shake hands and kiss each other twice on each cheek.6. Can we expect people everywhere to act the same? Why?
7. Why do you think we need to study body language?
8. Is the main character male or female? No. Because people from different culture or countries act quite differently sometimes.It is quite necessary for us to study body language if we don’t want to cause any misunderstanding in communication /so that we don’t misunderstand each other.Male.*same as for a womantouches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheeknot to close, shake hands*shake hands, will get closebows*bowsshake hands*shake hands or kisses on both cheeks if knownshake hands, kisses twice on the cheeksame to someone she knowscomes close, shakes handsnodsFill in the chart:ChinaColumbiaBritainCanadaJapanJordanFranceStand watching and listening first, then introduce guests to each others; when introducing yourself to Ahmed Aziz, you move back a bit when the other is very close to you.Approach Ms Smith, touches her shoulder and kiss her on the cheek.Surprised at Mr. Garcia’s action and takes a few steps away from him.Reaches his hand out to the Japanese.Bows to Mr. Cook.Both apologize when Mr. Cook’s moving hand touches the Japanese’s nose.to ask you questions, nods at women. Moves very close to you when introduced, comes closer Shakes hands and kisses each other twice on each cheek.Homework Assignment1.Fill in the chart above and then be prepared to act out the situations in the text in pairs.
2.Discuss the importance of the body language.
3.Find out the –ing form of verb in the passage.课件32张PPT。Warming up and Reading IUnit 4 Body Language1234Are you familiar with these gestures？ 1“Truly exceptional games” Guess guess Guess guess Guess guess Guess guess guess guess gesturesActivity ⅠWell –done/ greatsilentI love you.Good luck!stopokI am thinkingpick –up 搭便车GuessBad!
GuessMe?
GuessI don’t know!
joyangersurprisesorrowFacial expressionsLooking down upon handshake Kiss hugshake nodbow blow a kiss.What is body language?Body language is one form of communication, communication without _____________. Eye contact (眼部交流）or ___________, _________, and__________, or the ways you stand, are different kinds of body language.
saying wordsfacial expressionsgesturespostures Warming-up Activity Ⅱ (Group Work)
Discuss with your group members: How will you use body language in the following situations and what does it mean when used here ?a).You come across your friend in the street. To greet him, you…
b).Someone is talking to you in a very low voice. You can’t catch a word. You…
c).Your younger sister has got 100 points in the exam.
To praise her, you…
d) .You are waiting for a bus or a person.You….
e).You are eating something very spicy.You…
f).You mistake sb else for sb you haven’t seen for a long time.You…SummaryJust like verbal language(言辞), body language is part of culture. It plays an important role in daily communication. So, it is very important to understand and use it correctly. And for a foreign language learner, it is as necessary to learn the body language as to learn the verbal language.Reading Communication:
No problem?First reading :Read the text and decide how many parts the passage can be divided into, and find out the main idea of each part._______________ People from different countries express greetings in different ways.
____________ Meet the visitors at the airport
____________ Summary of body language .Part 2(para2.3)Part 1(para1)Part 3(para4.5)Find out the two mistakes the writer found at the airport:Tony. Garcia Julia SmithThe first mistakefromfrom(Columbia )(Britain)He approached Ms Smith by _______ ______ _________ and _______ her on the ________.She ______ ________ appearing _________ and put up her hands as if _______ ______ .shouldertouchingherkissingcheekstepped backsurprisedReading in defenceThe second mistakeAkira NagataGeorge Cookfrom(Canada)He ________ ________ _______ ________ to the Japanese.He ________ to Mr. Cook and his nose _________ Mr. Cook’s _______ ________.bowedtouchedmovinghandreached his handout( Japan ) Read paragraph3-5, then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F) and correct the error.TFT FEnglishmen often stand close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
The author of this passage is female and she doesn’t
like touching another person.
Japanese will bow to others as greeting.
People from Jordan will move very close to you as you introduce yourself to them.
Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ body language are bad.FReading 1.2.3.4.5.Read the passage again and then answer the following questions:Reading A. Two university students meet the international
students in the airport.
B. Men and women use different body languages
in foreign countries .
C. Different cultures have different body languages.
D. There are different kinds of cultures in the world.
1. What does the text mainly talk about？2. What can we infer from the text ？
A. A boy from Spain is likely to touch the people
he meets.
B. Physical distance can’t send out a message.
C. English people may stand very close to their
friends.
D. It’s friendly to touch Muslim women.
3.From the passage we know ,most international
students greet others by -------.
A. shaking hands B. bowing C .kissing D.touching shoulders
4.When writing the text ,the author is
A.encouraging readers to do sonething
B. informing readers of something
C. drawing readers attention to some western countries
D.regretting cultural difference
5. Which of the following is true ?
A. French people often greet people by kissing
each other on both cheeks.
B. All people around the world now greet
people by shaking hands.
C. People from Britain and from South
American countries seem to prefer to keep
more physical distance from others.
D. Not knowing foreign customs may cause a
cultural mistake. Read the text again and then finish the following form:Reading Approach others closely and are more likely to touch them.Shake hands, do not stand very close to others or touch strangers when they meet. BowShake hands.Shake hands and stand quite close to other men. Nod to women but do not shake hands with them.
. Don’t crowd.
Don’t stand too close
to others.
In almost all cultures ,to
smile and show an open right hand means,” Welcome, you
are safe with me”.
So next time you are sitting on a train or enjoy a party or simply walking through the town
Remember your body is always giving off signals.
Your body language never stops. Thank you课件36张PPT。 Speak while enjoying the pictures–facial expressions.fearful happy sadsad, upset angryangryconfusedsurprisedshy anger fear joy sorrow contempt
轻视 surprisedisgust
厌恶Go on enjoy body languages. handshake baby kiss hugshake nodbowkiss your
hand to sb.Showing our feelingsFast reading Decide which of the sentences are true or false. 1. Body language is never as powerful as spoken language.
often more
2. If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.FT3. You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
You do not threaten a person by refusing to speak. You threaten a person by making a fist and shaking it.F4. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.T5. Body language is the same all over the world.
Body language is sometimes the same, but it is sometimes quite different.
6. Most people can understand each other if they try.TFAnswer questions.1. How can we know other’s feelings, even if they do not speak to us? We can watch the expressions on people’s faces; we can see whether they face us or look away; we can observe how they hold their arms and hands; we can see whether they are close to or far away from others. Are they smiling, frowning, shrugging, holding their arms in front of them or touching other people.2. Why should we be careful with our body language? We should be careful of our own body language, as we must be sure not to be impolite in other cultures, and we need to communicate without being misunderstood.3. Why is it important to watch as well as listen to others? We need to watch other people because they may be communicating one idea in words and a different one in body language.4. What are some jobs in which using body language is extremely important? Body language is very important in any job where clear communication with others is necessary. For example, teachers and medical care people should have good clear body language; anyone who is interviewing people for jobs(and the people being interviewed) should communicate clearly; anyone giving orders or directions needs good body language; people working in diplomatic jobs and in some government jobs.1. It is possible to “read” others around us, even if they do not intend for us to catch their unspoken communication. 我们可以了解别人, 即使有时他们并不想要我们了解他们没说出来的语言。Words and expressions▲ even if
even though 是连词词组, 用来引导
让步状语从句, 意为 “尽管; 即使”。
注意:若主句与从句皆表示将来情况,
even if 从句可用一般现在时代替将来
时。① We have decided to visit the Museum even if/even though it rains tomorrow. 我们决定明天参观博物馆, 即使天下雨。
② Even if I leave now, it’ll be too late. 即使我现在离开, 我也会迟到的。③ She understood what I was I was talking about, even though it was the first time we had spoken together. 即使那是我们第一次谈话，她还是明白了我在谈什么。④ He will not let out the secret even if he knows it. 即使他知道这个秘密,他也不肯说出来。(他对秘密知道与否不一定)
⑤ He will not let out the secret even though he knows. 他虽然知道这个秘密,却不肯说出来。(他知道这个秘密)2. agreementn. [U] 同意；意见一致 having the same answer or idea We're all in agreement.
我们看法一致。
I'm quite in agreement with what he said.
我十分同意他所说的话。 n. [C] 协定；协议 written promise between people, countries, etc.in the agreement 在协议书中
arrive at an agreement 达成协议
come to an agreement 达成协议
carry out an agreement 履行协议
make an agreement 商定
sign the agreement 签署协议
an agreement between A and B 双方协议 3. Looking away from people or yawning will ,in most cases, make me appear to be uninterested.
如果把眼光从某人身上移开, 或者打了个哈欠, 这就会让人知道 我不感兴趣。▲ look away from
(1) not look at… 不看,不注视
① Don’t look away from me when I’m speaking to you. 当我和你说话时看着我,不要看别处。
[开放思想]
look at 看;视为
look back 回头看;回顾look down on/upon 轻视, 瞧不起
look for 寻找
look forward to 盼望
look into 调查
look out 小心
look on 旁观
look over 仔细检查
look through 浏览
look up 仰视; 在词典, 参考中查找② Just look at what you’ve done！ 瞧你干了些什么！
③ The old like looking back on the past. 老年人喜欢回顾过去。
④ I wish you wouldn’t look down upon/on this kind of work. 我希望你不要看不起这类工作。⑤ We are looking forward to seeing you again. 我们盼望再见到你。
⑥ The police are looking into the accident. 警察正在调查这件事。
⑦ In that case we will not look on with folded arms. 在那种情况下, 我们不会袖手旁观。▲ yawn
(1) v. open the mouth wide and breathe in deeply 打呵欠
She yawned during the lecture because it was boring.
她听课时打哈欠, 因为这堂课很乏味。
(2) n. the action of yawning 哈欠
He gave a yawn and then fell asleep. 他打了一个哈欠之后就睡着了。4. If I roll my eyes and turn your head away, I most likely do not believe what I am hearing, or do not like it. most likely 在这里是省略: it is most likely that。 课件58张PPT。Showing our feelings Speak while enjoying the pictures–facial expressions.fearful happy sadsad, upset angryangryconfusedsurprisedshy anger fear joy sorrow contempt
轻视 surprisedisgust
厌恶Go on enjoy body languages. handshake baby kiss hugshake nodbowkiss your
hand to sb.Fast reading Decide which of the sentences are true or false. 1. Body language is never as important as spoken language.
often more
2. If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.FT3. You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
You do not threaten a person by refusing to speak. You threaten a person by physical action.F4. If you stand with your arms across your body, you are always protecting yourself from being physically attacked.
You may be protecting yourself from a conversation you do not want, or you may be showing that you do not agree with someone.F5. If you sit looking away from a person, or with your back turned, you are saying you are not interested in that person.
6. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.TT7. Body language is the same all over the world.
Body language is sometimes the same, but it is sometimes quite different.
8. Most people can understand each other if they try.TFsimilar body language 1.frowning or turning one’s back to someoneto show anger2. closing one’s hand and shaking it at someoneto threaten that person3. nodding the head up and downto show agreementsimilar body language 4. shaking the head to show disagreement or refusal5. looking away from a person or yawning to show no interest to the person6. standing, holding your arms across your chestto protect yourself from an unwanted conversationsimilar body language 7. sitting, looking at and turning towards the person you are talking to8. rolling your eyes and turn your head awayto show you are interestedto show you do not believe what you hear or you do not like it1.children’s looking directly at an adult in Asia and South Americanot good behavior 2.children’s not looking directly at the teacher in North Americato get punishment from their teachers because they think the children are not telling the truth2. standing too close to your boss or teacher3.a hug to your boss or teachernot acceptable probably not a good idea to show respect1. a smile smileUniversal gesturesA smile does not always mean that one is happy.A smile can hide other feelings, such as anger, fear or worry.If someone “loses face” they may smile to hide it.A smile usually
intends to put people at ease. Read the passage carefully again and discuss the importance of body language in a small group. Refer to your answers above and use the correct statements to help you. Make notes during your discussion. These questions may help you.1. How can you know others’ feelings,
even if they do not speak to us?
2. Why should we be careful of our body
language?
3. Why is it important to watch as well
as listen to others?
4. What are some jobs in which using
body language is extremely important?Giving PerformancePlease act out according to the following situations (choose either one):Situation 1:
You are meeting a British friend in the airport, and you are going to hug him. Imagine what will happen.
Situation 2:
You are visiting in another country, and you want to cut hair, but you have difficulty in communicating. How can you communicate with the barber with body language? It is possible to “read” others around us ,even if they do not intend for us to catch their unspoken communication.
即使我们周围的人们不打算让我们理解他们非语言的交流,但我们也可能”理解”他们.Words and expressions▲ even if
even though 是连词词组, 用来引导
让步状语从句, 意为 “尽管; 即使”。
注意:若主句与从句皆表示将来情况,
even if 从句可用一般现在时代替将来
时。① We have decided to visit the Museum even if/even though it rains tomorrow.
我们决定明天参观博物馆, 即使天下雨。
② Even if I leave now, it’ll be too late. 即使我现在离开, 我也会迟到的。③ She understood what I was I was talking about, even though it was the first time we had spoken together. 即使那是我们第一次谈话，她还是明白了我在谈什么。④ He will not let out the secret even if he knows it. 即使他知道这个秘密,他也不肯说出来。(他对秘密知道与否不一定)
⑤ He will not let out the secret even though he knows. 他虽然知道这个秘密,却不肯说出来。(他知道这个秘密)In most places around the world , frowning and turning one’s back to someone shows anger .turn 作系动词，表示“变色；变质”等，后面接形容词作表语，如接名词，则不用冠词。例如：
Leaves turn yellow in autumn.秋天，树叶变黄。
When he saw the letter , his face turned red .
看到这封信时，他的脸红了。
The milk has turned sour.牛奶酸了。
After graduation , he turned doctor .
毕业后，他当了医生.辨析: turn ,change, become, go 的用法区别
turn 表示”逐渐改变”;change 有”完全改变或改变其本来性质”的意思.
become 表示成为,是普通用语,一般不表示”未来的事”,多表示”过去完成的事”.
go 表示某物变质,胜利残缺等.如 go bad , go blind , go mad 等
相关短语:
turn around 转身,反复思考
turn away 走开,拒绝
turn in 上缴,告发
turn off 关掉
turn to 求助,致力于
at every turn 事事,处处,常常
take turns 依次,轮流
turn over 打翻,移交,交给,翻身turn out 生产,制造
turn down 调低,关小,拒绝
turn into 进入,变成
turn on 打开,对……发怒
turn up 出现
in turn 依次,轮流
turn back 折回,挡住,使折回There are many ways around the world to show agreement , but nodding the head up and down is used for agreement almost worldwide . 在世界各地,有许多表示同意的方式,但是几乎世界范围内上下点头表示同意. agreementn. [U] 同意；意见一致 having the same answer or idea We're all in agreement.
我们看法一致。
I'm quite in agreement with what he said.
我十分同意他所说的话。 n. [C] 协定；协议 written promise between people, countries, etc.in the agreement 在协议书中
arrive at an agreement 达成协议
come to an agreement 达成协议
carry out an agreement 履行协议
make an agreement 商定
sign the agreement 签署协议
an agreement between A and B 双方协议 If I roll my eyes and turn my head away , I most likely do not believe what I am hearing or do not like it .如果我转动眼球并把头扭向一边，很可能我不相信我所听到的花，或是不喜欢它。believe 作及物动词的用法；
believe 表示“相信”，相当于think …. true , 可接表示人或事物的名词或代词，也可接what或that从句。
例如：
I believe you .= I believe what you have said .
我相信你所说的话.
You cheated me last time and I won’t believe you this time / next time.
你上次骗了我，这一次/下一次我不会相信你了.
(2) believe 表示”认为”,后面一般接that 从句或复合宾语.
例如:
People used to believe that the earth was the centre of the universe. 从前人们认为地球是宇宙的中心.
I believe we should buy the smaller one .
我觉得我们因该买比较小的那个.拓展: believe in 的用法:
believe in 表示”信仰;信赖”.例如:
Jack believed in life after death.杰克相信死后有来世.
Do you believe in ghosts ?你相信有鬼么?
(2) believe in 也可以表示”相信;信任”,相当于trust.例如:
I believe in your innocence.我相信你是无辜的.
注意：believe sb 意为”相信某人所说的话”;believe in sb 意为”信任某人”,指相信人的品格,作风,为人等方面的情况.
(3) believe in 后接动名词,表示”主张,赞成”,相当于support.
例如：
He doesn't believe in sending his children away to a boarding-school.他不赞成把孩子们送到寄宿学校去。
(4) believe in 还可表示“相信......有价值；认为......有好处”。
例如：
Helen believes in jogging is good for her health.
海伦相信慢跑对她的健康有益。Being respectful to people is subjective , based on each culture , but in general it is probably not a good idea to give a hug to a boss or teacher.对人的尊敬是主观的，是以每一种文化为基础的，但总的说来，拥抱一位老板或老师很可能是不妥当的想法。respectful为形容词，意为“恭敬的；敬重的”。例如：
He is respectful of his parents‘ opinions.
他很尊重他的父母的意见。
拓展：
（1）respect为不可数名词，意为“尊敬”。常用短语：
show / have respect for sb.例如：
I have great respect for journalists , but I don‘t know why.
我对记者非常尊敬，但不知道是什么原因。
She has no respect for the manager. 她一点也不尊敬经理。
（2）respect vt . 尊敬，敬重。例如：
All children should respect their parents.
所有孩子都应该尊敬父母。
You should respect the opinions of your friends .
你应该尊重朋友们的意见。We can often be wrong about each other , so it is an amazing thing that we understand each other as well as we do !amazing 的意思与surprising , astonishing 接近，常用作定语。
例如：
The new car is running at an amazing speed .
那辆新的小汽车正以惊人的速度行使。我们常常令彼此误解，因此如果我们尽可能地做到彼此了解，那就太好了！拓展：
（1）amaze 用作及物动词，意为“使惊讶”。
例如：
It amazed me to hear that your were leaving. 听说你要走我很惊讶。
Visitors were amazed at the achievements in the car manufacture of the city during the past decade. 参观者对这座城市过去十年中在汽车制造工业方面的成就感到惊奇。
（2）有类似用法的动词还有：excite,satisfy,move ,interest,shock,disappoint,puzzle,surprise, worry ,please ,bore,annoy,astonish等。
例如：
The news astonished everybody.这个消息使每个人都感到惊讶。
He was astonished at what he had found. 他发现的情况使他十分惊讶。
We were astonished to hear that their football team had won the championship.听说他们的球队赢得了冠军，我们很惊讶。
如果你把眼光从某人身上移开, 或者打了个哈欠, 这个人就可能会认为你对他不感兴趣。Looking away from people or yawning will , in most cases , make me appear to be uninterested.▲ look away from
(1) not look at… 不看,不注视
① Don’t look away from me when I’m speaking to you. 当我和你说话时看着我,不要看别处。
[开放思想]
look at 看;视为
look back 回头看;回顾look down on/upon 轻视, 瞧不起
look for 寻找
look forward to 盼望
look into 调查
look out 小心
look on 旁观
look over 仔细检查
look through 浏览
look up 仰视; 在词典, 参考中查找② Just look at what you’ve done！ 瞧你干了些什么！
③ The old like looking back on the past.
老年人喜欢回顾过去。
④ I wish you wouldn’t look down upon/on this kind of work. 我希望你不要看不起这类工作。⑤ We are looking forward to seeing you again. 我们盼望再见到你。
⑥ The police are looking into the accident. 警察正在调查这件事。
⑦ In that case we will not look on with folded arms. 在那种情况下, 我们不会袖手旁观。▲ yawn
(1) v. open the mouth wide and breathe in deeply 打呵欠
① She yawned during the lecture because it was boring.
她听课时打哈欠, 因为这堂课很乏味。
(2) n. the action of yawning 哈欠
② He gave a yawn and then fell asleep. 他打了一个哈欠之后就睡着了。We can often be wrong about each other, so it is an amazing thing that we understand each other as well as we doamazing 的意思与surprising, astonishing 接近,常用作定语.
例如:
The new car is running at an amazing speed .
那辆新的小汽车正以惊人的速度行驶.拓展:
amaze 用作及物动词,意为”使惊讶”.
例如:
It amazed me to hear that your were leaving. 听说你要走我很惊讶.
Visitors were amazed at the achievements in the car manufacture of the city during the past decade.
参观者对这座城市过去十年中汽车制造工业方面的成就感到惊奇有类似用法的动词还有: excite, satisfy, move, interest, shock, disappoint, puzzle, surprise, worry, please, bore, annoy, astonish 等.
例如 :
The news astonished everybody.
这个消息使每个人都感到惊讶.
He was astonished at what he had found.
他发现的情况使他十分惊讶.
We were astonished to hear that their football team had won the championship.
听说他们的球队赢得了冠军,我们很惊讶. John plays basketball , if not better than, ________ Mike.as well as(2) as well ( as ) = too 也, 还…
He gave me money and advice as well.as well as:
(1) 与…一样 (好)课件11张PPT。 Unit 4 Using Language
- Showing our feelings -RevisionWords
1. 迎接；问候 v. 2. 代表，表现，描绘 vt.
3. 接近，靠近 v. &n. 4. 陈述，说明 n.
5. 口语的,口头的 adj. 6. 误解；误会 n.
7.避免，消除 vt. 8. 防御，保卫 n.Phrases
1.主修（大学）科目 2.对……好奇
3. 很可能…,有希望… 4. 向某人 点头
5. 把某人介绍给某人 6. 总的来说greetapproachrepresentstatementspokenmisunderstaning n.avoiddefence major in be curious about be likely to nod at introduce… toin generalFacial Expressions & FeelingshappyangryconfusedsorrysadboredshyafraidGreat!Come here.Nice to meet you!...a little …Body languages & Feelings Which of the following can best express main idea?
A. Only gestures without spoken language may cause misunderstanding.
B. Some body language or gestures are the same throughout the world.
C. Different gestures stand for different feelings, wishes or attitudes while many are universal.
D. It is important to give attention to the differences in body language.
Task I Skimming:smileUniversal body languagesA smile shows happiness and puts people at ease.If someone “loses face” they may smile to hide it.A smile can hide other feelings, such as anger, fear or worry.123 unhappy, angry frown and turn one’s back to sb.make a fist and shake it at sb.angry, threaten othersnod the head up and downagreeshake the head from side to sidedisagree / refuse to dolook away from sb. or yawnuninterestedinterestedroll your eyes and turn your head awaynot believe or disliketurn toward or look at someone or somethingstand at a little distance with open handswilling to listenTask II Filling in the form1. Body language is never as important as spoken language.
2. If you are angry at a person, you might turn your back to him or her.
3. You can threaten a person by refusing to speak.
4. If you sit looking away from a person or yawning, you are saying you are uninterested in that person.Task III True or Falseoften moreTmaking a fist and shaking it. T5. You should not greet your new boss by giving her or him a hug.
6. Body language is the same all over the world.
7. If we learn and pay attention to body language and cultural differences, we can usually understand each other.Tsometimes the same,but it is sometimes quite different.TTask IV Challenge your memory1. 背对着某人 2. 普遍的面部表情
3. 使人放松 4. 丢了面子
5. 上下点头 6. 摇头
7. 把眼光移开 8. 转动眼球
9. 把头扭向一边 10. 给…一个拥抱
11. 握拳 12. 威胁某人 turn your back to sb universal facial expression put people at ease lose face nod the head up and down look away from roll one’s eyes turn your head away give a hug to … make a fist threaten sb. shake the headease (n.)be / feel at ease “舒适；自由自在”He is quite at ease in public.
I don’t feel at ease in the strange place.
He passed the test at ease.他在公众场合十分自在。在这个陌生的地方，我觉得不自在。他轻而易举地通过考试。lose face (with)1) If a teacher can’t answer this simple question,
he will ___________________. (在全班同学面前丢脸)
2) He failed many times, but he _____________. (不灰心)
3) He ___________ (迷路) in the woods.
4) Mr Green ____________ (发脾气) when he found his daughter smoking.lose face with his classdidn’t lose heartlost his waylost his temper课件32张PPT。Body Language有关测试 图中这个人拿杯子的动作,表示这个人有
怎样的性格?

A.个性內向,会隐藏心事。
B.外向活泼,对事情比较看得开,放得下。
C.高贵优雅,有要求完美的倾向。
D.防卫性强故作姿态。 答案是B 这位经理听了年度计划之后,做出了这个动作,他想表达什么?
A.有意见要表达
B.考虑当中
C.去洗手间
D.听不下去, 想离开答案是AspeakingringingwritingtypingSpoken
languageWritten
languageBody
languageWays of communicating gesturingI love you.What is body language? Body language is one form of nonverbal communication (非言辞交际) without using words. Eye contact or gaze, facial expression, gesture, and posture (姿势), or the way you stand, are different kinds of body language.happy sad angry tired confused“I have lost my wallet！”“I can’t believe she said that ！That is so unfair！”“I got an A in maths！”“it’s been a long
day. I can’t keep
my eye open.”“I don’t know what to do.” Text Book Page 25. Be prepared to act out the meanings and have your partner guess what you mean. The first one has been done for you. Do it with your partner first, and then some of you will be asked to the front of the classroom to act them out.free talk What does the person (persons ) in the picture want to do?
What is the person thinking about ?
How does the person feel? The students can talk with your partner according to these questions and later should share your opinion with the rest.How are they feeling?happysadangryconfidentconfusedguess, guess, guess, gesturesokstopsilentwell donevictoryapplauseGood!Bad!
Come here!Good luck!Me?I don’t know! Talk about the gestures in a basketball match. What do they stand for? Be ready to act these commands, warnings or prohibitions out. You can discuss with your partner what people would do with their body language first. Talking课件32张PPT。Welcome !Body LanguageThousands of Hands Kwan-yinTai Lihua 邰丽华Fairy of Peach blossom?She got two degrees of bachelors in university.
?She was famous as an artist for her wonderful performance.
?She loves life very much!What is body language? Body language is one form of nonverbal communication (非言辞交际) without using words. Eye contact or gaze, facial expression, gesture, and posture (姿势), or the way you stand, are different kinds of body language.guess, guess, guess, gesturesokstopBe quiet!well doneVictory / peacepick-up 搭便车Please call me!I love you!Good!Bad!
Come here!Good luck!Me?I don’t know!Do people all over the world act the same?Go on enjoy body languages.Reading P25Listening: where do they come from?YouMr. GarciaJulia Smitha visitorGeorge CookAhmed AzizMadame CoulonChinaColumbiaBritainJapanCanadaJordanFrance(Para.1)(Para.2~3)(Para.4~5)(Para.6)Different people have different body language. Examples of learned or cultural “body language”. You are sent to Pudong Airport to meet business people. Summary of body language. Match the main idea of each part with lines.Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Part 4. Fast Reading Part1: (Para 1)1. Why are the people visiting China?
2. What parts of the world are not represented by the visitor?
Because they are interested in the development of business in China.Careful ReadingAfrica, Australia and Central America are not represented. Part2: (Para 2-3)Mr. Garcia from Columbia arrives ahead of Ms. Smith from Britain.
2. The visitor from Japan and George Cook from Canada shake hands with each other when they are introduced.
FT(T/F)As they are introduced, Mr. Cook reaches his hand out to the Japanese who bows. Part3: (Para 4-5)Why do you move back from Ahmed Aziz?
2.What do French people often do when they meet people they know?
Because Ahmed Aziz is standing very close to you.They shake hands and kiss each other twice on each cheek. Part4: (Para 6)1.Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ are bad. (T/F)
2. Can we expect people everywhere to act the same? Why?No, we can’t. Because not all members of all cultures behave the same way.FExtensive ReadingPlease read the passage again and finish the chart in English Weekly.approachesa few stepsreachesbowsclose tonodstouchSouth AmericanFrenchwomenWhat have you learned from this period?homeworkRead the passage again after class to get a better understanding.
2. Collect some information about body language in different cultures. GOODBYEThank you课件30张PPT。warming upGamePerforming & Guessing Rules: One act it out, the rest guess.
2018/12/153speakingringingwritingtypingSpoken languageWritten languageBody languageWays of communicating gesturing2018/12/154Definition for Body LanguageOne form of communication without using any wordsEye contactFacial expressionGesturePosture2018/12/155GuessGood!
2018/12/156GuessBad!
2018/12/157GuessCome here!
2018/12/158GuessGood luck!
2018/12/159GuessMe?
2018/12/1510GuessI don’t know!
2018/12/1511Well-doneOk stopquietGesturesvictory!
2018/12/1512 handshake Kiss hugshake nodbow kiss your hand to sb.2018/12/1513expressions of this feelingsI am worriedI ate too much!I am sorry that I did something wrong.I’m so happy.a smile and
a handshaketwisting hands together
or holding headpatting stomachsmilinghanding headYou are welcome.
Do you think we will have any difficulty in communication around the world using body language ?
Question:2018/12/1515ReadingCommunication : No problem?2018/12/1516 1. What is the main idea of the text?
A. There are different customs in different countries.
B. Foreigners should follow the customs of the country where they are visiting.
C. People use body language to send messages and people from different countries have different customs.
D. The importance of knowing customs. Skimming2018/12/15171.Who are the people mentioned in the passage?
2.Where are they from?
3.Why are the people visiting China?ChinaTony GarciaColumbiaJulia SmithBritainAkira NagataJapanGeorge CookCanadaAhmed AzizJordan Madame CoulonFranceIMr GarciaAhmed AzizJulia SmithNagata George
CookCoulon2018/12/1518Mr GarciaAhmed AzizNagata Julia SmithGeorge CookCoulonScanning1.How do they behave when they meet people
they know?2018/12/1519Mr GarciaAhmed AzizNagata Julia SmithGeorge CookCoulonshake hands and kisses other twice on each cheek.bows.shake hands.approaches others closely and touches their
shoulder and kisses them on the cheek.does not stand close to others or touch strangers.stand quite close to other men to talk but will
usually not touch women.2018/12/15202. Is the main character male or female? How do you know?Male. Because Ahmed Aziz only shakes hands with men. 2018/12/1521Find out the two mistakes the writer found in the airport:Mr. Garcia Julia SmithThe first mistakefromfrom(Columbia )(Britain)He approaches Ms Smith by _______ ______ _________ and _______ her on the ________.She ______ ________ appearing _________ and take a few steps _______ ______ Mr. Garcia.shouldertouchingherkissedcheekstepped backsurprisedaway fromReading – II ( 5m )2018/12/1522The second mistakea JapaneseGeorge Cookfrom(Canada)He ________ ________ _______ ________ to the Japanese.He ________ to Mr. Cook and his nose _________ Mr. Cook’s _______ ________.bowedtouchedmovinghandreached his handout2018/12/1523 Read paragraph3-6, then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F) and correct the error.TFT FEnglishmen often stand close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
Most people around the world now greet each other by kissing .
Japanese will bow to others as greeting.
People from Jordan will move very close to you as you introduce yourself to them.
Some body languages in some countries are good while some countries’ body language are bad.FReading – III ( 3m )Fill in the blanks: The first person who arrives is Mr. Garcia from Columbia, closely _________ by Julia Smith from Britain. When they are introduced to each other, Mr.Garcia approaches Ms Smith, _______ her shoulder and _______ her on the cheek . Ms Smith steps back appearing surprised. The visitor
from Japan comes in smiling at the same time as George Cook from Canada. As they are introduced, Mr. Cook _______ his hand out to the Japanese who ______ . His nose touches Mr. Cook’s moving hand, and they both _________. followedtoucheskissesreachesbowsapologize These are examples of learned or cultural “body language”. Not all cultures ________ each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching _________ or being too close or too far away. In the same way that people ____________ with spoken language, they also __________ their feelings using unspoken “language” through keeping physical distance, actions or _________.
expresscommunicatestrangersgreetpostureFill in the blanks:2018/12/1526Do you think body language is important?
Can you give some examples in which we only use body language to communicate? Discussion2018/12/1527Different facial expressions show different feelings:
What’ s the feeling of the man?
What might he be saying?2018/12/1528sadconfused“I have lost my wallet！”“I can’t believe what she said. That’s so unfair！”“I got an A in maths！”“I don’t know what to do.”happyangryFacial expressions2018/12/1529
One student acts out the following words , and the other students turn around and guess the word.Group1: swimming crying jumping lyingGroup2: happy confused angry tiredGroup3: keep quiet! Sit down. Be careful!
game2018/12/1530SummaryJust like verbal language(言辞), body language is part of culture. It plays an important role in daily communication. So, it is very important to understand and use it correctly. And for a foreign language learner, it is as necessary to learn the body language as to learn the verbal language.Warming up – II ( 2m )课件34张PPT。Subject-Verb AgreementThe group ____ made up of nine students.The group____ dancing happily.isareThe team ____ some good players. (have)
The team ____ handsome. (be)hasare?
Group discussion: Can you find out the grammar rules?Collective nouns can have a singular or plural verb. If the noun refers to a whole unit, the verb is singular. If it refers to the different members of a unit, the verb is plural. group, family, class, government,
team, public, enemy, crowd, company, audience, club, party, police, army, band, minority and so on.
Collective nouns（集体名词） 由集体名词，如group, family, class, government, team, public, enemy, crowd, company, audience, club, party, crew等作主语时,如果看成一个整体，谓语动词用单数形式,如果看成其中各成员， 则用复数形式.
注意：集体名词为 people, police, cattle，谓语动词用复数形式
e.g. The police are searching for the thief.
Choose the correct verb form to complete the following sentences.1.The research group (is, are) made up of five people. 2.What (do, does) the group want for their lunch?3.Our family (is, are) not poor any more.4.He has to worry. His family (is, are) waiting for him.5.The class (is, are) more than forty in number.isdoisareis6.The class (have, has) disagreed among themselves about where they should go and have a picnic. 7.The government (has, have) spent more than two million yuan in planting trees.8.The city government ( has, have) different opinions about next year’s plan. havehashaveNeither dog _____ big. ( A. is B. are )Neither of them _____ big. ( A. is B. are ) A Neither of the rabbits _____ handsome.. ( A. is B. are )A / BNeither rabbit _____ handsome. ( A. is B. are )AA / B＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿一、代词作主语neither of
none ofn. (U) n.(C)neither + n.(singl.) V. singl.
plural.How to use none and neitherV.(singl.)V.(singl.)3.Neither of us ________ (was/were) ready when the party began.
4. None of them ________ (has/have) watched the talk show.
have/haswas/were 1.None of these people ___ doctors.
A. has B. is C. are D. was
2.Neither of them ___ a good singer.
A. are B. is C. were D. is used to beCBeverybody当这些词做主语时，谓语动词用单数，在句中我们可以用they 来代替它们，有时我们可以用he/she来代替。anybodyeveryonenobodysomebody
everythinganythingnothingsomething
Indefinite pronouns
Nothing________difficult in the world if you set your mind to it .
2. Nobody thought_________________ would have to pay for_____________________ own ticket(s).they/he/shetheir/his/herisBob Bob _____ a worker.isMike Mike and Bob _____ workers.areBoth Mike and Bob _______
workers.areNeither Mike nor Bob _______
a teacher.isBill Neither of them _______
(know) how to teach English. knows/knowNone of them ___________
(know) how to teach English. knows/know二、用作主语的两个名词或代词由or, either… or, neither… nor,
both… and或not only… but also连接 A or B
Not A but B
Either A or B
Neither A nor B
Not only A but also B
Verb Here
There+Verb A and B A , B and C
Not only you but also he ____ wrong. (is/are)Neither you nor he ___ right. (is/are)There ___ two shops and a cinema beside the railway station. (is/are)Here __ a map and a handbook for you. (is/are)isisareis＿＿＿＿＿＿______＿a singer and dancer
The singer and dancer _____ on the stage.isThe gift is used to have western meals.
What is it?a knife and forkA knife and fork is used to have meals.三、由and连接的两个并列主语指同一个人或物，谓语动词用单数，这时后面的名词没有冠词。
1).The worker and writer ______ our school today.( visit )
2).The worker and the writer _________ to the meeting . (have come / has come )
have comevisits
Each man and woman ______ the same rights.
A. has??? B. have???
　　C. had??? D. is having
由each, every, no, many a所修饰的名词，即使用 and连接作主语，谓语动词一般用单数。

Ａ四、当主语后面跟有as well as, as much as, no less than,
along with,with ,like, rather than, together with , but ,
except, besides, ,including等引导的词组时，其谓语动词的
单、复数由主语的单、复数而定。1. The teacher with two students ______ at the meeting . (was / were)
2.E-mail, as well as the telephones, ________ an
important part in daily communication.A. is playing B. have played C. are playing D. play wasA
A library with five thousand books ___ to the nation as a gift. A. is offered B. has offered C. are offered D. have offered
Nobody but Jane ___ the secret.
A. know B. knows
C. have known D. is known
五、分词、量词作主语
由分数或百分数或a lot of, lots of, plenty of, half of, the rest of, some of, most of, all of , (a) part of +名词作主语时，谓语动词的形式与of 后面的名词的数一致
e.g. Lots of damage was caused by fire.
Some students are planting trees. The rest of them are watering them.
e.g. Tom is one of the students who good at playing football.
Tom is the only one of the students who good at playing football.
areis[注意]在“one of+复数名词+关系代词” 的结构中，定语从句中谓语动词用复 数形式；但是若前有the only, 将其限定为只有一个时,谓语动词用单数形式.
六、名词化的形容词作主语
e.g. The rich are to help the poor.
The wounded was a young boy.
以定冠词the + adj.（或过去分词）结构作主语，谓语动词常用复数形式，如the brave, the poor, the blind, the sick, the unemployed等，但有少数过去分词与定冠词连用时指个体，用单数形式。 七、当主语由不定式、动名词或疑问词引导的
句子充当时，谓语动词用单数。1).To hold the Olympic Games____ a rich
prize for a country. (be) 2). Choosing what to eat ___ no longer as
easy as it once was.isis What we need is more time and more materials.
由what, who, why, how, whether等引导的主语
从句，谓语动词通常用单数，(但所指的具体内
容为复数意义，则可以用复数形式. What we
need are teachers.)
3)八、表示时间、金钱、距离、重量等复数名词，在表示单位数量用作主语时，通常被看作整体，谓语动词用单数。 A million dollars __(is/are) really a lot of money.
isSixty years a long time.
Three thousand miles a long distance.
Fifty kilogrammes not too heavy to be carried.
isisis1．One or two days ____ enough to see the city．
A．is B．are
C．am D．be
2．Neither my wife nor I myself ____ able to persuade my daughter to change her mind．
A．is B．are
C．am D．beExercises:3．Not only I but also Jane and Mary ____ tired of having one examination after another．
A．is B．are
C．am D．be
4．Not the teacher，but the students ____ looking forward to seeing the film．
A．is B．are
C．am D．be
5．Nobody but Betty and Mary ____ late for class yesterday．
A．was B．were
C．has been D．have been
6．A woman with some children ____ soon．
A．is coming B．are coming
C．has come D．have come7．No one except my parents ____ anything about this.
A．know B．knows
C．is known D．are known
8．The teacher as well as the students ____ the book already．
A．has read B．have read
C．are reading D．is reading
9．All but one ____ in the accident．
A．was killed B．were killed
C．will be killed D．are killed
10. When and where to build the new factory ___ yet.
A. is not decided B. are not decided
C. has not decided D. have not decided 11. The number of people invited ___fifty, but a number of them ___ absent for different reasons.
A. were; was B. was; was
C. was; were D. were; were
12. ____ of the land in that district ____ covered with trees and grass.
A. Two fifth; is B. Two fifth; are
C. Two fifths; is D. Two fifths; are
HomeworkFinish workbook page 43 using structures 1 and
page 44 using structures 2.Thank you!See you!课件16张PPT。defence,
likely,
Italy,
canteen,
represent,
dash,
approach,
association,
cheek,
flight Learning about languageAnswer key for Exercise 1 on page 28:Joan was sitting in the park. A tall, dark woman __________ her, singing loudly. She looked as if she was from a Middle Eastern country, maybe _________. After a minute, the woman stopped and started hitting her own ______. Joan watched ________, thinking that the woman seemed a little crazy. Suddenly, the woman saw Joan and _______ over to her. Joan then realized that she had _____________ the woman’s actions – she wasn’t crazy. She was, on the ________, asking for help to kill a bee!approachedJordancheekcuriouslydashedmisunderstandcontraryAnswer key for Exercise 2 on page 28:Answer key for Exercise 3 on page 28:Julie was at a __________. She had just graduated from university and was ready to begin life as an independent _____. She had already received some great job offers from several ______ companies and was very excited about the opportunities. While cleaning out her _________ room on her last day at university, she received an unexpected phone call. crosswordsadultmajordormitoryThe caller _______ her in careful English and then introduced himself as ___________ an international __________. He had met Julie a few weeks ago at a job fair and was impressed with her _______ English. The only difficulty was that his company was in the country of _________. Julie was _______ to find out more, so after talking with her parents that evening, she booked a _____ to South America.greetedrepresentingassociationspokenColombiacuriousflightUsing words and expressionsMr Burns looks rather upset, so he ____ not _______ listen to you.
Today he seems rather unhappy, but _________ he is a very cheerful guy.
Jack had a terrible day. He _______ in front of the class, forgetting his words when he started to answer the teacher’s question.islikely toin generallost faceAnswer key for Exercise 1 on page 63:I usually feel very nervous when I stand up in front of others, but today I felt quite ______ when giving a speech to the school.
I think Ms Jackon is a little angry. Mr Potter came over to talk to her, but when she saw him coming, she ______________ him.
The army ________ its homeland _______ all enemies.at easeturned her back todefendedagainstA: Did you see that great _______ at the theatre last night?
B: Oh, yes… I _______ the whole time. It was so boring!
A: Boring?! I _____ thought that that play was one of the best I’ve seen _ it is certainly going to be a worldwide success!Answer key for Exercise 2 on page 63:comedyyawnedtrulyB: Oh, come on! Your ________ is nice, but you have to admit – the main actor was terrible. When he tried to show _____, the only thing that seemed angry was his sharking ____!
A: That opinion is completely _________. I think the whole purpose of the author was to show that our _____ expressions can make our _________ have no meaning.
B: Well, if that was his purpose, it worked well!optimismangerfistsubjectivefacialstatements
He died defending the honour of his nation.
Elizabeth did not trust him, so she gave him a false name and address .
Jenny can’t fun_ction without a cup of coffee in the morning.
During World War II, he rose gradually from the rank of major to general.
Don’t forget to bring your cassette recorder tomorrow.
There must be some misunderstanding. I don’t know what you’re talking about. Answer key for Exercise 4 on page 63:Discovering useful structuresAnswer key for Exercise 2 on page 29:We were all nervous about the ___________ examinations.
I always know when my mother is telling a joke. After a few seconds, she always looks at me ________.
Business leaders often look very serious. They do not often have _______ faces.approachinglaughingsmilingAfter the dog fell in the lake, it climbed out _______ itself.
The ________ buildings showed us that an earthquake was coming.
After we saw the comedy show, we left the theatre _________ .
It is exciting to watch _________ athletes reach the other end of the swimming pool.
The blind man walked ________ the walls of the buildings.shakingshakinglaughingcompetingtouchingUsing structures Answer key for Exercise 1 on page 64:The smiling man held the front door open and bowed deeply.
The car raced past, almost hitting us as it turned the corner .
I looked up to see a long time of flying birds.
Your mother just called, hoping to talk to you.There was a man sitting on the sofa and reading a newspaper.
Hearing that his wife had been in an accident, Mr Armstrong hurried to the hospital to see her.
He stayed in the waiting room for over an hour during the operation, worrying about her.
The field of flowers, waving in the wind, seemed to go on for miles.Answer key for Exercise 2 on page 64:It seemed that he avoided ______ too close to her.
The news that the Chinese team won the gold medal was very __________.
It is clear that your ______ English will greatly improve if you can practise _______ whenever you can.
I saw them ________ to each other, obviously not wanting to be heard.gettingencouragingspokenspeakingwhisperingI watched the people ________ the theatre, _______ a total of 547.
The man _______ the sunglasses is a detective.
_____ ill, he did not take part in the sports meeting.
______ his car around is his main hobby.
I almost fell asleep when I was watching that ______ film.enteringcountingwearingBeingDrivingboringStanding up and walking around , the young mother held her smiling baby. He was very quiet and peaceful, looking everywhere around him. After a while, his mother, being tired ,sat down. The baby immediately started to cry. Jumping up and down in her arms, he screamed louder and louder . The frowning mother quickly pulled a bottle out of her bag and gave it to her baby. Drinking noisily, the baby was again quiet and peaceful. Answer key for Exercise 3 on page 64: